For warranty service or repair, this product must be returned to a service facility designated by Agilent
Technologies. Buyer shall prepay shipping charges to Agilent Technologies and Agilent Technologies
shall pay shipping charges to return the product to Buyer. However, Buyer shall pay all shipping charges,
duties, and taxes for products returned to Agilent Technologies from another country.

Agilent Technologies warrants that its software and firmware designated by Agilent Technologies for use
with an instrument will execute its programming instructions when properly installed on that instrument.
Agilent Technologies does not warrant that the operation of the instrument, or software, or firmware will

2
be uninterrupted or error-free.
LIMITATION OF WARRANTY
The foregoing warranty shall not apply to defects resulting from improper or inadequate maintenance
by Buyer, Buyer-supplied software or interfacing, unauthorized modification or misuse, operation
outside of the environmental specifications for the product, or improper site preparation or
maintenance.
NO OTHER WARRANTY IS EXPRESSED OR IMPLIED. AGILENT TECHNOLOGIES
SPECIFICALLY DISCLAIMS THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND
FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE.
EXCLUSIVE REMEDIES
THE REMEDIES PROVIDED HEREIN ARE BUYER'S SOLE AND EXCLUSIVE REMEDIES.
AGILENT TECHNOLOGIES SHALL NOT BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT,
SPECIAL, INCIDENTAL, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES, WHETHER BASED ON
CONTRACT, TORT, OR ANY OTHER LEGAL THEORY.

Assistance
Product maintenance agreements and other customer assistance agreements are available for Agilent
Technologies products.
For any assistance, contact your nearest Agilent Technologies Sales and Service Office.

Cleaning
The instrument front and rear panels should be cleaned using a soft cloth with water or a mild soap and
water mixture.

3
General Safety Considerations

WARNING Before this instrument is switched on, make sure it has been properly grounded
through the protective conductor of the ac power cable to a socket outlet provided
with protective earth contact.
Any interruption of the protective (grounding) conductor, inside or outside the
instrument, or disconnection of the protective earth terminal can result in personal
injury.

WARNING There are many points in the instrument which can, if contacted, cause personal
injury. Be extremely careful.
Any adjustments or service procedures that require operation of the instrument
with protective covers removed should be performed only by trained service
personnel.

CAUTION Before this instrument is switched on, make sure its primary power circuitry has been
adapted to the voltage of the ac power source.
Failure to set the ac power input to the correct voltage could cause damage to the
instrument when the ac power cable is plugged in.

Differences between Agilent Technologies 8560 E-Series and

EC-Series Spectrum Analyzers
1. EC-series analyzers use a color LCD display which is not adjustable. E-series instruments use a
monochrome CRT display which can be adjusted for focus and intensity. E-series analyzers use a
high-voltage module (HVM), located in the power supply, to supply power to the CRT. EC-series
analyzers do not use an HVM.
2. EC-series analyzers offer fast analog-to-digital-conversion (FADC) digitized sweep times as a
standard feature. EC-series FADC circuitry is integrated into the A2 controller board. E-series
instruments offer FADC feature as an option (Option 007) which is implemented through the use of
the A16 FADC board. FADC enables you to view displays with fast sweep times, between 30 ms and
50 μs.
3. EC-series instruments offer a rear-panel VGA connection as a standard feature. E-series instruments
do not have a rear-panel VGA connector. The VGA connection is always active and does not require
user activation.

In all other operational respects the 8560 EC-series and E-series are identical.

4
Contents

1. Using Operation Verification Software − Volume I

What You'll Find in This Chapter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12
Getting Started . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
Using Operation Verification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22
Operation Verification Menu Softkeys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34
Test Descriptions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36
10 MHz Reference Accuracy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37
1ST LO OUTPUT Amplitude Accuracy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38
Calibrator Amplitude Accuracy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39
Displayed Average Noise Level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40
Fast Sweep Time Accuracy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41
Frequency Readout/Frequency Counter Accuracy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42
Frequency Response . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43
Frequency Span Accuracy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45
IF Gain Uncertainty . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46
Image and Multiple Responses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47
Input Attenuator Switching Uncertainty . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48
Noise Sidebands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49
RES BW Accuracy and Selectivity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50
RES BW Switching and IF Alignment Uncertainty . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51
Residual FM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52
Scale Fidelity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53
Second Harmonic Distortion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54
Operation Verification Error Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56

2. 8560E/EC Specifications and Characteristics

Specifications and Characteristics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64
Calibration Cycle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64
Frequency Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65
Amplitude Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73
Tracking Generator Specifications (Option 002) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80
Inputs and Outputs Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82
General Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83
Frequency Characteristics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87
Amplitude Characteristics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91
Option 002 Tracking Generator Characteristics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93
Inputs and Outputs Characteristics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94
Regulatory Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98

3. 8561E/EC Specifications and Characteristics

Specifications and Characteristics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102
Calibration Cycle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103
Frequency Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104
Amplitude Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112
Inputs and Outputs Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119
General Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120
Frequency Characteristics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124
Amplitude Characteristics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128

5
Contents

Inputs and Outputs Characteristics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130

Regulatory Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134

4. 8562E/EC Specifications and Characteristics

Specifications and Characteristics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138
Calibration Cycle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139
Frequency Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140
Amplitude Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149
Inputs and Outputs Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157
General Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 158
Frequency Characteristics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162
Amplitude Characteristics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 166
Inputs and Outputs Characteristics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 169
Regulatory Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 173

5. 8563E/EC Specifications and Characteristics

Specifications and Characteristics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 178
Calibration Cycle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 179
Frequency Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 180
Amplitude Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 189
Inputs and Outputs Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 197
General Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 198
Frequency Characteristics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 202
Amplitude Characteristics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 206
Inputs and Outputs Characteristics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 209
Regulatory Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 213

6. 8564E/EC Specifications and Characteristics

Specifications and Characteristics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 218
Calibration Cycle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 219
Frequency Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 220
Amplitude Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 229
Inputs and Outputs Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 237
General Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 238
Frequency Characteristics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 242
Amplitude Characteristics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 246
Inputs and Outputs Characteristics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 250
Regulatory Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 254

7. 8565E/EC Specifications and Characteristics

Specifications and Characteristics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 258
Calibration Cycle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 259
Frequency Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 260
Amplitude Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 269
Inputs and Outputs Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 277
General Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 278
Frequency Characteristics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 282
Amplitude Characteristics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 286

6
Contents

Inputs and Outputs Characteristics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 290

Regulatory Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 294

8. Using Performance Tests:

3335A Source not Available
What You'll Find in This Chapter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 298
Before You Start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 299
Required Test Equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 301
11a. Resolution Bandwidth Switching and IF Alignment Uncertainty . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 308
12a. Resolution Bandwidth Accuracy and Selectivity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 312
13a. Input Attenuator Switching Uncertainty: 8560E/EC, 8561E/EC, 8562E/EC, and 8563E/EC . . . . . 321
14a. Input Attenuator Switching Uncertainty: 8564E/EC and 8565E/EC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 329
15a. IF Gain Uncertainty . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 338
16a. Scale Fidelity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 346
33a. Second Harmonic Distortion: 8560E/EC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 359
34a. Second Harmonic Distortion: Agilent 8561E/EC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 361
36a. Frequency Response: 8560E/EC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 366
37a. Frequency Response: 8561E/EC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 377
38a. Frequency Response: 8562E/EC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 393
39a. Frequency Response: Agilent 8563E/EC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 416
40a. Frequency Response: Agilent 8564E/EC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 435
41a. Frequency Response: Agilent 8565E/EC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 458
43a. Third Order Intermodulation Distortion: 8560E/EC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 480
44a. Third Order Intermodulation Distortion: Agilent 8561E/EC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 484
45a. Third Order Intermodulation Distortion: Agilent 8562E/EC, Agilent 8563E/EC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 491
46a. Third Order Intermodulation Distortion: Agilent 8564E/EC, Agilent 8565E/EC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 500

9. General Regulatory and Safety Information

Safety Symbols . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 510
General Safety Considerations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 511

10. Using Performance Tests − Volume II

What You'll Find in This Chapter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 514
Performance Tests versus Operation Verification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 515
Before You Start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 516
Agilent 85629B Functional Tests . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 521
Running the Functional Tests . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 523
1. 10 MHz Reference Output Accuracy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 534
2. 10 MHz Reference Output Accuracy (Option 103) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 538
3. Fast Sweep Time Accuracy (EC-Series and E-Series with Option 007) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 540
4. Calibrator Amplitude Accuracy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 542
5. Displayed Average Noise Level: 8560E/EC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 544
6. Displayed Average Noise Level: Agilent 8561E/EC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 550
7. Displayed Average Noise Level: Agilent 8562E/EC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 556
8. Displayed Average Noise Level: Agilent 8563E/EC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 562
9. Displayed Average Noise Level: Agilent 8564E/EC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 570
10. Displayed Average Noise Level: Agilent 8565E/EC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 579
11. Resolution Bandwidth Switching and IF Alignment Uncertainty . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 589

7
Contents

12. Resolution Bandwidth Accuracy and Selectivity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 592

13. Input Attenuator Switching Uncertainty: 8560E/EC, Agilent 8561E/EC, Agilent 8562E/EC/, Agilent
8563E/EC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 600
14. Input Attenuator Switching Uncertainty: Agilent 8564E/EC, Agilent 8565E/EC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 607
15. IF Gain Uncertainty . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 614
16. Scale Fidelity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 619
17. Residual FM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 629
18. Noise Sidebands: 8560E, Agilent 8561E, Agilent 8563E . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 632
19. Noise Sidebands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 635
20. Image, Multiple, and Out-of-Range Responses: 8560E/EC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 639
21. Image, Multiple, Out-of-Band, and Out-of-Range Responses: Agilent 8561E/EC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 642
22. Image, Multiple, and Out-of-Band Responses: Agilent 8562E/EC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 646
23. Image, Multiple, and Out-of-Band Responses: Agilent 8563E/EC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 650
24. Image, Multiple, and Out-of-Band Responses: Agilent 8564E/EC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 656
25. Image, Multiple, and Out-of-Band Responses: Agilent 8565E/EC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 664
26. Frequency Readout/Frequency Count Marker Accuracy: 8560E/EC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 672
27. Frequency Readout/Frequency Count Marker Accuracy: Agilent 8561E/EC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 675
28. Frequency Readout Accuracy/Frequency Count Marker Accuracy: Agilent 8562E/EC . . . . . . . . . . 678
29. Frequency Readout Accuracy/Frequency Count Marker Accuracy: Agilent 8563E/EC . . . . . . . . . . 681
30. Frequency Readout Accuracy/Frequency Count Marker Accuracy: Agilent 8564E/EC . . . . . . . . . . 685
31. Frequency Readout Accuracy/Frequency Count& Marker Accuracy: Agilent 8565E/EC . . . . . . . . . 689
32. Pulse Digitization Uncertainty . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 694
33. Second Harmonic Distortion: Agilent 8560E/EC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 698
34. Second Harmonic Distortion: Agilent 8561E/EC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 700
35. Second Harmonic Distortion: Agilent 8562E/EC, Agilent 8563E/EC, Agilent 8564E/EC, Agilent
8565E/EC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 705
36. Frequency Response: 8560E/EC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 712
37. Frequency Response: Agilent 8561E/EC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 723
38. Frequency Response: Agilent 8562E/EC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 738
39. Frequency Response: Agilent 8563E/EC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 759
40. Frequency Response: Agilent 8564E/EC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 775
41. Frequency Response: Agilent 8565E/EC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 794
42. Frequency Span Accuracy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 814
43. Third Order Intermodulation Distortion: 8560E/EC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 817
44. Third Order Intermodulation Distortion: Agilent 8561E/EC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 821
45. Third Order Intermodulation Distortion: Agilent 8562E/EC, 8563E/EC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 827
46. Third Order Intermodulation Distortion: Agilent 8564E/EC, 8565E/EC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 836
47. Gain Compression: 8560E/EC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 844
48. Gain Compression: Agilent 8561E/EC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 847
49. Gain Compression: Agilent 8562E/EC, Agilent 8563E/EC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 851
50. Gain Compression: Agilent 8564E/EC, Agilent 8565E/EC. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 856
51. 1ST LO OUTPUT Amplitude: 8560E/EC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 861
52. 1ST LO OUTPUT Amplitude: Agilent 8561E/EC, Agilent 8562E/EC, Agilent 8563E/EC, Agilent
8564E/EC, Agilent8565E/EC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 865
53. Sweep Time Accuracy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 868
54. Residual Responses: 8560E/EC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 874
55. Residual Responses: Agilent 8561E/EC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 877
56. Residual Responses: Agilent 8562E/EC, Agilent 8563E/EC, Agilent 8564E/EC, Agilent 8565E/EC 880
57. IF INPUT Amplitude Accuracy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 883

8
Contents

58. Gate Delay Accuracy and Gate Length Accuracy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 886

59. Delayed Sweep Accuracy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 892
60. Tracking Generator Level Flatness . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 895
61. Absolute Amplitude and Vernier Accuracy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 899
62. Maximum Leveled Output Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 902
63. Power Sweep Range . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 905
64. RF-Power-Off Residuals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 908
65. Harmonic Spurious Outputs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 911
66. Non-Harmonic Spurious Outputs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 915
67. LO Feedthrough Amplitude . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 921
68. Tracking Generator Feedthrough . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 924
69. Frequency Tracking Range . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 928
70. Tracking Generator Frequency Accuracy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 931

11. 8560E/EC Performance Test Record

Test Record . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 936

12. 8561E/EC Performance Test Record

Test Record . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 960

13. 8562E/EC Performance Test Record

Test Record . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 982

14. 8563E/EC Performance Test Record

Test Record . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1004

15. 8564E/EC Performance Test Record

Test Record . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1028

16. 8565E/EC Performance Test Record

Test Record . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1056

9
Contents

10
1 Using Operation Verification Software −
Volume I

11
Using Operation Verification Software − Volume I
What You'll Find in This Chapter

What You'll Find in This Chapter

This automated test software is designed to give a high confidence level of
spectrum analyzer operation in a reasonable amount of time. Instructions for using
the software, brief descriptions of the tests, and a list of the software error
messages are included in this chapter. Refer to Table 1-3, on page 19, for the
names of manual performance tests that are not included in the automated
operation verification software.

What Is Operation Verification?

Operation Verification automates many of the performance tests. It is
recommended as a check of instrument operation for incoming inspection or after a
repair. It performs 80 to 85 percent of the manual performance tests in less than 60
minutes (75 minutes for the Agilent 8564E/EC and Agilent 8565E/EC). It is
designed to test an instrument operating within a 20 °C to 30 °C temperature range
using a minimum set of test equipment. Refer to Table 1-1, on page 16 for a list of
tests performed.
If a test does not pass, the related manual performance test needs to be run. Related
manual performance tests are listed at the top of each operation verification test
description and the test procedures are in “Using Performance Tests” Chapter 10,
of Volume II of the calibration guide.

Operation Verification versus Performance Tests

The performance tests verify that the analyzer performance meets all
specifications. Performance verification consists of executing all of the manual
performance tests. It is time-consuming and requires extensive test equipment.

12 Chapter 1
Using Operation Verification Software − Volume I
Getting Started

Getting Started
First, make sure you have a compatible controller (computer), the proper test
equipment, and a printer for recording test results. The following paragraphs
describe requirements for controllers, test equipment, and printers. Once the
proper equipment is identified, proceed to “Equipment Connections.”

Spectrum Analyzers
The 8560 E-Series and EC-Series Operation and Verification software tests the
following spectrum analyzers:

Spectrum Analyzer Software Revision

8560E/EC all

Agilent 8561E/EC all

Agilent 8562E/EC D.00.00 and later

Agilent 8563E/EC all

Agilent 8564E/EC C.00.00 and later

Agilent 8565E/EC C.00.00 and later

Errors will occur if this software is used to test spectrum analyzers other than those
listed above. Other versions of the operation verification software are available for
testing other 8560 Series spectrum analyzers.

Controller (Computer)
Operation Verification software requires using any combination of one of the
following controllers and the HP BASIC operating system:

Controller

9000 model 216

9000 model 236

9000 model 310

Chapter 1 13
Using Operation Verification Software − Volume I
Getting Started

Operating System

HP BASIC 2.0 with extensions 2.1

HP BASIC 3.0 and required BIN files

HP BASIC 4.0 and required BIN files

Other 9000 Series 300 controllers are compatible with the Operation Verification
software; however, the graph printouts might not be full width. This is especially
true with medium- and high-resolution displays.
The Operation Verification program requires at least 500K of free memory. The
computer can have either single or dual GPIB ports. Refer to “Dual-Bus
Operation,” on page 28, under “Using Operation Verification,” on page 22, for
information on using the program with dual GPIB ports.

Test Equipment
Table 1-1, on page 16, lists the operation verification tests and the test equipment
required for each test. You do not need all the test equipment connected to perform
operation verification. You need only connect the equipment specified in each test
to run that test.

NOTE The Agilent 3335A Synthesizer Level Generator, which is used in several
operation verification tests, has been obsoleted. If an Agilent 3335A is not
available, alternate test equipment can be used to perform comparable tests
manually. Chapter 8 in this volume contains the information on alternate test
equipment and manuals test procedures you will need to perform these tests.

Table 1-2, on page 19, summarizes the equipment required to run the Operation
Verification tests. Some tests, like 10 MHz Reference Accuracy, can use various
model numbers of a particular equipment type. Information about selecting the
equipment model number you want to use is provided in “Setting GPIB
Addresses,” on page 25, in this chapter under “Using Operation Verification,” on
page 22.

NOTE The validity of Operation Verification program measurements depends in part on

required test equipment measurement accuracy. Verify proper calibration of test
equipment before testing the analyzer with the software.

14 Chapter 1
Using Operation Verification Software − Volume I
Getting Started

Printers
All test results are sent to a GPIB printer. The program does not run without being
connected to a GPIB printer. Virtually any GPIB graphics workstation printer can
work. These tests have been run using the HP ThinkJet, 2671G, 82906A,
and 9876G printers.

Warmup Time

Test Equipment Warmup Allow sufficient warmup time for test equipment.
Refer to their individual operating and service manuals for warmup specifications.

Spectrum Analyzer Warmup Warm the spectrum analyzer up for at least five
minutes before performing the first test.

NOTE Since the preselector in the Agilent 8561E/EC, Agilent 8562E/EC, Agilent
8563E/EC, Agilent 8564E/EC and Agilent 8565E/EC spectrum analyzers is not
peaked during the Frequency Response test, allow a 30 minute warmup at 20 °C to
30 °C before beginning this test. If you start running All Tests after five-minute
warmup, the spectrum analyzer will have warmed up for 30 minutes by the time
the Frequency Response test begins.

Chapter 1 15
Using Operation Verification Software − Volume I
Getting Started

Table 1-1 Equipment Required for Each Operation Verification Test

Test Name Equipment Required

Agilent Agilent Agilent Agilent Agilent Agilent

8560E/EC 8561E/EC 8562E/EC 8563E/EC 8564E/EC 8565E/EC

10 MHz 5342A, 5342A, 5342A, 5342A, 5342A, 5342A,

Reference 5343A, or 5343A, or 5343A, or 5343A, or 5343A, or 5343A, or
Accuracy 5350B* 5350B* 5350B* 5350B* 5350B* 5350B*

1ST LO 8902A or 8902A or 8902A or 8902A or 8902A or 8902A or

OUTPUT 436A or 438A 436A or 438A 436A or 438A 436A or 438A 436A or 438A 436A or 438A
Amplitude
8485A or 8485A or 8485A or 8485A or 8485A or 8485A or
Accuracy
8481A 8481A 8481A 8481A 8481A 8481A

Calibrator 8902A, 436A 8902A, 436A 8902A, 436A 8902A, 436A 8902A, 436A 8902A, 436A
Amplitude or 438A or 438A or 438A or 438A or 438A or 438A
Accuracy
8481A, or 8481A, or 8481A, or 8481A, or 8481A, or 8481A, or
8482A 8482A 8482A 8482A 8482A 8482A

Displayed 909D 909D 909D 909D 85138B 85138B

Average
Noise Level

Fast Sweep 5342A, 5342A, 5342A, 5342A, 5342A, 5342A,

Time 5343A, or 5343A, or 5343A, or 5343A, or 5343A, or 5343A, or
Accuracy 5350B** 5350B** 5350B** 5350B** 5350B** 5350B**

Frequency 8340A/B or 8340A/B or 8340A/B or 8340A/B or 83640A or 83650A

Readout/ 83640A or 83640A or 83640A or 83640A or 83650A
Counter 83650A 83650A 83650A 83650A
Accuracy
8120-4921 8120-4921 8120-4921 8120-4921
8120-6164
8120-6164

Frequency 8340A/B or 8340A/B or 8340A/B or 8340A/B or 83640A or 83650A

Span 83640A or 83640A or 83640A or 83640A or 83650A
Accuracy 83650A 83650A 83650A 83650A
11667A/B 11667A/B 11667A/B 11667B
11667C
8120-4921 8120-4921 8120-4921 8120-4921
11667C
8120-6164
8120-6164

16 Chapter 1
Using Operation Verification Software − Volume I
Getting Started

Table 1-1 Equipment Required for Each Operation Verification Test

Test Name Equipment Required

Agilent Agilent Agilent Agilent Agilent Agilent

8560E/EC 8561E/EC 8562E/EC 8563E/EC 8564E/EC 8565E/EC

Frequency* 8340A/B or 8340A/B or 8340A/B or 8340A/B or 83640A or 83650A

Response 83640A or 83640A or 83640A or 83640A or 83650A
83650A 83650A 83650A 83650A
3335A 3335A 3335A 3335A
3335A
8902A or 8902A or 8902A or 8902A or
3335A
436A or 438A 436A or 438A 436A or 438A 436A or 438A 8902A or
436A or 438A 8902A or
8482A 8481A 8481A 8485A
436A or 438A
8487A
11667A/B 11667A/B 11667A/B 11667B
8487A
11667C
8120-4921 8120-4921 8120-4921 8120-4921
11667C
8120-6164
8120-6164

IF Gain* 3335A 3335A 3335A 3335A 3335A 3335A

Uncertainty

Image and 8340A/B or 8340A/B or 8340A/B or 8340A/B or 83640A or 83650A

Multiple 83640A or 83640A or 83640A or 83640A or 83650A
Responses 83650A 83650A 83650A 83650A
8902A or 8902A or 8902A or 8902A or
436A or 438A 436A or 438A 436A or 438A 436A or 438A 8902A or
436A or 438A 8902A or
8481A 8481A 8481A 8485A
436A or 438A
8487A
11667A/B 11667A/B 11667A/B 11667B
8487A
11667C
8120-4921 8120-4921 8120-4921 8120-4921
11667C
8120-6164
8120-6164

Input* 3335A 3335A 3335A 3335A 3335A 3335A

Attenuator
Switching
Uncertainty

Noise 8662A or 8662A or 8662A or 8662A or 8662A or 8662A or

Sidebands 8663A or 8663A or 8663A or 8663A or 8663A or 8663A or
CAL OUTPUT CAL OUTPUT CAL OUTPUT CAL OUTPUT CAL OUTPUT CAL OUTPUT
signal signal signal signal signal signal

RES BW* 3335A 3335A 3335A 3335A 3335A 3335A

Accuracy/
Selectivity

RES BW* 3335A 3335A 3335A 3335A 3335A 3335A

Switching
Uncertainty

Chapter 1 17
Using Operation Verification Software − Volume I
Getting Started

Table 1-1 Equipment Required for Each Operation Verification Test

Test Name Equipment Required

Agilent Agilent Agilent Agilent Agilent Agilent

8560E/EC 8561E/EC 8562E/EC 8563E/EC 8564E/EC 8565E/EC

Residual FM 8662A or 8662A or 8662A or 8662A or 8662A or 8662A or

8663A 8663A 8663A 8663A 8663A 8663A

Scale* 3335A 3335A 3335A 3335A 3335A 3335A

Fidelity

Second 8340A/B or 8340A/B or 8340A/B or 8340A/B or 83640A or 83650A

Harmonic 83640A or 83640A or 83640A or 83640A or 83650A
Distortion 83650A 83650A 83650A 83650A
8902A or 8902A or 8902A or 8902A or
436A or 438A 436A or 438A 436A or 438A 436A or 438A 8902A or
436A or 438A 8902A or
8485A or 8485A or 8485A or 8485A or
436A or 438A
8481A 8481A 8481A 8481A 8485A or
8481A 8485A or
11667A/B 11667A/B 11667A/B 11667B
8481A
11667C
11689A (2 11689A (2 11689A (2
11667C
required) required) required) 11689A (2
required) 11689A (2
0955-0306 0955-0306 0955-0306 0955-0306
required)
0955-0306
8120-4921 8120-4921 8120-4921 8120-4921
0955-0306
8120-6164
8120-6164
* The 3335A Synthesizer Level Generator, which is used in several operation verification tests, has been obsoleted. If an 3335A is
not available, alternate test equipment can be used to perform comparable tests manually. Chapter 8 in this volume contains the
information on alternate test equipment and manuals test procedures you will need to perform these tests.

* *The Agilent 5350B is supported only in software revision D.00.00 and later.

18 Chapter 1
Using Operation Verification Software − Volume I
Getting Started

Table 1-2 Required Test Equipment Summary

Type of Equipment Model Number

Controller* Series 200 9000 model 216 ( 9816)

9000 model 236 ( 9836)
or 9000 model 310

Synthesizer/level generator 3335A

Synthesized sweeper (10 MHz to 26.5 GHz) 8340A/B ( 8560E/EC, 8561E/EC, 8562E/EC, and 8563E/EC)
(10 MHz to 40 GHz) 85640A ( 8564E/EC)
(10 MHz to 50 GHz) 85650A ( 8565E/EC)

Synthesized signal generator 8662A/8663A

Measuring receiver 8902A

Power meter 436A or 438A (alternate)

Microwave frequency counter 5343A

Microwave frequency counter 5342A (alternate)

Microwave frequency counter 5350B (alternate) †

Power sensor (100 kHz to 4.2 GHz) 8482A

Power sensor (50 MHz to 26.5 GHz) 8485A ( 8560E/EC, 8561E/EC, 8562E/EC, and 8563E/EC)
(50 MHz to 50 GHz) 8487A ( 8564E/EC and 8565E/EC)

Power sensor (10 MHz to 18 GHz) 8481A (alternate for 8560E/EC, 8561E/EC, and 8562E/EC)

Power splitter (dc to 18 GHz) 11667A ( 8560E/EC, 8561E/EC, and 8562E/EC)

(dc to 26.5 GHz) 11667B ( 8560E/EC, 8561E/EC, 8562E/EC, and 8563E/EC)
11667C ( 8564E/EC and 8565E/EC)
(dc to 50 GHz)

4.4 GHz low-pass filter (two required) 11689A ( 8561E/EC, 8562E/EC, 8563E/EC, 8564E/EC, and
8565E/EC)

50 Ω termination (dc to 26.5 GHz) 909D ( 8560E/EC, 8561E/EC, 8562E/EC, and 8563E/EC)
85138B ( 8564E/EC and 8565E/EC)
(dc to 50 GHz)

50 MHz low-pass filter 0955-0306

Miscellaneous cables and adapters As per test setup

GPIB printer See “Printers”

*
500 kilobytes of free memory is required for the test program.
† Th 5350B is supported only in software revision D.00.00 and later.

Table 1-3 Manual Performance Tests That Are Not Automated

Pulse Digitization Uncertainty

Chapter 1 19
Using Operation Verification Software − Volume I
Getting Started

Table 1-3 Manual Performance Tests That Are Not Automated

Third Order Intermodulation Distortion

Gain Compression

Sweep Time Accuracy

Residual Responses

IF Input Amplitude Accuracy

Gate Delay Accuracy and Gate Length Accuracy

Delayed Sweep Accuracy

These tests apply only to 8560E/EC Option 002:

Tracking Generator Level Flatness

Absolute Amplitude and Vernier Accuracy

Maximum Leveled Output Power

Power Sweep Range

RF-Power-Off Residuals

Harmonic Outputs

Non-Harmonic Outputs

Tracking Generator Feedthrough

LO Feedthrough Amplitude

Frequency Tracking Range

Tracking Generator Frequency Accuracy

Equipment Connections

Computer (Controller) Setup

For 9000 model 216 or model 236 computers, setup instructions are provided in
Chapter 1, “Computer Installation,” of the BASIC Operating Manual. For 9000
model 310 computers, setup information is provided in Configuration Reference
Manual for Series 300 computers.

20 Chapter 1
Using Operation Verification Software − Volume I
Getting Started

GPIB Cables
All test equipment controlled by GPIB should be connected to the internal GPIB of
the controller (select code 7). If the controller has only one GPIB connector,
connect the spectrum analyzer to it as well. If the controller has dual GPIB
connectors, connect the spectrum analyzer under test to the second GPIB
(typically, select code 8).

10 MHz Reference
The 10 MHz REF IN/OUT on the spectrum analyzer under test should be
connected to the synthesized sweeper external frequency reference. That is, it
should be connected to the FREQUENCY STANDARD EXT of the 8340A/B or
the 10MHz REF INPUT of the 83640A or 83650A.
Connect the synthesized sweeper 10 MHz REF OUTPUT to the 40/N MHz REF
INPUT of the 3335A. Do not connect the spectrum analyzer 10 MHz REF
IN/OUT to the external frequency reference input of the 8663A; doing so
invalidates the Noise Sidebands test results.

NOTE Terminate the 3335A 10 MHz REF OVEN OUTPUT in 50 Ω. Do not connect the
10 MHz output to the external frequency reference input of any other test
equipment.

Test Setups
Test setups for each test are included with the test. These are in the “Test
Descriptions” section of this chapter. The program prompts the operator to make
appropriate equipment connections if the correct equipment setup is not detected.

Chapter 1 21
Using Operation Verification Software − Volume I
Using Operation Verification

Using Operation Verification

Loading the Program

Load BASIC into the computer. BASIC choices are:
• BASIC 2.0 and extensions 2.1
• BASIC 3.0 or 4.0, which must include the following binaries:
MAT
IO
GRAPH
GRAPHX
PDEV
IB
MS
CLOCK
CS80
DISC
KBD
For configuration instructions, refer to the BASIC Operating Manual. Download
the Operation Verification software from
www.agilent.com/find/8560_software.
Once the software is on a drive accessible by the test computer, type:
LOAD “VERIFY_6XE”,1
Press EXECUTE on 9000 Series 200 computers, or RETURN on 9000 Series 300
computers, to load the software and start the program running.

22 Chapter 1
Using Operation Verification Software − Volume I
Using Operation Verification

Program Operation
Operation Verification consists of three menus. They are the Conditions Menu, the
Test Menu, and the Sensor Utilities Menu, which are accessed from the Conditions
Menu. Program operation is controlled through a combination of softkeys and user
prompts. Some prompts, primarily in the Conditions and Sensor Utilities Menus,
require computer keyboard entries. Terminate keyboard entries with the RETURN
or ENTER key. Most prompts, however, tell the user what to do next or provide
informational messages.
If the message (any key) follows a prompt, pressing any key on the keyboard
continues the program. If the message (any key
or `Q' to quit) follows a prompt, pressing any key except Q continues the
program. Pressing Q terminates the current procedure at the next, most logical
point in the program.

Conditions Menu
The first menu screen displayed is the Conditions Menu. The pointer displayed
along the left edge of the screen may be moved with the knob (if one is present) or
the up (⇑) and down (⇓) arrow keys. Notice that the menu has two pages. Moving
the pointer below the last entry on the page brings up the next page. Similarly,
moving the pointer above the first entry on a subsequent page brings up the
preceding page. The two pages of the Conditions Menu have a four-line overlap.
The last four lines of page 1 appear as the first four lines on page 2.

Chapter 1 23
Using Operation Verification Software − Volume I
Using Operation Verification

Test Record Header Information

The information in the first six entries of this menu is printed out as part of the
operation verification test record. The spectrum analyzer model number and serial
number are stored in the analyzer memory. Software revisions before C.00.00 will
not display the complete list of options if there are more than two. The program
queries these numbers via GPIB and displays them. If the spectrum analyzer under
test does not respond at the address listed under GPIB Addresses, or no address is
listed, a message appears where the model and serial numbers are normally
displayed.
The program also queries the time and date in the computer. If an 9000 Series 200
computer is used, it might be necessary to reset the time and date; 9000 Series 300
computers have built-in real-time clocks.
Entries for Operator, Test Conditions, and Other Comments are optional. Blank
spaces are provided on the test record if no entry is made. To make or to change an
entry, move the pointer to the line where the entry is to be made or changed. Press
Change Entry and type in your new entry. Entries for Operator, Test Conditions,
and Other Comments can be up to 37 characters long, but only the first 25
characters of the Operator entry are printed on the test record.

System Mass Storage File Location

Calibration factor data for different power sensors and a customized set of
conditions may be stored on disk. The mass storage unit specifier (msus) for the
disk containing this information should be entered as the system mass storage file
location. Refer to the BASIC Operating Techniques Manual for information on the
syntax of the msus. Software revision C.00.00 and later allows a system mass
storage file location with more than 37 characters though only the first and last 17
characters will be displayed.

24 Chapter 1
Using Operation Verification Software − Volume I
Using Operation Verification

Power Sensors
The Operation Verification program supports four models of power sensors, but
only two models are necessary to run all the tests. The Agilent 8481A may be
substituted for the Agilent 8482A. The Agilent 8485A is required for the
Agilent 8562E/EC and Agilent 8563E/EC, and the Agilent 8487A is required for
the Agilent 8564E/EC and Agilent 8565E/EC. Refer to “Sensor Utilities Menu,”
on page 28, for more information regarding storing, viewing, editing, and purging
cal factor data for power sensors.
To select a particular sensor of a certain model number, move the pointer to the
desired model number and press Change Entry. Enter the last five digits of the
power sensor serial number (that is, the serial number suffix). The program checks
to see that a data file containing the cal factor data for that particular sensor exists.
To create, edit, view, or purge power sensor cal factor data files, press Sensor Utils
to bring up the Sensor Utilities Menu. Refer to “Sensor Utilities Menu,” on
page 28, in this chapter for more information.
A WARNING message appears if the program does not find a data file for the sensor.
If this occurs, check that the system mass storage file location specifies the disk
where the power sensor data resides. If the system mass storage file location is
correct, the cal factor data for that particular sensor has not been stored.

NOTE Power sensor data files created using the VERIFY_62 Operation Verification
software (for 8560A/61A/61B/62A/62B/63A spectrum analyzers) are not
compatible with the VERIFY_6XE Operation Verification software.

Refer to “Sensor Utilities Menu,” on page 28, in this chapter for additional
information.

Setting GPIB Addresses

The last 11 lines (last 12 lines, for revision D.00.00 and later) of the Conditions
Menu are for selecting the GPIB addresses of test equipment used for the
Operation Verification program. It is not necessary to use all the test equipment
listed. Some model numbers listed are “alternates.” Table 1-1, on page 16, lists the
test equipment required for each test and Table 1-2, on page 19, lists model
numbers allowed for a particular type of test equipment.

NOTE For software revisions B.01.00 and earlier, the Conditions Menu has two entries
for Agilent 8340A/B synthesized sweepers. Only Agilent 8340A/B #1 is used.
Software revisions D.00.00 and later have an entry for an Agilent 5350 Series
microwave frequency counter.

Entering zero as the test equipment address results in that model number being
unavailable in the program (NA is displayed in the address field). To minimize
possible confusion later, enter a zero for the address of each piece of test
equipment that is not available.
Enter the address for each piece of test equipment that is available, including the

Chapter 1 25
Using Operation Verification Software − Volume I
Using Operation Verification

spectrum analyzer under test. Addresses must contain the select code of the bus to
which the equipment is connected followed by the equipment address on that bus.
For example, if the 8902A is at address 14 on a bus with a select code of 7, enter
an address of 714. If the 8902A were on a bus with a select code of 12, you should
enter an address of 1214.
A question mark (?) next to a GPIB address indicates the address has not been
checked to verify a response. An asterisk (*) next to a GPIB address indicates the
address was checked and that an instrument responds at that address. If there is
neither an asterisk nor a question mark next to an address, the address has been
checked and no response was detected.

Storing and Loading the Conditions File

The information in the Conditions Menu may be stored for future use by pressing
Store Conds. A file named CONDITIONS is created on the disk specified by the
system mass storage file location.

NOTE CONDITIONS files for software versions B.01.00 and earlier are not compatible
with software versions C.00.00 and C.01.00. Versions C.00.00 and later
CONDITIONS files include entries for the 83640A and 83650A sweepers and the
8487A power sensor.
CONDITIONS files for software versions C.01.00 and earlier are not compatible
with software versions D.00.00 and later. Versions D.00.00 and later
CONDITIONS files include entries for 5350 Series microwave frequency
counters.

When running the Operation Verification program in the future, set the system
mass storage file location to read the disk where the CONDITIONS file is located
and press Load Conds. If the CONDITIONS file resides on the default system mass
storage file location, the CONDITIONS file is loaded automatically the next time
the program is run.
The default system mass storage file location is :,700,1. For the 9000 Model
236 ( 9836), it is necessary to use an external disk drive. The disk drive must
support double-sided format.

26 Chapter 1
Using Operation Verification Software − Volume I
Using Operation Verification

Getting to the Test Menu

Once all necessary items in the Conditions Menu are selected, you can run a test by
pressing Test Menu. Before the Test Menu is displayed, these things occur:
• Appropriate power sensor data files are loaded.
• GPIB is checked for a response at each address.
• Serial and model number of the spectrum analyzer under test are queried.
• Reference level calibration is performed.

Refer to “Test Menu,” on page 30, “Test Menu” in this chapter for more details on
running the tests. If a printer is unavailable, the Conditions Menu is displayed
again rather than the Test Menu. All test results must be sent to the printer.

NOTE Without a printer, Operation Verification tests do not run.

Verifying the GPIB

To see which test equipment responds on GPIB, press Verify Bus. This check only
verifies that there is a response at the address listed; it cannot tell that a particular
piece of equipment is at a particular address. This is useful for verifying GPIB
connections without entering the Test Menu.

Querying the Spectrum Analyzer Serial Number

The Operation Verification program automatically queries the spectrum analyzer
serial and model number on three occasions: at program initiation, when loading
the CONDITIONS file, and when entering the Test Menu. To query the analyzer
serial and model numbers at any other time, press Query DUT S/N. This is helpful
for testing multiple spectrum analyzers; you do not have to reload the
CONDITIONS file or restart the program.

Exiting Operation Verification

Press Exit Program to exit the Operation Verification program.

Chapter 1 27
Using Operation Verification Software − Volume I
Using Operation Verification

Dual-Bus Operation
The Operation Verification program may be used on dual GPIB systems, such as
the microwave test set. In these systems, all the test equipment is connected to
GPIB at select code 7, and the device under test (for example, the spectrum
analyzer) is connected to GPIB at select code 8.
To run this program in a dual-bus configuration, enter equipment addresses as
described in “Setting GPIB Addresses,” on page 25, making sure that each address
properly identifies the bus select code to which it is connected. Program operation
is the same for dual-bus and single-bus configuration.

Sensor Utilities Menu

Operation Verification needs to know the cal factors of each power sensor being
used. Create, edit, view, and delete data files containing cal factors for each power
sensor in the Sensor Utilities Menu. Power sensor data filenames include the last
five digits of the power sensor serial number. For example,
for 8481A power sensors the filename is SEN81NNNNN
for 8482A power sensors the filename is SEN82NNNNN
for 8485A power sensors the filename is SEN85NNNNN
for 8487A power sensors the filename is SEN87NNNNN
where NNNNN represents the last five digits of the power sensor serial number
(the serial number suffix). Note that the first two digits in the filename correspond
to the last two digits of the power sensor model number.
All power sensor data files available on the system mass storage location file are
listed upon entering the Sensor Utilities Menu.

NOTE Power sensor data files created using the VERIFY_62 Operation Verification
software (for 8560A/61A/61B/62A/62B/63A Spectrum Analyzers) are not
compatible with the VERIFY_6XE Operation Verification software.

28 Chapter 1
Using Operation Verification Software − Volume I
Using Operation Verification

Adding a Power Sensor Data File

To add a new power sensor data file, press Add File, and enter the power sensor
model number as requested. An error message is displayed if a disk is not found at
the current system mass storage file location.
When prompted for the power sensor serial number, enter only the last five digits
(the serial number suffix). You are then prompted for a cal factor frequency and for
the cal factor. These frequency/cal-factor pairs need not be entered in order of
increasing frequency; the program inserts the pairs in their proper place. All
frequencies should be entered in MHz.
A 50 MHz Cal-Factor must be entered in order to calibrate the power sensor. Some
power sensors do not include a 50 MHz Cal-Factor on their chart or calibration
record; it is listed as part of the Calibration Procedure on the case of the power
sensor.
If a mistake is made entering a cal factor, enter the frequency of the erroneous cal
factor at the next frequency prompt. Enter the correct cal factor at the next prompt.
If an error was made entering the frequency value, enter the erroneous frequency at
the next frequency prompt and a zero for the cal factor to delete that frequency
point.
Once all cal factor data for a power sensor is entered, enter an S at the next
frequency prompt. The power sensor data is then stored on disk.

Viewing and Editing a Power Sensor Data File

Press View/Edit to view or edit a power sensor data file. Only data files listed on
the screen can be viewed or edited. If a file is created but data is not stored, the
filename is listed, but no data is viewed and it cannot be edited.
To change the cal factor at a particular frequency, enter that frequency at the
frequency prompt, then enter the new cal factor.
To delete a frequency/cal factor pair, enter the frequency of the pair to be deleted
and a cal factor of zero. Add a frequency/cal factor pair by entering the new
frequency at the frequency prompt and the new cal factor.

Deleting a File
Press Delete File to remove a listed file. At the prompt, enter the filename exactly
as it appears on-screen. You are asked for confirmation to delete the file.

Chapter 1 29
Using Operation Verification Software − Volume I
Using Operation Verification

Changing the System Mass Storage File Location

To add, edit, or view power sensor data on a disk other than the one currently
specified by the system mass storage file location, press System File. Enter the
msus of the new system mass storage file location. All power sensor files residing
on that disk are listed. Upon returning to the Conditions Menu, the system mass
storage file location is the one determined in the Sensor Utilities Menu.

Listing Available Power Sensor Data Files

Press List Files to list all power sensor data files on the currently specified system
mass storage location file.

Returning to the Conditions Menu

Press Cond Menu to return to the Conditions Menu.

Test Menu
The Test Menu displays all tests that can be performed by the Operation
Verification program. Notice that the menu has two pages. Tests may be run in any
of five modes. These are listed below.
• All Tests runs all 17 tests in the sequence shown on screen.
• Single Sequence runs a user-defined sequence of tests once.
• Single Test runs one test once.
• Repeat Sequence runs a user-defined sequence of tests until testing is aborted.
• Repeat Test runs a single test until the testing is aborted.
If GPIB controlled equipment for a given test does not respond over GPIB, that
test is flagged MISSING ETE (missing electronic test equipment). These tests
cannot be run and, if they are included as part of a sequence (All Tests, Single
Sequence, or Repeat Sequence), they are ignored. See “List Equipment,” below.
If a test does not apply to the spectrum analyzer, the test will be flagged TEST NOT
APPLICABLE. For example, if the spectrum analyzer is an E-Series instrument
which does not have Option 007, the Fast Sweep Time Accuracy test will have the
message TEST NOT APPLICABLE next to it.
Equipment connection prompts are displayed on the computer screen. Most tests
check equipment connections and only prompt the operator if a misconnection is
detected.

30 Chapter 1
Using Operation Verification Software − Volume I
Using Operation Verification

If more than one power meter (or the measuring receiver and one of the power
meters) is present, the program asks which model to use as the power meter. Enter
the model number without the alphabetic character (for example, enter 8902 for an
8902A). Similarly, if more than one frequency counter is present, the program
asks which counter to use. Again, enter the model number without the alphabetic
character.
The test currently being run and its test number are indicated in the screen title
block of the spectrum analyzer under test.

All Tests
To run all 17 tests in the sequence shown, press All Tests. The pointer moves to
each test as it is being run. All Tests can be run in approximately 60 minutes (75
minutes for an Agilent 8564E/EC or Agilent 8565E/EC).
Three softkeys are displayed when running All Tests. Press ABORT TEST to abort
the current test and continue to the next test. Press ABORT SEQUENCE to abort
the All Test mode. Pressing Restart aborts and restarts the current test. If the
spectrum analyzer is in the middle of a sweep, no action is taken until the sweep is
completed.

Single Sequence
Use this mode to perform a subset of the tests, to run a particular test a specified
number of times, or to run all 16 tests in a sequence different from the All Tests
sequence. After pressing Single Sequence, you are prompted for a test number. The
sequence is displayed after each prompt. Up to 25 test numbers may be entered
(test number duplication is permitted). Enter a zero to terminate building the
sequence and begin testing.
If an error is made in entering the sequence, enter a zero at the next prompt, then
press ABORT SEQUENCE. Now press Single Sequence to reenter the correct
sequence.
The ABORT TEST, ABORT SEQUENCE, and Restart softkeys have the same
function as in the All Test mode.

Single Test
Press Single Test to run the test indicated by the pointer. Once the test is running,
press Restart to abort and restart the test.

Chapter 1 31
Using Operation Verification Software − Volume I
Using Operation Verification

Repeat Sequence
The Repeat Sequence mode performs a user-defined set of tests repeatedly until
the sequence is aborted. For example, if the desired sequence is test numbers
6,7,8,6,7,8,6,7,8,…, press Repeat Sequence and enter the sequence of 6,7,8. When
the last test of this sequence is completed, the sequence is repeated.
The ABORT TEST, ABORT SEQUENCE, and Restart softkeys have the same
function as in the All Test mode.

Repeat Test
Use the Repeat Test mode to run a single test indefinitely. Move the pointer to the
test to be repeated. Testing can be stopped by pressing ABORT REPEAT. Press
ABORT TEST to abort and restart the test.

Calibrate Power Sensor

The Operation Verification program keeps track of which power sensor is being
used and the elapsed time since it was last calibrated.
The program prompts the user to recalibrate the power sensor if more than 2 hours
elapses since the last calibration. Also, if the power sensor is changed, the new
power sensor must be calibrated.
If there is a significant change in ambient temperature, or improved power meter
accuracy is desired, it is advisable to recalibrate the sensor more often than the
program requires. Press Cal Sensor and follow the instructions on the computer
screen to recalibrate the power sensor.

List Equipment
To obtain a list of required test equipment for running a test, move the pointer to
the test, press List Equip. All GPIB controlled equipment and passive devices,
other than required cables and adapters, are listed. If a test is flagged MISSING
ETE but all test equipment appears present, press List Equip to see what is needed,
then return to the Conditions Menu and verify that the equipment is present. Press
Cond Menu to return to the Conditions Menu from the Test Menu.

32 Chapter 1
Using Operation Verification Software − Volume I
Using Operation Verification

Test Results
At the end of each test, a PASS, SHORT PASS, or MEASUREMENT IS OUT OF
TOLERANCE message is printed on the test record and displayed next to the test on
the computer screen.
PASS indicates that the test is fully completed and all measurements are within
specification limits.
SHORT PASS indicates that the test was abbreviated, usually due to equipment
limitations, but the measurements made were within specification limits. Not all
tests can be abbreviated. The meaning of Short Pass varies between each test; refer
to “Test Descriptions” in this section for more information.

NOTE A Short Pass is sufficient for passing Operation Verification alone. If Operation
Verification is used as part of performance verification, all tests must yield a PASS
result.

MEASUREMENT IS OUT OF TOLERANCE indicates that one or more of the

measurements made during the test did not meet specification limits. If the data is
shown in tabular form, the symbol <<<< is placed next to the out-of-tolerance
data. In the event of a measurement-out-of-tolerance condition, it is recommended
that any related manual performance test be performed to verify out-of-tolerance
conditions. The related performance test for each operation verification test is
listed at the beginning of each test description in this chapter.

NOTE Because test results are expected to change over a period of time, Agilent
Technologies warrants only the specification range and not the repeatability of data
for any given specification.

Chapter 1 33
Using Operation Verification Software − Volume I
Operation Verification Menu Softkeys

Operation Verification Menu Softkeys

This section provides a brief description of each menu of softkeys. More detailed
information is provided in “Program Operation” in this chapter. The softkey order
shown below may vary with what appears on the computer display; the order
differs depending on whether an 9000 Series 200 or Series 300 computer is used.

Conditions Menu

Test Menu displays the Test Menu, which allows you to run tests once,
repeatedly, or in a user-defined sequence. Refer to “Test Menu.”
Load Conds loads the CONDITIONS file from the disk specified by the
system mass storage file location.
Sensor Utils displays the Sensor Utilities Menu, which allows viewing,
editing, and adding power sensor data files. Refer to “Sensor
Utilities Menu.”
Change Entry permits changing a Conditions Menu entry, indicated by the
pointer along the left edge of the computer display. Press the
RETURN or ENTER keys to terminate an entry.

Verify Bus checks each listed GPIB address for response. Verify Bus does
not verify that a particular piece of equipment is at a specified
address.
Query DUT S/N queries the GPIB for the serial number and model number of the
spectrum analyzer under test.
Store Conds stores the current conditions in the CONDITIONS file on the
specified system mass storage file location.
Exit Program exits the Operation Verification program.

34 Chapter 1
Using Operation Verification Software − Volume I
Operation Verification Menu Softkeys

Sensor Utilities Menu

View/Edit allows user to view and edit power sensor data files.
Add File creates a new power sensor data file.
Delete File deletes a power sensor data file. User is asked for confirmation
before deletion takes place.
List Files lists all power sensor data files on the disk currently specified by
the system mass storage file location.
System File allows user to change the currently specified system mass
storage file location.
Cond Menu returns you to the Conditions Menu.

Test Menu

All Tests runs all 16 tests in the order listed by the program.
Single Sequence allows entry of a test sequence that is run once.
Single Test runs the test indicated by the pointer, once.
Repeat Sequence allows entry of a test sequence that runs repeatedly until you
abort testing.
Repeat Test runs the test indicated by the pointer repeatedly until you abort
the testing.
Cal Sensor allows you to recalibrate the current power sensor and resets the
internal “time-since-last-calibration” timer.
List Equip lists the required equipment for the test indicated by the pointer.
Cond Menu returns to the Conditions Menu.

Chapter 1 35
Using Operation Verification Software − Volume I
Test Descriptions

Test Descriptions
Each of the following test descriptions include the related specification, related
performance test, and a test setup illustration used in Operation Verification.
Operation Verification is designed to test a spectrum analyzer operating within a
temperature range of 20 °C to 30 °C.

36 Chapter 1
Using Operation Verification Software − Volume I
10 MHz Reference Accuracy

10 MHz Reference Accuracy

Related Specification
Frequency Reference Accuracy (Option 103)

Related Performance Test

2. 10 MHz Reference Output Accuracy (Option 103) in Chapter 10 of Volume II of
the calibration guide.

Frequency Response

Test Description
The spectrum analyzer frequency response is tested with two setups: the first,
using the synthesizer/level generator, for frequencies between the spectrum
analyzer minimum frequency and 50 MHz; and the second, using the synthesized
sweeper and a measuring receiver or power meter, for frequencies above 50 MHz.
If the synthesizer/level generator is not available, the frequency response above
50 MHz can still be tested. If the synthesizer/level generator is available, but you
do not wish to perform the test below 50 MHz, enter a Q when prompted to connect
the Agilent 3335A output to the spectrum analyzer input.
In both parts of this test, a signal of known amplitude is applied to the input of the
spectrum analyzer and the analyzer marker amplitude is read. The frequency
response relative to the calibrator frequency (300 MHz), within a given frequency
band, is calculated and compared to specification. The band-switching uncertainty
specification is verified by calculating the band-to-band frequency response. The
band-to-band frequency response specification is equivalent to the sum of the
in-band frequency response specifications of the two bands in question and the
band-switching uncertainty specification.
While the >50 MHz part of the test is running, a graph of frequency response
relative to the CAL OUTPUT signal will be plotted on the computer display. This
graph will be dumped to the printer when the test has been completed. If one of the
band-to-band frequency response entries is out-of-tolerance, the <<<< symbol will
be placed to the right of the row where the out-of-tolerance condition was detected.
It will not necessarily be placed directly to the right of the out-of-tolerance entry.
Check each entry in that row against the specification (listed in parentheses) to find
the entry that is out of tolerance. A Short Pass will occur if the >50 MHz part of
the test is within specification but the <50 MHz part of the test was not performed.

Chapter 1 43
Using Operation Verification Software − Volume I
Frequency Response

Figure 1-7 Frequency Response Test Setup (<50 MHz)

Test Description
This test consists of two parts: a low-band distortion test and a high-band distortion
test. The high-band distortion test is only applicable to the Agilent 8561E/EC,
Agilent 8562E/EC, Agilent 8563E/EC, Agilent 8564E/EC, and Agilent 8565E/EC.
The low-band distortion test can be performed using either the frequency
synthesizer or the synthesized sweeper. The high-band distortion test can only be
performed using a synthesized sweeper. After the low-band distortion test has been
completed, if a synthesized sweeper is available, the operator may choose whether
or not to perform the high-band distortion test.
Before making the second harmonic distortion measurement, the filters are
checked for sufficient rejection at the second harmonic. A warning message will be
displayed if the filter has insufficient rejection. If the filter is acceptable, the test
will proceed. The test is performed at 50 MHz for low band and at 2.95 GHz for
high band (these are the fundamental frequencies).
Before checking the second harmonic distortion in high band, a frequency
response check is made to reduce the measurement uncertainty due to the spectrum
analyzer frequency response. Two filters are necessary for the high-band distortion
test to ensure sufficient rejection at the second harmonic.
For an Agilent 8561E/EC, Agilent 8562E/EC,Agilent 8563E/EC,
Agilent 8564E/EC, or Agilent 8565E/EC a Short Pass occurs if the low-band
distortion test is within specification, and the high-band test is not performed.
Agilent 8562E/EC, Agilent 8563E/EC, Agilent 8564E/EC, or Agilent 8565E/EC
analyzers having software revisions D.00.00 and later will report a short pass even
if both the low-band and high-band distortion tests are within specification. These
analyzers specify distortion in three frequency ranges, but the software tests only
two of these ranges.

54 Chapter 1
Using Operation Verification Software − Volume I
Second Harmonic Distortion

Figure 1-18 Low-Band Second Harmonic Distortion Test Setup

Figure 1-19 High-Band Second Harmonic Distortion Test Setup

Chapter 1 55
Using Operation Verification Software − Volume I
Operation Verification Error Messages

Operation Verification Error Messages

Operation Verification displays prompts and error messages on the computer
display. Error messages are preceded with ERROR:. For more information on
prompts, refer to “Program Operation” in this chapter.
The error messages listed below are in three groups: messages beginning with
alphabetic characters, those beginning with numeric characters, and others
beginning with variables such as filenames or instrument model numbers. If an
error message is not found in either of the first two groups, it probably begins with
a variable. Refer to the third group that begins with variables. The error message
descriptions include recommended corrective action.

Error Messages Beginning with Alphabetic Characters

Address must be from 0 to 30 inclusive

GPIB addresses must be in the range from 0 to 30. Press any key
and enter new address in this range.
Cal Factor outside of 0 to 150% range entered
Cal Factor entries must be within this range. Press any key and
enter the frequency again. Then enter a Cal Factor in the proper
range.
CONDITIONS file from system file location is not compatible! WARNING
CONDITIONS files from versions prior to C.00.00 did not
include an entry for the 8487A power sensor. Similarly,
CONDITIONS files from versions prior to D.00.00 did not
include an entry for the 5350 Series microwave frequency
counter. Default CONDITIONS data will be used. Modify the
CONDITIONS data as necessary and press STORE CONDS.
Conditions Menu DUT ID disagrees with responding DUT ID The model
and/or serial number of the spectrum analyzer under test (DUT)
listed in the “Conditions Menu,” on page 23, does not agree
with that of the DUT which is responding over GPIB. Press any
key and follow the instructions in the next three prompts.

56 Chapter 1
Using Operation Verification Software − Volume I
Operation Verification Error Messages

Could not set calibrator signal to −10.00 or −10.17 dBm

While attempting the noise sidebands test using the CAL
OUTPUT signal, the amplitude of the CAL OUTPUT signal
could not be set to one of the values indicated. Check the CAL
OUTPUT amplitude and the range of the reference level
calibration adjustment.
Counter reads <frequency value> Hz. Check counter setup
The microwave frequency counter read a frequency far
exceeding the specification of the 10 MHz reference. Check the
test setup and press any key. The counter will read the frequency
once more and assume that the value is correct.
Data not accepted, check entry format
The data just entered was not valid. Press any key and try again,
checking for the proper entry format.
DUT doesn't respond at address listed
Program attempted to address the spectrum analyzer under test
at the address listed, but the spectrum analyzer did not respond.
Check the GPIB connections and the address listed.
File <filename> not found
The filename of the power sensor data file entered could not be
found on the currently specified system mass storage file
location. Check the filename and the system mass storage file
location.
Insufficient equip. to do test <test number> : <test name>
The required GPIB-controlled test equipment for the test
indicated is not available. Press any key and choose another test.
Low-pass filter(s) don't have at least <value> dB rejection
The low-pass filters are checked for rejection at the second
harmonic in the Second Harmonic Distortion test. If insufficient
rejection is detected, the part of the test using the tested filter
cannot be run.
Maximum cal amplitude <−10 dBm
Program checked that CAL OUTPUT was connected to INPUT
50 Ω and found that the REF LVL CAL adjustment could not be
set for a marker amplitude of ≥−10 dBm. Check CAL OUTPUT
amplitude and REF LVL CAL adjustment range.
No GPIB address listed for DUT
Program attempted to address the spectrum analyzer (DUT), but
no GPIB address was listed for it. Press any key and enter an
address for the spectrum analyzer.

Chapter 1 57
Using Operation Verification Software − Volume I
Operation Verification Error Messages

No more tests may be linked; enter 0 at next prompt

When entering a sequence of tests, the sequence string
(including commas) cannot exceed 78 characters. Press any key
and then a 0 at the next prompt. The testing sequence will begin.
Non-numeric entry other than S entered, or frequency <=0 When entering a
frequency of a frequency/Cal-Factor pair to be added, edited, or
deleted, the entry must either be a number greater than 0, or S to
store the current data.
No sensor file found for <sensor model> S/N <sensor serial #>
A power sensor data file for the indicated power sensor could
not be found on the currently specified system mass storage file
location specifier. Check the sensor model and serial numbers
and the system mass storage file location.
No 8662/63 reference oscillator. Check INT-EXT switches
No 10 MHz reference oscillator for the 8662A/63A was
detected. Check the INTrnal/EXTernal frequency reference
switches on its rear panel. The 8662A/63A should be using its
internal reference oscillator.
Power meter reads <value> dBm
The power meter has read a value far exceeding the
specification of the CAL OUTPUT amplitude; check that power
sensor is connected to CAL OUTPUT and press any key. The
power will be read once more and assumed to be valid.
Printer not available; cannot perform tests
All test results are sent to the printer. If a printer is not available,
tests cannot be performed.
REF LVL CAL adjustment range <5 dB
In checking that the CAL OUTPUT was connected to INPUT
50 Ω, the REF LVL CAL adjustment was found to have
insufficient range. Check REF LVL CAL range manually.
Select code <value> does not currently support GPIB operations
The address just entered specified a select code which is not a
GPIB interface. Check the address entered and the select code of
the appropriate interface.
Sensor serial number must be from 1 to 99999
The power sensor serial number entered was not in the range
indicated. Enter the serial number correctly.
System mass storage file location catalog cannot be read Program attempted to
read the catalog of the system mass storage file location. Check
the msus of the system mass storage file location.

58 Chapter 1
Using Operation Verification Software − Volume I
Operation Verification Error Messages

Test number must be between 0 and 17

Valid test numbers are in the range 0 and 17 for entering a
sequence. Entering a 0 will terminate sequence entry and begin
testing sequence. Press any key and enter a valid test number at
the next prompt.
This program does not support the current DUT
The operation verification software supports only the 8560
E-Series and EC-Series. Refer to the Spectrum Analyzers
section in Getting Started.
Unable to load CONDITIONS file from listed system file location
Program attempted to load the CONDITIONS file from the
listed system mass storage file location. Check the msus of the
System mass storage file location and the presence of the
CONDITIONS file.
Unable to load data from <sensor filename>
Program found power sensor data file, but could not read the
data from the file. Use the Sensor Utilities to delete the file and
enter new data.
Unable to obtain catalog from <system mass storage file location>
The system could not verify that the system mass storage file
location entered was available. Check the msus of the system
mass storage file location.
Unable to reach power level of <value> dBm
Program was unable to set the source amplitude for a desired
power meter reading. Check the test setup.
WARNING: CONDITIONS file from system file location is not compatible!
CONDITIONS files from versions prior to C.00.00 did not
include an entry for the 8487A power sensor. Similarly,
CONDITIONS files from versions prior to D.00.00 did not
include an entry for the 5350 Series microwave frequency
counter. Default CONDITIONS data will be used. Modify the
CONDITIONS data as necessary and press STORE CONDS.

Error Messages Beginning with Numeric Characters

8481A Sensor cal data minimum frequency not <= 50 MHz Program requires
the 8481A power sensor to have a Cal Factor at or below
50 MHz. Use Sensor Utilities to add a Cal Factor at or below
50 MHz.
8481A Sensor cal data maximum frequency not >= 300 MHz Program
requires the 8481A power sensor to have a Cal Factor at or

Chapter 1 59
Using Operation Verification Software − Volume I
Operation Verification Error Messages

above 300 MHz. Use Sensor Utilities to add a Cal Factor at or

above 300 MHz.
8482A Sensor cal data minimum frequency not <= 50 MHz Program requires
the 8482A power sensor to have a Cal Factor at or below
50 MHz. Use Sensor Utilities to add a Cal Factor at or below
50 MHz.
8482A Sensor cal data maximum frequency not >= 300 MHz Program
requires the 8482A power sensor to have a Cal Factor at or
above 300 MHz. Use Sensor Utilities to add a Cal Factor at or
above 300 MHz.
8485A Sensor cal data minimum frequency not = 50 MHz Program requires
the 8485A power sensor to have a Cal Factor at 50 MHz. Use
Sensor Utilities to add a Cal Factor at 50 MHz.
8485A Sensor cal data maximum frequency not >= 26.5 GHz Program
requires the 8485A power sensor to have a Cal Factor at or
above 26.5 GHz. Use Sensor Utilities to add a Cal Factor at or
above 26.5 GHz.
8487A Sensor cal data minimum frequency not = 50 MHz Program requires
the 8487A power sensor to have a Cal Factor at 50 MHz. Use
Sensor Utilities to add a Cal Factor at 50 MHz.
8487A Sensor cal data maximum frequency not >= 50 GHz Program requires
the 8487A power sensor to have a Cal Factor at or above
50 GHz. Use Sensor Utilities to add a Cal Factor at or above
50 GHz.
8662/63 Error # <error number>
The 8662A/63A generated the error listed. Consult the 8662A
or 8663A manual.
8662/63 Frequency reference out of tolerance
The 8662A/63A frequency reference is out of tolerance.
Consult the 8662A or 8663A manual.
8662/63 Malfunction. Origin unknown
The 8662A/63A has detected a malfunction. Consult the
8662A or 8663A manual.
8662/63 Oven not yet warmed up
The 8662A/63A 10 MHz oven oscillator is cold. Allow the
oven to warm up.
8662/63 Should be on INTernal reference
The 8662A/63A is in EXTernal frequency reference mode. Set
the 8662A/63A to INTernal frequency reference.

60 Chapter 1
Using Operation Verification Software − Volume I
Operation Verification Error Messages

Error Messages Beginning with Variables

<filename> file not found

The file indicated could not be found at the listed system mass
storage file location. Check the filename and the system mass
storage file location.
<keyboard entry> is a non-numeric entry
The program expected a numeric entry but did not receive one.
Enter a numeric entry.
<number of instruments> instruments have GPIB addresses of <GPIB
address>
The indicated number of instruments have all been set to the
same GPIB address. Review the addresses and eliminate the
duplication.

Chapter 1 61
Using Operation Verification Software − Volume I
Operation Verification Error Messages

<power meter model number> doesn't read signal to be in −1 +/−5 dBm

range
The power meter (or measuring receiver) does not read a power
level within the range indicated. Check for loose connections.
<source model number> signal not in +5 +/−5 dBm range
The source indicated was set for +5 dBm output, but the
spectrum analyzer measured the amplitude to be outside the
±5 dB range. Check test setup.
<source model number> signal not in −1 +/−5 dBm range
The source indicated was set for + 5 dBm output and the source
output is fed through a power splitter to the spectrum analyzer
under test. The spectrum analyzer should measure the amplitude
to be within 5 dB of −1 dBm (6 dB loss through power splitter).
Check test setup.
<source model number> +10 dBm signal not in +10 +/−8 dBm range
The source indicated was set for a +10 dBm output and the
source output is fed through a low-pass filter(s) to the spectrum
analyzer under test. The spectrum analyzer should measure the
amplitude to be within 8 dB of +10 dBm (the filters have some
insertion loss). Check test setup.
<source model number> has a cold oven
The 10 MHz reference oven oscillator has not warmed up yet.
Allow the oven to warm up.
<source model number> is unlevelled
The source indicated has been programmed for an amplitude
which results in an unlevelled condition. Check the test setup for
loose connections.

62 Chapter 1
2 8560E/EC Specifications and
Characteristics

63
8560E/EC Specifications and Characteristics
Specifications and Characteristics

Specifications and Characteristics

The following tables list the spectrum analyzer specifications. Unless stated
otherwise, all specifications describe the analyzer warranted performance under
the following conditions:
• Five-minute warmup in ambient conditions
• Auto-coupled controls
• Digital trace display
• IF ADJ ON
• REF LVL CAL adjusted
• 1ST LO OUTPUT terminated in 50 ohms
• 2ND IF OUTPUT (Option 001 analyzers) terminated in 50 ohms
• Two-year calibration cycle
• Environmental requirements met

NOTE REF LVL CAL uses the CAL OUTPUT signal to calibrate the reference level.
Internal temperature changes determine how often this adjustment should be
performed. Amplitude temperature drift is a nominal 1 dB/10 °C. The nominal
temperature variation within the instrument is 10 °C, most of which occurs during
the first 30 minutes after power-on. Internal temperature equilibrium is reached
after 2 hours of operation at a stable ambient temperature.

Characteristics provide useful information in the form of typical, nominal, or

approximate values for analyzer performance. Tables of spectrum analyzer
characteristics follow the specifications.

Calibration Cycle
The performance tests in Chapter 2 should be used to check the analyzer against its
specifications every two years. Specifications are listed in this chapter.
The frequency reference must be adjusted and checked at the same time. Refer to
the “10 MHz Frequency Reference Adjustment” in the 8560E and 8560EC
Spectrum Analyzer Service Guide.

64 Chapter 2
8560E/EC Specifications and Characteristics
Frequency Specifications

Frequency Specifications
Frequency Range

Internal Mixing

AC Coupled 100 kHz to 2.9 GHz

DC Coupled 30 Hz to 2.9 GHz

External Mixing 18 GHz to 325 GHz

Non-Option 002 and Non-Option 327

External Mixing Bands

Frequency Band Frequency Range Harmonic Mixing Mode (N*)

Preselected Unpreselected

K 18.0 to 26.5 n/a 6−

A 26.5 to 40.0 8+ 8−

Q 33.0 to 50.0 10+ 10−

U 40.0 to 60.0 10+ 10−

V 50.0 to 75.0 14+ 14−

E 60.0 to 90.0 n/a 16−

W 75.0 to 110.0 18+ 18−

F 90.0 to 140.0 n/a 24−

D 110.0 to 170.0 n/a 30−

G 140.0 to 220.0 n/a 36−

Y 170.0 to 260.0 n/a 44−

J 220.0 to 325.0 n/a 54−

* N is the harmonic mixing mode. For negative mixing modes (as indicated by the “−”), the desired 1st LO
harmonic is higher than the tuned frequency by the 1st IF (3.9107 GHz for the 30 Hz to 2.9 GHz band,
310.7 MHz for all other bands). For positive mixing modes, the desired 1st LO harmonic is lower than the tuned
frequency by 310.7 MHz.

Frequency Readout Accuracy

Accuracy of START, CENTER,

STOP or MARKER frequency

SPAN > 2 MHz × N* <±(frequency readout × frequency reference accuracy† + 5% of

frequency span + 15% of resolution bandwidth + 10 Hz)

Chapter 2 65
8560E/EC Specifications and Characteristics
Frequency Specifications

SPAN ≤ 2 MHz × N* <±(frequency readout × frequency reference accuracy† + 1% of

frequency span + 15% of resolution bandwidth + 10 Hz)

* N is the harmonic mixing mode.

† frequency reference accuracy = (aging × period of time since adjustment) + initial achievable accuracy +
temperature stability.

Frequency Count Marker

Frequency Count Marker Resolution Selectable from 1 Hz to 1 MHz

Frequency Count Marker Accuracy <±(marker frequency × frequency reference accuracy‡ +

(for signal-to-noise ratio ≥25 dB)
2 Hz × N† + 1 LSD)

Delta Frequency Count Accuracy <±(delta frequency × frequency reference accuracy‡ +

(for signal-to-noise ratio ≥25 dB)
4 Hz × N† + 2 LSD)

† N is the harmonic mixing mode.

‡ Frequency Reference Accuracy = (aging × period of time since adjustment + initial achievable accuracy +
temperature stability).

Frequency Reference Accuracy

Non-Option 103

Aging <±0.5 × 10−9/day (after 7 day warmup)

<±1 × 10−7/year

Temperature Stability <±1 × 10−8, −10 °C to +55 °C, referenced to 25 °C

Option 103

Aging <±2 × 10−6/year

Settability <±1 × 10−6

Temperature Stability <±1 × 10−6, −10 °C to +55 °C, referenced to 25 °C

66 Chapter 2
8560E/EC Specifications and Characteristics
Frequency Specifications

Stability

Residual FM

(zero span, 10 Hz RES BW)

Non-Option 103 < 1.0 Hz × N* peak-to-peak in 20 ms†

Option 103 < 10 Hz × N* peak-to-peak in 20 ms

Noise Sidebands

For Frequencies ≤1 GHz

(Refer to the characteristics section for

frequencies > 2.9 GHz)

Offset Non-Option 103 Option 103

100 Hz

serial number prefix <3424A <−80 dBc/Hz‡ <−70 dBc/Hz‡

serial number prefix ≥3424A <−88 dBc/Hz‡ <−70 dBc/Hz‡

1 kHz <−97 dBc/Hz‡ <−90 dBc/Hz‡

10 kHz†† <−113 dBc/Hz§ <−113 dBc/Hz§

30 kHz†† <−113 dBc/Hz# <−113 dBc/Hz#

100 kHz‡‡

serial number prefix <3424A <−113 dBc/Hz§ <−113 dBc/Hz§

serial number prefix ≥3424A <−117 dBc/Hz <−117 dBc/Hz

* N is the harmonic mixing mode.

†
See Resolution Bandwidth Usability in “Frequency Characteristics” for further information.
‡ Add 5.2 dB × (f/1 GHz) −1) for f > 1 GHz and f ≤ 2.9 GHz.
§
Add 2.5 dB × (f/1 GHz) −1) for f > 1 GHz and f ≤ 2.9 GHz.
#
Add 3.0 dB × (f/1 GHz) −1) for f > 1 GHz and f ≤ 2.9 GHz.

**Add 2.0 dB for frequencies > 1 GHz and ≤ 2.9 GHz

††
For resolution bandwidth ≤ 1 kHz or frequency span ≤ 745 kHz.
‡‡
For resolution bandwidth ≥ 3 kHz or frequency span > 745 kHz.

Chapter 2 67
8560E/EC Specifications and Characteristics
Frequency Specifications

Frequency Span

Range

Internal Mixing 0 Hz, 100 Hz to 2.9 GHz over the 10-division display horizontal axis, variable
in approximately 1% increments, or in a 1, 2, 5 sequence.

External Mixing† Minimum span = 100 Hz × N*

Accuracy

SPAN > 2 MHz × N* <±5%

SPAN ≤ 2 MHz × N* <±1%

* N is the harmonic mixing mode.

† Resolution bandwidths ≤100 Hz are not available in external mixing. External mixing is not available for
Option 002 or Option 327.

68 Chapter 2
8560E/EC Specifications and Characteristics
Frequency Specifications

Resolution Bandwidths (−3 dB)

Range*

Non-Option 103 1 Hz to 1 MHz (selectable in a 1, 3, 10 sequence) and 2 MHz

(3 MHz at −6 dB)

Option 103 10 Hz to 1 MHz (selectable in a 1, 3, 10 sequence) and 2 MHz

(3 MHz at −6 dB)

Accuracy

1 Hz to 300 kHz RES BW <±10%

1 MHz RES BW <±25%

2 MHz RES BW <+50%, −25%

Selectivity (60 dB/3 dB bandwidth ratio)

RES BW ≥300 Hz <15:1

RES BW ≤100 Hz <5:1

Bandwidth Shape

1 and 2 MHz RES BW Approximately Gaussian

300 Hz to 300 kHz RES BW Synchronously tuned, 4-pole filters

1 Hz to 100 Hz RES BW Digital, approximately Gaussian

* Resolution bandwidths ≤100 Hz are not available in external mixing.

Video Bandwidth

(Post-detection low-pass filter averages displayed noise for a

smooth trace.)*

Range 1 Hz to 3 MHz† in a 1, 3, 10 sequence

* Video bandwidth filtering is not available in resolution bandwidths ≤ 100 Hz when SPAN 0 Hz with firmware
revisions 930809 and earlier.
†
The video bandwidth upper limit is 450 kHz in sample detection mode.

Chapter 2 69
8560E/EC Specifications and Characteristics
Frequency Specifications

Sweep

Sweep Time

Range

Span = 0

Non-Option 007 (E-Series)

Analog display 50 μs to <30 ms

Digital display 30 ms to 6,000 s*

Option 007 E-Series and all

EC-Series instruments

Digital display 50 μs to 6,000 s

Span ≥ 100 Hz

RES BW ≥300 Hz 50 ms to 2,000 s†

RES BW ≤100 Hz 50 ms to 100,000 s (span-dependent)

Accuracy (Span = 0 Hz)

Non-Option 007 (E-Series)

Sweep time 30 ms to 6,000 s* <±1%

Sweep time <30 ms <±10%

Option 007 E-Series and all

EC-Series instruments

Sweep time 30 ms to 6,000 s* <±1%

Sweep time <30 ms <±0.1%

Sweep Trigger Delayed, Free Run, Single, Line, External, or Video#

* 30 ms to 100 s for analyzers with serial prefix <3310A.

†
50 ms to 100 s for analyzers with serial prefix <3424A.

# Video trigger is not available in RES BW settings ≤100 Hz.

70 Chapter 2
8560E/EC Specifications and Characteristics
Frequency Specifications

Delayed Sweep

Trigger Modes Free Run, Line, External, Video*

Range

Span = 0

Non-Option 007 (E-Series) +2 μs to +65.535 ms

Option 007 E-Series and all EC-Series

instruments

Sweep time ≥ 30 ms +2 μs to +65.535 ms

Sweep time < 30 ms −9.9 ms to +65.535 ms††

Span ≥ 100 Hz +2 μs to +65.535 ms

Resolution 1 μs

Accuracy#

Serial prefix 3310A and above ±1 μs

Serial prefix <3310A

20 °C to 30 °C ±(1 μs + (0.05% × DELAY SWEEP setting)

−10 °C to +55 °C ±(1 μs + (0.12% × DELAY SWEEP setting)

* Video trigger is not available in RES BW settings ≤ 100 Hz.

††
Negative delayed sweep (pre-trigger) is also limited to 50 × sweep time.
#
In E-Series instruments without Option 007, the delay time will be subject to up to ±0.5 μs of jitter due to
synchronization of the input edge trigger to the internal 1 MHz timebase. In E-series instruments with Option
007 and in EC-instruments using sweeptimes <30 ms, the delay time will experience up to ±83 ns of jitter due
to synchronization of the input edge trigger to the internal 12 MHz timebase.

Chapter 2 71
8560E/EC Specifications and Characteristics
Frequency Specifications

Time-Gated Spectrum Analysis

Gate Delay* Edge Mode Level Mode

Range 3 μs to 65.535 ms ≤0.5 μs

Resolution 1 μs

Accuracy†

Serial prefix 3310A and above <±1 μs

Serial prefix <3310A

20 °C to 30 °C ± (1 μs + (0.05% × GATE DELAY setting)

−10 °C to 55 °C ± (1 μs + (0.12% × GATE DELAY setting)

* Time from GATE TRIGGER INPUT to positive edge of GATE OUTPUT.

†
The gate delay time will experience up to ±0.5 μs of jitter due to synchronization of the input edge trigger to
the internal 1 MHz timebase.

Gate Length*

Range 1 μs to 65.535 ms

Resolution 1 μs

Accuracy

Serial prefix 3310A and above <±1 μs

Serial prefix <3310A

20 °C to 30 °C ± (0.2 μs + (0.05% × GATE LENGTH setting)

−10 °C to 55 °C ± (0.2 μs + (0.12% × GATE LENGTH setting)

* Time from positive edge to negative edge of GATE OUTPUT.

Marker Frequency Resolution SPAN/600 to a minimum of 1 Hz

Marker Time Resolution Sweep time/600

72 Chapter 2
8560E/EC Specifications and Characteristics
Amplitude Specifications

Amplitude Specifications

Measurement Range

Maximum Safe Input Power

Average Continuous Power +30 dBm (1 W)

(input attenuation ≥10 dB)

Peak Pulse Power +50 dBm (100 W) for pulse widths ≤10 μs and <1% duty cycle.
(input attenuation ≥30 dB)

DC Voltage

AC Coupled <±50 V

DC Coupled <±0.2 V

Gain Compression

10 MHz to 2.9 GHz <1.0 dB

(≤−5 dBm at input mixer‡)

‡
Mixer level = input level − input attenuation.

Chapter 2 73
8560E/EC Specifications and Characteristics
Amplitude Specifications

Displayed Average Noise Level

With no signal at input, 1 Hz video bandwidth, and

0 dB input attenuation, tracking generator off.

Frequency Range 10 Hz RES BW 1 Hz RES BW

(Option 103) (Non-Option 103)

30 Hz <−80 dBm <−90 dBm

100 Hz <−80 dBm <−90 dBm

1 kHz <−95 dBm <−105 dBm

10 kHz <−110 dBm <−120 dBm

100 kHz <−110 dBm <−120 dBm

1 MHz to 10 MHz <−130 dBm <−140 dBm

10 MHz to 2.9 GHz

serial number prefix <3632A <−135 dBm <−145 dBm

serial number prefix ≥3632A <−141 dBm <−151 dBm

Option H13 <−141 dBm <−151 dBm

74 Chapter 2
8560E/EC Specifications and Characteristics
Amplitude Specifications

Spurious Responses

All input-related spurious responses, except as noted below. Mixer Level* Distortion

10 MHz to 2.9 GHz −40 dBm <−75 dBc

Second Harmonic Distortion

(−40 dBm mixer level*)

Applied Signal Frequency Range

1 MHz to 1.45 GHz (serial number prefix <3632A) −40 dBm <−72 dBc

20 MHz to 1.45 GHz (serial number prefix ≥3632A) −40 dBm <−79 dBc

20 MHz to 1.45 GHz (Option H13) −40 dBm <−79 dBc

Third Order Intermodulation Distortion

(with two signals at input mixer, spaced ≥1 kHz apart)

Frequency Range

1 MHz to 2.9 GHz (serial number prefix <3632A) −30 dBm each <−78 dBc

20 MHz to 2.9 GHz (serial number prefix ≥3632A) −30 dBm each <−82 dBc

20 MHz to 2.9 GHz (Option H13) −30 dBm each <−82 dBc

Image and Multiple Responses

Frequency Range

10 MHz to 2.9 GHz −10 dBm <−80 dBc

Out of Range Responses

(for input signals 2.9 GHz to 12 GHz)

Frequency Range

10 MHz to 2.9 GHz −10 dBm <−80 dBc

* Mixer Level = input level − input attenuation

Residual Responses

>200 kHz with no signal at input, 0 dB input attenuation, N† 1 <−90 dBm

† N harmonic mixing number

Chapter 2 75
8560E/EC Specifications and Characteristics
Amplitude Specifications

Display Range

Amplitude Scale 10 vertical display divisions, with the reference level (0 dB) at the top
graticule line.

Calibration

LOG 10 dB/DIV for 100 dB display from reference level.*

5 dB/DIV for 50 dB display expanded from reference level.†

2 dB/DIV for 20 dB display expanded from reference level.

1 dB/DIV for 10 dB display expanded from reference level.†

LINEAR 10% of reference level per division over the top nine divisions

(all 10 divisions for RES BW ≤100 Hz) when calibrated in voltage.

* 10 dB/DIV for 70 dB display from reference level for RES BW ≤100 Hz when SPAN = 0 Hz.
†
In E-Series instruments these scales are not available for sweep times < 30 ms without Option 007.

Accuracy

Reference Level Range

LOG, adjustable in 0.1 dB steps −120 dBm to +30 dBm

LINEAR, settable in 1% steps 2.2 μV to 7.07 V

76 Chapter 2
8560E/EC Specifications and Characteristics
Amplitude Specifications

Reference Level Uncertainty

Frequency Response

(with 10 dB input attenuation) Typical

Relative (referenced to midpoint between highest and lowest peak (20 °C to 30 °C)
excursions)

DC Coupled, 30 Hz to 2.9 GHz <±1.0 dB <±0.8 dB

DC Coupled, 100 MHz to 2.9 GHz (serial number prefix ≥3632A) <±0.7 dB <±0.7 dB

AC Coupled, 100 kHz to 2.9 GHz <±1.4 dB <±0.9 dB

Absolute (referenced to 300 MHz CAL OUTPUT)

DC Coupled, 30 Hz to 2.9 GHz <±1.5 dB <±1.0 dB

AC Coupled, 100 kHz to 2.9 GHz <±1.7 dB <±1.1 dB

Calibrator Uncertainty

−10 dBm, 300 MHz <±0.3 dB

Input Attenuator Switching Uncertainty

(20 to 70 dB settings, referenced to 10 dB input attenuation)

30 Hz to 2.9 GHz <±0.6 dB/10 dB step, 1.8 dB max.

IF Gain Uncertainty

(0 dBm to −80 dBm reference levels with 10 dB input attenuation) <±1.0 dB

Resolution Bandwidth Switching Uncertainty

(Referenced to 300 kHz resolution bandwidth at the reference level.)* <±0.5 dB

* Scale fidelity is not the same for RES BW ≤100 Hz as for RES BW ≥300 Hz. Therefore, signals not at the
reference level will experience an additional amplitude difference when switching between these two sets of
RES BW settings, due to differences in scale fidelity.

Chapter 2 77
8560E/EC Specifications and Characteristics
Amplitude Specifications

Pulse Digitization Uncertainty

(Pulse response mode, PRF >720/sweep time)

LOG

Resolution Bandwidth ≤ 1 MHz <1.25 dB peak-to-peak

Resolution Bandwidth = 2 MHz <3 dB peak-to-peak

LINEAR

Resolution Bandwidth ≤ 1 MHz <4% of reference level peak-to-peak

Resolution Bandwidth = 2 MHz <12% of reference level peak-to-peak

IF Alignment Uncertainty

(additional uncertainty when using 300 Hz RES BW only) <±0.5 dB

78 Chapter 2
8560E/EC Specifications and Characteristics
Amplitude Specifications

Scale Fidelity*

LOG

Incremental

0 to −90 dB range†

RES BW ≥ 300 Hz <±0.1 dB/dB

RES BW ≤ 100 Hz <±0.2 dB/2 dB

Cumulative

0 to −90 dB range†

RES BW ≥ 300 Hz <±0.1 dB/dB from the reference level to a maximum of ±0.85 dB

RES BW ≤ 100 Hz <±0.2 dB/2 dB from the reference level to a maximum of ±0.85 dB

0 to −100 dB range†

RES BW ≥ 300 Hz ±2.5 dB characteristic

RES BW ≤ 100 Hz maximum of ±1.5 dB

LINEAR <±3% of reference level

* Scale fidelity is not the same for RES BW ≤100 Hz as for RES BW ≥ 300 Hz. Therefore, signals not at the
reference level will experience an additional amplitude difference when switching between these two sets of
RES BW settings due to the differences in scale fidelity.
†
0 to −70 dB range for RES BW ≤100 Hz when SPAN = 0 Hz.

Marker Amplitude Resolution*

(Sweep time ≥ 30 ms)

Scale: LOG 10 dB/DIV (1/6) dB

LOG 5 dB/DIV (1/12) dB

LOG 2 dB/DIV (1/30) dB

LOG 1 dB/DIV (1/60) dB

LINEAR Reference Level/600

* In E-Series instruments markers are not available for sweep times < 30 ms with RES BW ≥ 300 Hz without
Option 007. For Option 007, see the characteristics section.

Chapter 2 79
8560E/EC Specifications and Characteristics
Tracking Generator Specifications (Option 002)

Tracking Generator Specifications (Option 002)

Frequency

Frequency Range 300 kHz to 2.9 GHz

Frequency Readout Accuracy ±(frequency reference accuracy* × frequency + 5% × span + 295 Hz)

Minimum Resolution 300 Hz

Bandwidth

* Frequency Reference Accuracy = (aging × period of time since adjustment + initial achievable accuracy +
temperature stability).

Amplitude

Output Level Range

Range −10 dBm to +1 dBm

−10 dBm to +2.8 dBm (typical)

Resolution 0.10 dB

Maximum Leveled Output Power +1 dBm minimum

Power Sweep Range 10 dB, 0.1 dB resolution

Output Level Accuracy

Absolute Amplitude Accuracy

(0 dBm at 300 MHz, 25 °C ± 10 °C) ±0.75 dB

Vernier Accuracy

(refer to 0 dBm at 300 MHz, 25 °C ± 10 °C) ±0.20 dB/dB, ±0.5 dB max.

Level Flatness

(0 dBm relative to 300 MHz) ±2.0 dB

Total Absolute Accuracy (25 °C ± 10 °C) ±3.25 dB

80 Chapter 2
8560E/EC Specifications and Characteristics
Tracking Generator Specifications (Option 002)

Spurious Outputs (at +1 dBm output power)

Harmonic Spurious (300 kHz to 2.9 GHz)† <−25 dBc

Non-Harmonic Spurious

300 kHz to 2.0 GHz† <−27 dBc

2.0 GHz to 2.9 GHz† <−23 dBc

LO Feedthrough (3.9 GHz to 6.8 GHz) <−16 dBm

†
Fundamental Frequency.

Residuals (RF power off)

300 kHz to 2.9 GHz <−78 dBm

Dynamic Range

TG Feedthrough*

300 kHz to 1 MHz <−95 dBm

1 MHz to 2.0 GHz <−115 dBm

2.0 GHz to 2.9 GHz <−110 dBm

* Leakage measured with maximum levelled output power into 50 Ω and with 50 Ω on INPUT 50Ω.

Power Sweep

Range 10 dB

Resolution 0.1 dB

Chapter 2 81
8560E/EC Specifications and Characteristics
Inputs and Outputs Specifications

Inputs and Outputs Specifications

CAUTION Any electrostatic discharge according to IEC 801-2/1991 to the center pins of any
of the connectors may cause damage to the associated circuitry.

IF INPUT (Deleted on Option 002 and Option 327)

Connector SMA female, front panel
Input level for full-screen deflections −30 dBm ± 1.5 dB
(external mixing mode, 0 dBm reference level, 30 dB conversion loss)

GPIB
Connector IEEE-488 bus connector
Interface Functions SH1, AH1, T6, TE0, L4, LE0, SR1, RL1, PP1, DC1, DT1, C1, C28
Direct Plotter Output Supports HP 7225A, HP7440A, HP 7470A, HP 7475A,HP 7550A
Direct Printer Output Supports HP 3630A PaintJet, HP 2225A ThinkJet

CAL OUTPUT
Connector BNC female, front panel
Frequency 300 MHz ±(300 MHz × frequency reference accuracy†)
Amplitude −10 dBm ±0.3 dB
† Frequency Reference Accuracy = (aging × period of time since adjustment + initial achievable accuracy + temperature
stability).

1ST LO OUTPUT
Connector SMA female, front panel
Amplitude
Non-Option 002 +16.5 dBm ±2.0 dB
Option 002 +14.5 dBm ±3.0 dB

10 MHz REF IN/OUT

Connector BNC female, rear panel
Output Frequency 10 MHz ±(10 MHz × frequency reference accuracy†)
†
Frequency Reference Accuracy = (aging × period of time since adjustment + initial achievable accuracy + temperature
stability).

82 Chapter 2
8560E/EC Specifications and Characteristics
General Specifications

General Specifications
Environmental Specifications

Military Specification per MIL-T-28800, Type III, Class 3, Style B (EC)/Style C (E), as follows:

Calibration Interval 2 years

Warmup 5 minutes from ambient conditions*

Temperature

Operating −10 °C to +55 °C (E) / 0 °C to +55 °C (EC)

Non-operating −51 °C to +71 °C

Humidity 95% at 40 °C for 5 days

Altitude

Operating 15,000 feet

Non-operating 50,000 feet

Rain resistance Drip-proof at 16 liters/hour/square foot

Vibration

5 to 15 Hz 0.060 inch peak-to-peak excursion

16 to 25 Hz 0.040 inch peak-to-peak excursion

26 to 55 Hz 0.020 inch peak-to-peak excursion

Pulse Shock

Half Sine 30 g for 11 ms duration

Transit Drop 8 inch drop on 6 faces and 8 corners

Power Main Voltage fluctuations within the range specified in the spectrum
analyzer “Power Requirements.”

Power Main Operating environment within the limits of installation category II

according to IEC 1010.

Pollution Operating environment within the limits of pollution degree 2

according to IEC 664.

* Two hours for conditions of internal condensation, 30 minutes to meet frequency response specifications
without preselector peaking. When operating outside the 20 °C to 30 °C ambient temperature range,
preselector peaking is always required to meet frequency response specifications.

Chapter 2 83
8560E/EC Specifications and Characteristics
General Specifications

Electromagnetic Compatibility

Conducted and radiated interference is in compliance with CISPR,

Publication 11 (1990).

Military Specification Meets the requirements of MIL-STD-461C, Part 2, with the

exceptions shown below:

Conducted Emissions

CE01 (Narrowband) 1 kHz to 15 kHz only

CE03 (Narrowband) Full limits

CE03 (Broadband) 20 dB relaxation from 15 kHz to 100 kHz

Conducted Susceptibility

CS01 Full Limits

CS02 Full Limits with 40 dB relaxation at IF frequencies. Refer also to

“Radiated Immunity” in Amplitude Characteristics.

CS06 Full Limits

Radiated Emissions

RE01 Test probe at 15 cm, front and rear panel search excluded.

RE02 Full limits to 1 GHz

Radiated Susceptibility

RS03 Limited to 3 V/m from 14 kHz to 1 GHz with 40 dB relaxation at IF

frequencies. Refer also to “Radiated Immunity” in Amplitude
Characteristics.

84 Chapter 2
8560E/EC Specifications and Characteristics
General Specifications

Power Requirements

115 Vac Operation

Voltage 90 V to 140 V rms

Current 3.2 A rms maximum

Frequency 47 Hz to 440 Hz

230 Vac Operation

Voltage 180 V to 250 V rms

Current 1.8 A rms maximum

Frequency 47 Hz to 66 Hz

Maximum Power Dissipation 180 W

Audible Noise <5.0 Bels, 20 °C to 30 °C (ISO DP7779)

Weight 20 kg (44 lb)

Chapter 2 85
8560E/EC Specifications and Characteristics
General Specifications

Dimensions

With Handle and Front Cover: Without Handle and Front Cover:

(A) 202 mm (7-15/16 in) high (B) 187 mm (7-3/8 in) high

(F) 503 mm (19-13/16 in) deep (E) 461 mm (18-1/8 in) deep

86 Chapter 2
8560E/EC Specifications and Characteristics
Frequency Characteristics

Frequency Characteristics
These are not specifications. Characteristics provide useful information about
instrument performance.

Frequency Reference Accuracy

Non-Option 103

Initial Achievable Accuracy <±2.2 × 10−8

(includes gravitational sensitivity, retrace,

and settability)

Daily Aging (average over 7 days after being <±5 × 10−10

powered on for 7 days)

Warmup

(Internal frequency reference selected)

After 5 minutes <±1 × 10−7 of final frequency* (0 °C to +55 °C)

<±1 × 10−6 of final frequency* (−10 °C)

After 15 minutes <±1 × 10−8 of final frequency* (−10 °C to +55 °C)

Option 103

Initial Achievable Accuracy <±1 × 10−6

* Final frequency is defined as frequency 60 minutes after power-on with analyzer set to internal frequency
reference.

Bandwidth Selectivity

RES BW ≤100 Hz <4.5:1

RES BW = 1 MHz <8:1

RES BW = 2 MHz <5.5:1

Chapter 2 87
8560E/EC Specifications and Characteristics
Frequency Characteristics

Impulse Bandwidth

RES BW 2 MHz 2.93 MHz ±10%

RES BW 1 MHz 1.60 MHz ±7%

RES BW 300 kHz 491 kHz ±7%

300 Hz ≤ RES BW ≤ 100 kHz 1.62 × RES BW ± 10%

Stability

Noise Sidebands

For frequencies ≤ 1 GHz, 100 kHz offset from carrier, and frequency span > ≤121 dBc/Hz
2 MHz

88 Chapter 2
8560E/EC Specifications and Characteristics
Frequency Characteristics

Figure 2-1 Noise Sidebands Normalized to 1 Hz BW versus Offset from Carrier

Figure 2-2 Typical On-Screen Dynamic Range vs. Offset from 1 GHz Center Freq. for all
RBW's

Chapter 2 89
8560E/EC Specifications and Characteristics
Frequency Characteristics

Sweep

Sweep Time Accuracy

Span ≥100 Hz <±15%

Resolution Bandwidth Usability* (Non-Option 103)

RES BW Maximum Usable Frequency

Video Average OFF Video Average ON, 10 Video Averages

Source/Spectrum Analyzer Frequency References

Locked† Independent‡

≥30 Hz >2.9 GHz >2.9 GHz >2.9 GHz

10 Hz >2.9 GHz >2.9 GHz >2.9 GHz

3 Hz >2.9 GHz >2.9 GHz 2 GHz

1 Hz >2.9 GHz >2.9 GHz 200 MHz

* Resolution Bandwidth Usability is the maximum usable frequency for a given resolution bandwidth. The
maximum usable frequency is limited by signal instability resulting from spectrum analyzer residual FM
during the measurement interval. Measurements at frequencies less than the maximum usable frequency will
have a typical amplitude uncertainty of less than 1 dB. These characteristics apply after a 30 minute warmup.
† Source and spectrum analyzer share the same frequency reference.
‡
Source and spectrum analyzer do not share the same frequency reference.

90 Chapter 2
8560E/EC Specifications and Characteristics
Amplitude Characteristics

Amplitude Characteristics

Dynamic Range

Figure 2-3 Nominal Dynamic Range

Amplitude Measurement Range

Spurious Responses Frequency Range Distortion

(all input related spurious responses <1 kHz from the 10 MHz to 2.9 GHz <−55 dBc
carrier)

Amplitude Accuracy

Input Attenuator Repeatability <±0.2 dB

Pulse Digitization Uncertainty

(Pulse response mode, PRF >720/sweep time)

Standard Deviation <0.2 dB

Chapter 2 91
8560E/EC Specifications and Characteristics
Amplitude Characteristics

Marker Amplitude Resolution

(EC-Series instruments and E-Series instruments with Option

007, sweep time < 30 ms, zero span)

Scale: LOG 10 dB/DIV ≤ (1/2) dB

LOG 5 dB/DIV ≤ (1/4) dB

LOG 2 dB/DIV ≤ (1/10) dB

LOG 1 dB/DIV ≤ (1/20) dB

LINEAR ≤ Reference Level/200

Demodulation

Spectrum Demodulation

Modulation Type AM and FM (5 kHz peak deviation)

Audio Output Internal speaker and phone jack with volume control.

Pause Time at Marker Frequency 100 ms to 60 s

Radiated Immunity

When tested at 3 V/m according to IEC 801-3/1984 the displayed average noise level will be within
specifications over the full immunity test frequency range of 27 to 500 MHz except that at the immunity test
frequency of 310.7 MHz ± selected resolution bandwidth the displayed average noise level may be up to
−80 dBm. When the analyzer tuned frequency is identical to the immunity test signal frequency there may be
signals of up to −90 dBm displayed on the screen.

92 Chapter 2
8560E/EC Specifications and Characteristics
Option 002 Tracking Generator Characteristics

Option 002 Tracking Generator Characteristics

Tracking Drift Usable in a 1 kHz RES BW after 5 minutes with SRC PWR set to ON*. Usable in a
300 Hz RES BW after 30 minutes with SRC PWR set to ON*.

* Setting the LINE switch ON does not automatically set SRC PWR to ON.

Effective Source Match <1.92:1

Dynamic Range

300 kHz to 1 MHz 96 dB

1 MHz to 2.0 GHz 116 dB

2.0 GHz to 2.9 GHz 111 dB

Chapter 2 93
8560E/EC Specifications and Characteristics
Inputs and Outputs Characteristics

Inputs and Outputs Characteristics

CAUTION Any electrostatic discharge according to IEC 801-2/1991 to the center pins of any
of the connectors may cause damage to the associated circuitry.

INPUT 50Ω

Connector Precision Type N female, front panel

Impedance 50 Ω

VSWR (at tuned frequency)

≥10 dB Input Attenuation <1.5:1

0 dB Input Attenuation <3.0:1

LO Emission Level* (average)

10 dB Input Attenuation <−70 dBm

* Level of 1st LO, 3.0 to 6.8 GHz, present at INPUT 50Ω connector.

IF INPUT (Deleted on Option 002 and Option 327)

(2nd IF input for use with external mixers)

Connector SMA female, front panel

Impedance (dc coupled) 50 Ω

Frequency 310.7 MHz

Noise Figure 7 dB

1 dB Gain Compression Level −23 dBm

Full Screen Level −30 dBm

(Gain Compression and Full Screen Levels apply with 30 dB

conversion loss setting and 0 dBm reference level.)

1ST LO OUTPUT

Connector SMA female, front panel

Impedance 50 Ω

Frequency Range 3.0000 GHz to 6.8107 GHz†

†
3.8107 GHz to 6.8107 GHz for analyzers equipped with Option 002.

94 Chapter 2
8560E/EC Specifications and Characteristics
Inputs and Outputs Characteristics

CAL OUTPUT

Connector BNC female, front panel

Impedance 50 Ω

10 MHz REF IN/OUT

Connector BNC female, rear panel

Impedance 50 Ω

Output Amplitude 0 dBm

Input Frequency 10 MHz × (1±2×10−5)

Input Amplitude −2 to +10 dBm

External Reference Phase Noise

Analyzer noise sideband performance will not be degraded if the

external reference phase noise is within the limits given below.

Non-Option 103 <−135 dBc/Hz at 100 Hz offset

Option 103 <−110 dBc/Hz at 100 Hz offset

VIDEO OUTPUT* (Deleted on Option 327)

Connector BNC female, rear panel

Impedance (dc coupled) 50 Ω

Amplitude (RES BW ≥300 Hz) 0 to +1 V full scale

Scaling

RES BW ≥300 Hz linear or log 100 dB/V

RES BW ≤100 Hz 4.8 kHz, auto-ranged level with dc offset

* The VIDEO OUTPUT is a video signal for RES BW ≥300 Hz with switching transients and IF ADJ signals
between sweeps. For RES BW ≤100 Hz the output is an IF signal with transients and IF ADJ signals between
and during sweeps.

Chapter 2 95
8560E/EC Specifications and Characteristics
Inputs and Outputs Characteristics

LO SWP|FAV OUTPUT and

LO SWP|0.5 V/GHz OUTPUT*

Connector BNC female, rear panel

Impedance (dc coupled) 120 Ω

LO SWP OUTPUT (no load) 0 to + 10 V

0.5 V/GHz OUTPUT

Internal Mixer Mode 0.5 V/GHz of tuned frequency (no load)

External Mixer Mode ([(1.5 V/GHz) × LO frequency)] − 0.2054 V) ±50 mV

0.25 V/GHz OUTPUT† 0.25 V/GHz of tuned frequency (no load)

* This connector is labeled LO SWP|0.5 V/GHz OUTPUT on older spectrum analyzers and
LO SWP|FAV OUTPUT on newer spectrum analyzers.
† The 0.25 V/GHz output is available only in the 8564E and 8565E.

BLKG/GATE OUTPUT

Connector BNC female, rear panel

Impedance 50 Ω

Blanking Mode

Amplitude during sweep Low TTL Level

Amplitude during retrace High TTL Level

Gate Mode

Gate On High TTL level

Gate Off Low TTL level

EXT/GATE TRIG INPUT

Connector BNC female, rear panel

Impedance 10 kΩ

Trigger Level Settable to high TTL, or low TTL, or edge triggered

TTL

PROBE POWER (front panel)

Voltage +15 V dc, −12.6 V dc

Current 150 mA maximum, each

96 Chapter 2
8560E/EC Specifications and Characteristics
Inputs and Outputs Characteristics

EARPHONE

Connector 1/8 inch miniature monophonic jack, rear panel

Power Output 0.2 W into 4 Ω

2ND IF OUT

(Option 001 instruments only)

Connector SMA female, rear panel

Impedance 50 Ω

Frequency 310.7 MHz

Serial Number Prefix 3 dB BW Noise Figure Conversion

Gain

<3632A >28 MHz 25 dB −15 dB

≥3632A >28 MHz 20 dB − 8 dB

RF OUTPUT 50Ω

(Option 002 analyzers only)

Connector Type N female

Impedance 50 Ω

Maximum Safe Reverse Level +30 dBm, 30 Vdc

Output VSWR (0 dB attenuation) 1.92:1

EXT ALC INPUT

(Option 002 analyzers only)

Connector BNC female

Impedance >10 kΩ

Polarity Use with negative detector

ALT SWEEP OUT

(Option 005 analyzers only)

Connector BNC female, rear panel

Impedance 100 Ω

Chapter 2 97
8560E/EC Specifications and Characteristics
Regulatory Information

Regulatory Information
The following information applies to the 8560EC spectrum analyzer.

98 Chapter 2
8560E/EC Specifications and Characteristics
Regulatory Information

The following information applies to the 8560E spectrum analyzer.

Chapter 2 99
8560E/EC Specifications and Characteristics
Regulatory Information

Notice for Germany: Noise Declaration

LpA < 70 dB am Arbeitsplatz (operator position) normaler Betrieb (normal
position) nach DIN 45635 T. 19 (per ISO 7779)

CE: European Community

The product design was approved for the European Community.

ISM1-A: Industrial Scientific and Medical Group 1, Class A

The instrument meets the requirements of CISPER 11, Clause 4.

CSA: Canadian Standards Association

The CSA mark is a registered trademark of the Canadian Standards Association.
The product meets the requirements.

IEC: International Electrotechnical Commission

This instrument has been designed and tested in accordance with IEC Publication
1010, Safety Requirements for Electronic Measuring Apparatus, and has been
supplied in a safe condition. The instruction documentation contains information
and warnings which must be followed by the user to ensure safe operation and to
maintain the instrument in a safe condition.
This product conforms to Enclosure Protection IP 2 0 according to IEC-529. The
enclosure protects against finger access to hazardous parts within the enclosure;
the enclosure does not protect against the entrance of water.

100 Chapter 2
3 8561E/EC Specifications and
Characteristics

101
8561E/EC Specifications and Characteristics
Specifications and Characteristics

Specifications and Characteristics

The following tables list the spectrum analyzer specifications. Unless stated
otherwise, all specifications describe the analyzer warranted performance under
the following conditions:
• Five-minute warmup in ambient conditions
• Auto-coupled controls
• Preselector peaked at the signal of interest
• Digital trace display
• IF ADJ ON
• REF LVL CAL adjusted
• 1ST LO OUTPUT terminated in 50 ohms
• 2ND IF OUTPUT (Option 001 analyzers) terminated in 50 ohms
• Two-year calibration cycle
• Environmental requirements met
After a 30-minute warmup at ambient temperature range of 20 °C to 30 °C, the
preselector does not have to be peaked at each signal of interest. Factory
preselector-peak values are sufficient to meet all specifications.

Characteristics provide useful information in the form of typical, nominal, or

approximate values for analyzer performance. Tables of spectrum analyzer
characteristics follow the specifications.

102 Chapter 3
8561E/EC Specifications and Characteristics
Calibration Cycle

Calibration Cycle
The performance tests in Chapter 2 should be used to check the analyzer against its
specifications every two years. Specifications are listed in this chapter.
The frequency reference must be adjusted as well as checked at the same time.
Refer to the “10 MHz Frequency Reference Adjustment” in the 8561E/EC and
8563E/EC Spectrum Analyzers Service Guide.

Chapter 3 103
8561E/EC Specifications and Characteristics
Frequency Specifications

Frequency Specifications
Frequency Range

Internal Mixing

AC Coupled 100 kHz to 6.5 GHz

DC Coupled 30 Hz to 6.5 GHz

Internal Mixing Bands Frequency Range Harmonic Mixing Mode N*

Band 0 30 Hz to 2.9 GHz 1−

Band 1 2.75 GHz to 6.5 GHz 1−

External Mixing 18 GHz to 325 GHz

External Mixing Bands

Frequency Band Frequency Range Harmonic Mixing Mode (N*)

Preselected Unpreselected

K 18.0 to 26.5 n/a 6−

A 26.5 to 40.0 8+ 8−

Q 33.0 to 50.0 10+ 10−

U 40.0 to 60.0 10+ 10−

V 50.0 to 75.0 14+ 14−

E 60.0 to 90.0 n/a 16−

W 75.0 to 110.0 18+ 18−

F 90.0 to 140.0 n/a 24−

D 110.0 to 170.0 n/a 30−

G 140.0 to 220.0 n/a 36−

Y 170.0 to 260.0 n/a 44−

J 220.0 to 325.0 n/a 54−

104 Chapter 3
8561E/EC Specifications and Characteristics
Frequency Specifications

Frequency Readout Accuracy

Accuracy of START, CENTER,

STOP or MARKER frequency

SPAN > 2 MHz × N* <±(frequency readout × frequency reference accuracy† + 5% of

frequency span + 15% of resolution bandwidth + 10 Hz)

SPAN ≤ 2 MHz × N* <±(frequency readout × frequency reference accuracy† + 1% of

frequency span + 15% of resolution bandwidth + 10 Hz)

* N is the harmonic mixing mode.

†
frequency reference accuracy = (aging × period of time since adjustment) + initial achievable accuracy +
temperature stability.

Frequency Count Marker

Frequency Count Marker Resolution Selectable from 1 Hz to 1 MHz

Frequency Count Marker Accuracy <±(marker frequency × frequency reference accuracy‡ +

(for signal-to-noise ratio ≥25 dB)
2 Hz × N† + 1 LSD)

Delta Frequency Count Accuracy <±(delta frequency × frequency reference accuracy‡ +

(for signal-to-noise ratio ≥25 dB)
4 Hz × N† + 2 LSD)

† N is the harmonic mixing mode.

‡ Frequency Reference Accuracy = (aging × period of time since adjustment + initial achievable accuracy +
temperature stability).

Frequency Reference Accuracy

Non-Option 103

Aging <±0.5 × 10−9/day (after 7 day warmup)

<±1 × 10−7/year

Temperature Stability <±1 × 10−8, −10 °C to +55 °C, referenced to 25 °C

Option 103

Aging <±2 × 10−6/year

Settability <±1 × 10−6

Temperature Stability <±1 × 10−6, −10 °C to +55 °C, referenced to 25 °C

Chapter 3 105
8561E/EC Specifications and Characteristics
Frequency Specifications

Stability

Residual FM

(zero span, 10 Hz RES BW)

Non-Option 103 < 1.0 Hz × N* peak-to-peak in 20 ms†

Option 103 < 10 Hz × N* peak-to-peak in 20 ms

Noise Sidebands

For Frequencies ≤1 GHz

(Refer to the characteristics section for

frequencies > 2.9 GHz)

Offset Non-Option 103 Option 103

100 Hz

serial number prefix <3424A <−80 dBc/Hz‡ <−70 dBc/Hz‡

serial number prefix ≥3424A <−88 dBc/Hz‡ <−70 dBc/Hz‡

1 kHz <−97 dBc/Hz‡ <−90 dBc/Hz‡

10 kHz†† <−113 dBc/Hz§ <−113 dBc/Hz§

30 kHz†† <−113 dBc/Hz# <−113 dBc/Hz#

100 kHz‡‡

serial number prefix <3424A <−113 dBc/Hz§ <−113 dBc/Hz§

serial number prefix ≥3424A <−117 dBc/Hz <−117 dBc/Hz

* N is the harmonic mixing mode.

**Add 2.0 dB for frequencies > 1 GHz and ≤ 2.9 GHz

††
For resolution bandwidth ≤ 1 kHz or frequency span ≤ 745 kHz.
‡‡
For resolution bandwidth ≥ 3 kHz or frequency span > 745 kHz.

106 Chapter 3
8561E/EC Specifications and Characteristics
Frequency Specifications

Frequency Span

Range

Internal Mixing 0 Hz, 100 Hz to 6.5 GHz over the 10-division display horizontal axis, variable
in approximately 1% increments, or in a 1, 2, 5 sequence.

External Mixing† Minimum span = 100 Hz × N*

Accuracy

SPAN > 2 MHz × N* <±5%

SPAN ≤ 2 MHz × N* <±1%

* N is the harmonic mixing mode.

† Resolution bandwidths ≤100 Hz are not available in external mixing. External mixing is not available for
Option 002 or Option 327.

Chapter 3 107
8561E/EC Specifications and Characteristics
Frequency Specifications

Resolution Bandwidths (−3 dB)

Range*

Non-Option 103 1 Hz to 1 MHz (selectable in a 1, 3, 10 sequence) and 2 MHz

(3 MHz at −6 dB)

Option 103 10 Hz to 1 MHz (selectable in a 1, 3, 10 sequence) and 2 MHz

(3 MHz at −6 dB)

Accuracy

1 Hz to 300 kHz RES BW <±10%

1 MHz RES BW <±25%

2 MHz RES BW <+50%, −25%

Selectivity (60 dB/3 dB bandwidth ratio)

RES BW ≥300 Hz <15:1

RES BW ≤100 Hz <5:1

Bandwidth Shape

1 and 2 MHz RES BW Approximately Gaussian

300 Hz to 300 kHz RES BW Synchronously tuned, 4-pole filters

1 Hz to 100 Hz RES BW Digital, approximately Gaussian

* Resolution bandwidths ≤100 Hz are not available in external mixing.

Video Bandwidth

(Post-detection low-pass filter averages displayed noise for a

smooth trace.)*

Range 1 Hz to 3 MHz† in a 1, 3, 10 sequence

108 Chapter 3
8561E/EC Specifications and Characteristics
Frequency Specifications

Sweep

Sweep Time

Range

Span = 0

Non-Option 007 (E-Series)

Analog display 50 μs to <30 ms

Digital display 30 ms to 6,000 s*

Option 007 E-Series, and all

EC-Series instruments

Digital display 50 μs to 6,000 s

Span ≥ 100 Hz

RES BW ≥300 Hz 50 ms to 2,000 s†

RES BW ≤100 Hz 50 ms to 100,000 s (span-dependent)

Accuracy (Span = 0 Hz)

Non-Option 007 (E-Series)

Sweep time 30 ms to 6,000 s* <±1%

Sweep time <30 ms <±10%

Option 007 E-Series and all

EC-Series instruments

Sweep time 30 ms to 6,000 s* <±1%

Sweep time <30 ms <±0.1%

Sweep Trigger Delayed, Free Run, Single, Line, External, or Video#

* 30 ms to 100 s for analyzers with serial prefix <3310A.

†
50 ms to 100 s for analyzers with serial prefix <3424A.

# Video trigger is not available in RES BW settings ≤100 Hz.

Chapter 3 109
8561E/EC Specifications and Characteristics
Frequency Specifications

Delayed Sweep

Trigger Modes Free Run, Line, External, Video*

Range

Span = 0

Non-Option 007 (E-Series) +2 μs to +65.535 ms

Option 007 E-Series and all EC-Series

instruments

Sweep time ≥ 30 ms +2 μs to +65.535 ms

Sweep time < 30 ms −9.9 ms to +65.535 ms††

Span ≥ 100 Hz +2 μs to +65.535 ms

Resolution 1 μs

Accuracy#

Serial prefix 3310A and above ±1 μs

Serial prefix <3310A

20 °C to 30 °C ±(1 μs + (0.05% × DELAY SWEEP setting)

−10 °C to +55 °C ±(1 μs + (0.12% × DELAY SWEEP setting)

* Video trigger is not available in RES BW settings ≤ 100 Hz.

110 Chapter 3
8561E/EC Specifications and Characteristics
Frequency Specifications

Time-Gated Spectrum Analysis

Gate Delay* Edge Mode Level Mode

Range 3 μs to 65.535 ms ≤0.5 μs

Resolution 1 μs

Accuracy†

Serial prefix 3310A and above <±1 μs

Serial prefix <3310A

20 °C to 30 °C ± (1 μs + (0.05% × GATE DELAY setting)

−10 °C to 55 °C ± (1 μs + (0.12% × GATE DELAY setting)

* Time from GATE TRIGGER INPUT to positive edge of GATE OUTPUT.

†
The gate delay time will experience up to ±0.5 μs of jitter due to synchronization of the input edge trigger to
the internal 1 MHz timebase.

Gate Length*

Range 1 μs to 65.535 ms

Resolution 1 μs

Accuracy

Serial prefix 3310A and above <±1 μs

Serial prefix <3310A

20 °C to 30 °C ± (0.2 μs + (0.05% × GATE LENGTH setting)

−10 °C to 55 °C ± (0.2 μs + (0.12% × GATE LENGTH setting)

* Time from positive edge to negative edge of GATE OUTPUT.

Marker Frequency Resolution SPAN/600 to a minimum of 1 Hz

Marker Time Resolution Sweep time/600

Chapter 3 111
8561E/EC Specifications and Characteristics
Amplitude Specifications

Amplitude Specifications

Measurement Range

Maximum Safe Input Power

Average Continuous Power +30 dBm (1 W)

(input attenuation ≥10 dB)

Peak Pulse Power +50 dBm (100 W) for pulse widths ≤10 μs and <1% duty cycle.
(input attenuation ≥30 dB)

DC Voltage

AC Coupled <±50 V

DC Coupled <±0.2 V

Gain Compression

10 MHz to 2.9 GHz <1.0 dB

(≤−5 dBm at input mixer‡)

2.9 GHz to 6.5 GHz <1.0 dB

(≤−3 dBm at input mixer†)

‡ Mixer level = input level − input attenuation.

112 Chapter 3
8561E/EC Specifications and Characteristics
Amplitude Specifications

Displayed Average Noise Level

With no signal at input, 1 Hz video bandwidth, and

0 dB input attenuation, tracking generator off.

Frequency Range 10 Hz RES BW 1 Hz RES BW

(Option 103) (Non-Option 103)

30 Hz <−80 dBm <−90 dBm

100 Hz <−80 dBm <−90 dBm

1 kHz <−95 dBm <−105 dBm

10 kHz <−110 dBm <−120 dBm

100 kHz <−110 dBm <−120 dBm

1 MHz to 10 MHz <−130 dBm <−140 dBm

10 MHz to 2.9 GHz <−135 dBm <−145 dBm

2.9 GHz to 6.5 GHz <−135 dBm <−145 dBm

Chapter 3 113
8561E/EC Specifications and Characteristics
Amplitude Specifications

Spurious Responses

All input-related spurious responses, except as noted below. Mixer Level* Distortion

10 MHz to 6.5 GHz −40 dBm <−75 dBc

Second Harmonic Distortion

(−40 dBm mixer level*)

Applied Signal Frequency Range

1 MHz to 1.45 GHz −40 dBm <−72 dBc

1.45 Hz to 3.25 GHz −20 dBm <−72 dBc

Third Order Intermodulation Distortion

(with two signals at input mixer, spaced ≥1 kHz apart)

Frequency Range

1 MHz to 2.9 GHz −30 dBm each <−78 dBc

2.9 GHz to 6.5 GHz −30 dBm each <−90 dBc

Image and Multiple Responses

Frequency Range

10 MHz to 6.5 GHz −10 dBm <−80 dBc

Out of Range Responses

(due to input signals 6.5 GHz to 12.0 GHz)

Frequency Range

10 MHz to 6.5 GHz −10 dBm <−80 dBc

* Mixer Level = input level − input attenuation

Residual Responses

>200 kHz with no signal at input, 0 dB input attenuation, N† 1 <−90 dBm

†
N harmonic mixing number

114 Chapter 3
8561E/EC Specifications and Characteristics
Amplitude Specifications

Display Range

Amplitude Scale 10 vertical display divisions, with the reference level (0 dB) at the top
graticule line.

Calibration

LOG 10 dB/DIV for 100 dB display from reference level.*

5 dB/DIV for 50 dB display expanded from reference level.†

2 dB/DIV for 20 dB display expanded from reference level.

1 dB/DIV for 10 dB display expanded from reference level.†

LINEAR 10% of reference level per division over the top nine divisions

(all 10 divisions for RES BW ≤100 Hz) when calibrated in voltage.

* 10 dB/DIV for 70 dB display from reference level for RES BW ≤100 Hz when SPAN = 0 Hz.
†
In E-Series instruments these scales are not available for sweep times < 30 ms without Option 007.

Accuracy

Reference Level Range

LOG, adjustable in 0.1 dB steps −120 dBm to +30 dBm

LINEAR, settable in 1% steps 2.2 μV to 7.07 V

Chapter 3 115
8561E/EC Specifications and Characteristics
Amplitude Specifications

Reference Level Uncertainty

Frequency Response

(with 10 dB input attenuation) Typical

Relative (referenced to midpoint between highest and lowest peak (20 °C to 30 °C)
excursions)

DC Coupled

30 Hz to 2.9 GHz <±1.0 dB <±0.7 dB

2.9 GHz to 6.5 GHz <±1.5 dB <±1.1 dB

AC Coupled

100 kHz to 2.9 GHz <±1.1 dB <±0.8 dB

2.9 GHz to 6.5 GHz <±2.0 dB <±1.0 dB

Absolute (referenced to 300 MHz CAL OUTPUT)

DC Coupled

30 Hz to 2.9 GHz <±1.75 dB <±1.0 dB

2.9 GHz to 6.5 GHz <±2.5 dB <±1.5 dB

AC Coupled

100 kHz to 2.9 GHz <±1.9 dB <±1.2 dB

2.9 GHz to 6.5 GHz <±3.0 dB <±1.5 dB

Calibrator Uncertainty

−10 dBm, 300 MHz <±0.3 dB

Input Attenuator Switching Uncertainty

(20 to 70 dB settings, referenced to 10 dB input attenuation)

30 Hz to 2.9 GHz <±0.6 dB/10 dB step, 1.8 dB max.

IF Gain Uncertainty

(0 dBm to −80 dBm reference levels with 10 dB input attenuation) <±1.0 dB

Resolution Bandwidth Switching Uncertainty

(Referenced to 300 kHz resolution bandwidth at the reference level.)* <±0.5 dB

116 Chapter 3
8561E/EC Specifications and Characteristics
Amplitude Specifications

Pulse Digitization Uncertainty

(Pulse response mode, PRF >720/sweep time)

LOG

Resolution Bandwidth ≤ 1 MHz <1.25 dB peak-to-peak

Resolution Bandwidth = 2 MHz <3 dB peak-to-peak

LINEAR

Resolution Bandwidth ≤ 1 MHz <4% of reference level peak-to-peak

Resolution Bandwidth = 2 MHz <12% of reference level peak-to-peak

IF Alignment Uncertainty

(additional uncertainty when using 300 Hz RES BW only) <±0.5 dB

Chapter 3 117
8561E/EC Specifications and Characteristics
Amplitude Specifications

Scale Fidelity*

LOG

Incremental

0 to −90 dB range†

RES BW ≥ 300 Hz <±0.1 dB/dB

RES BW ≤ 100 Hz <±0.2 dB/2 dB

Cumulative

0 to −90 dB range†

RES BW ≥ 300 Hz <±0.1 dB/dB from the reference level to a maximum of ±0.85 dB

RES BW ≤ 100 Hz <±0.2 dB/2 dB from the reference level to a maximum of ±0.85 dB

0 to −100 dB range†

RES BW ≥ 300 Hz ±2.5 dB characteristic

RES BW ≤ 100 Hz maximum of ±1.5 dB

LINEAR <±3% of reference level

* Scale fidelity is not the same for RES BW ≤100 Hz as for RES BW ≥ 300 Hz. Therefore, signals not at the
reference level will experience an additional amplitude difference when switching between these two sets of
RES BW settings due to the differences in scale fidelity.
†
0 to −70 dB range for RES BW ≤100 Hz when SPAN = 0 Hz.

Marker Amplitude Resolution*

(Sweep time ≥ 30 ms)

Scale: LOG 10 dB/DIV (1/6) dB

LOG 5 dB/DIV (1/12) dB

LOG 2 dB/DIV (1/30) dB

LOG 1 dB/DIV (1/60) dB

LINEAR Reference Level/600

* In E-Series instruments markers are not available for sweep times < 30 ms with RES BW ≥ 300 Hz without
Option 007. For Option 007, see the characteristics section.

118 Chapter 3
8561E/EC Specifications and Characteristics
Inputs and Outputs Specifications

Inputs and Outputs Specifications

CAUTION Any electrostatic discharge according to IEC 801-2/1991 to the center pins of any
of the connectors may cause damage to the associated circuitry.

IF INPUT (Deleted on Option 002 and Option 327)

Connector SMA female, front panel

Input level for full-screen deflections −30 dBm ± 1.5 dB

(external mixing mode, 0 dBm reference level, 30 dB conversion loss)

GPIB

Connector IEEE-488 bus connector

Interface Functions SH1, AH1, T6, TE0, L4, LE0, SR1, RL1, PP1, DC1, DT1, C1, C28

Direct Plotter Output Supports Agilent 7225A, Agilent 7440A, Agilent 7470A, Agilent 7475A,
Agilent 7550A

Direct Printer Output Supports HP 3630A PaintJet, HP 2225A ThinkJet

CAL OUTPUT

Connector BNC female, front panel

Frequency 300 MHz ±(300 MHz × frequency reference accuracy†)

Amplitude −10 dBm ±0.3 dB

† Frequency Reference Accuracy = (aging × period of time since adjustment + initial achievable accuracy +
temperature stability).

1ST LO OUTPUT

Connector SMA female, front panel

Amplitude +16.5 dBm ±2.0 dB

10 MHz REF IN/OUT

Connector BNC female, rear panel

Output Frequency 10 MHz ±(10 MHz × frequency reference accuracy†)

†
Frequency Reference Accuracy = (aging × period of time since adjustment + initial achievable accuracy +
temperature stability).

Chapter 3 119
8561E/EC Specifications and Characteristics
General Specifications

General Specifications
Environmental Specifications

Military Specification per MIL-T-28800, Type III, Class 3, Style B (EC)/Style C (E), as follows:

Calibration Interval 2 years

Warmup 5 minutes from ambient conditions*

Temperature

Operating −10 °C to +55 °C (E) / 0 °C to +55 °C (EC)

Non-operating −51 °C to +71 °C

Humidity 95% at 40 °C for 5 days

Altitude

Operating 15,000 feet

Non-operating 50,000 feet

Rain resistance Drip-proof at 16 liters/hour/square foot

Vibration

5 to 15 Hz 0.060 inch peak-to-peak excursion

16 to 25 Hz 0.040 inch peak-to-peak excursion

26 to 55 Hz 0.020 inch peak-to-peak excursion

Pulse Shock

Half Sine 30 g for 11 ms duration

Transit Drop 8 inch drop on 6 faces and 8 corners

Power Main Voltage fluctuations within the range specified in the spectrum
analyzer “Power Requirements.”

Power Main Operating environment within the limits of installation category II

according to IEC 1010.

Pollution Operating environment within the limits of pollution degree 2

according to IEC 664.

120 Chapter 3
8561E/EC Specifications and Characteristics
General Specifications

Electromagnetic Compatibility

Conducted and radiated interference is in compliance with CISPR,

Publication 11 (1990).

Military Specification Meets the requirements of MIL-STD-461C, Part 2, with the

exceptions shown below:

Conducted Emissions

CE01 (Narrowband) 1 kHz to 15 kHz only

CE03 (Narrowband) Full limits

CE03 (Broadband) 20 dB relaxation from 15 kHz to 100 kHz

Conducted Susceptibility

CS01 Full Limits

CS02 Full Limits with 40 dB relaxation at IF frequencies. Refer also to

“Radiated Immunity” in Amplitude Characteristics.

CS06 Full Limits

Radiated Emissions

RE01 Test probe at 15 cm, front and rear panel search excluded.

RE02 Full limits to 1 GHz

Radiated Susceptibility

RS03 Limited to 3 V/m from 14 kHz to 1 GHz with 40 dB relaxation at IF

frequencies. Refer also to “Radiated Immunity” in Amplitude
Characteristics.

Chapter 3 121
8561E/EC Specifications and Characteristics
General Specifications

Power Requirements

115 Vac Operation

Voltage 90 V to 140 V rms

Current 3.2 A rms maximum

Frequency 47 Hz to 440 Hz

230 Vac Operation

Voltage 180 V to 250 V rms

Current 1.8 A rms maximum

Frequency 47 Hz to 66 Hz

Maximum Power Dissipation 180 W

Audible Noise <5.0 Bels, 20 °C to 30 °C (ISO DP7779)

Weight 20 kg (44 lb)

122 Chapter 3
8561E/EC Specifications and Characteristics
General Specifications

Dimensions

With Handle and Front Cover: Without Handle and Front Cover:

(A) 202 mm (7-15/16 in) high (B) 187 mm (7-3/8 in) high

(F) 503 mm (19-13/16 in) deep (E) 461 mm (18-1/8 in) deep

Chapter 3 123
8561E/EC Specifications and Characteristics
Frequency Characteristics

Frequency Characteristics
These are not specifications. Characteristics provide useful information about
instrument performance.

Frequency Reference Accuracy

Non-Option 103

Initial Achievable Accuracy <±2.2 × 10−8

(includes gravitational sensitivity, retrace,

and settability)

Daily Aging (average over 7 days after being <±5 × 10−10

powered on for 7 days)

Warmup

(Internal frequency reference selected)

After 5 minutes <±1 × 10−7 of final frequency* (0 °C to +55 °C)

<±1 × 10−6 of final frequency* (−10 °C)

After 15 minutes <±1 × 10−8 of final frequency* (−10 °C to +55 °C)

Option 103

Initial Achievable Accuracy <±1 × 10−6

* Final frequency is defined as frequency 60 minutes after power-on with analyzer set to internal frequency
reference.

Bandwidth Selectivity

RES BW ≤100 Hz <4.5:1

RES BW = 1 MHz <8:1

RES BW = 2 MHz <5.5:1

124 Chapter 3
8561E/EC Specifications and Characteristics
Frequency Characteristics

Impulse Bandwidth

RES BW 2 MHz 2.93 MHz ±10%

RES BW 1 MHz 1.60 MHz ±7%

RES BW 300 kHz 491 kHz ±7%

300 Hz ≤ RES BW ≤ 100 kHz 1.62 × RES BW ± 10%

Stability

Noise Sidebands

For frequencies ≤ 1 GHz, 100 kHz offset from carrier, and frequency span > ≤121 dBc/Hz
2 MHz

Chapter 3 125
8561E/EC Specifications and Characteristics
Frequency Characteristics

Figure 3-1 Noise Sidebands Normalized to 1 Hz BW versus Offset from Carrier

Figure 3-2 Typical On-Screen Dynamic Range vs. Offset from 1 GHz Center Freq. for all
RBW's

126 Chapter 3
8561E/EC Specifications and Characteristics
Frequency Characteristics

Sweep

Sweep Time Accuracy

Span ≥100 Hz <±15%

Resolution Bandwidth Usability* (Non-Option 103)

RES BW Maximum Usable Frequency

Video Average OFF Video Average ON, 10 Video Averages

Source/Spectrum Analyzer Frequency References

Locked† Independent‡

≥30 Hz >6.5 GHz >6.5 GHz >6.5 GHz

10 Hz >6.5 GHz >6.5 GHz >6.5 GHz

3 Hz >6.5 GHz >6.5 GHz 2 GHz

1 Hz >6.5 GHz >6.5 GHz 200 MHz

Chapter 3 127
8561E/EC Specifications and Characteristics
Amplitude Characteristics

Amplitude Characteristics

Dynamic Range

Figure 3-3 Nominal Dynamic Range

Amplitude Measurement Range

Spurious Responses Frequency Range Distortion

(all input related spurious responses <1 kHz from the 10 MHz to 2.9 GHz <−55 dBc
carrier)

Amplitude Accuracy

Band-to-Band Frequency Response

(Frequency response uncertainty for measurements between the two internal mixing
bands. Equivalent to the sum of the two In-Band Frequency Response values plus
Band Switching Uncertainty.)

dc Coupled <3.5 dB

ac Coupled <4.1 dB

Input Attenuator Repeatability <±0.2 dB

128 Chapter 3
8561E/EC Specifications and Characteristics
Amplitude Characteristics

Pulse Digitization Uncertainty

(Pulse response mode, PRF >720/sweep time)

Standard Deviation <0.2 dB

Marker Amplitude Resolution

(EC-Series and E-Series with Option 007, sweep time < 30 ms,
zero span)

Scale: LOG 10 dB/DIV ≤ (1/2) dB

LOG 5 dB/DIV ≤ (1/4) dB

LOG 2 dB/DIV ≤ (1/10) dB

LOG 1 dB/DIV ≤ (1/20) dB

LINEAR ≤ Reference Level/200

Demodulation

Spectrum Demodulation

Modulation Type AM and FM (5 kHz peak deviation)

Audio Output Internal speaker and phone jack with volume control.

Pause Time at Marker Frequency 100 ms to 60 s

Radiated Immunity

Chapter 3 129
8561E/EC Specifications and Characteristics
Inputs and Outputs Characteristics

Inputs and Outputs Characteristics

CAUTION Any electrostatic discharge according to IEC 801-2/1991 to the center pins of any
of the connectors may cause damage to the associated circuitry.

INPUT 50Ω

Connector Precision Type N female, front panel

Impedance 50 Ω

VSWR (at tuned frequency)

<1.5:1 for ≥10 dB Input Attenuation

<3.0:1 for 0 dB Input Attenuation

LO Emission Level* (average)

10 dB Input Attenuation <−80 dBm

* Level of 1st LO, 3.0 to 6.8 GHz, present at INPUT 50Ω connector.

IF INPUT (Deleted on Option 002 and Option 327)

(2nd IF input for use with external mixers)

Connector SMA female, front panel

Impedance (dc coupled) 50 Ω

Frequency 310.7 MHz

Noise Figure 7 dB

1 dB Gain Compression Level −23 dBm

Full Screen Level −30 dBm

(Gain Compression and Full Screen Levels apply with 30 dB conversion

loss setting and 0 dBm reference level.)

1ST LO OUTPUT

Connector SMA female, front panel

Impedance 50 Ω

Frequency Range 3.0000 GHz to 6.8107 GHz†

†
3.8107 GHz to 6.8107 GHz for analyzers equipped with Option 002.

130 Chapter 3
8561E/EC Specifications and Characteristics
Inputs and Outputs Characteristics

CAL OUTPUT

Connector BNC female, front panel

Impedance 50 Ω

10 MHz REF IN/OUT

Connector BNC female, rear panel

Impedance 50 Ω

Output Amplitude 0 dBm

Input Frequency 10 MHz × (1±2×10−5)

Input Amplitude −2 to +10 dBm

External Reference Phase Noise

Analyzer noise sideband performance will not be degraded if the

external reference phase noise is within the limits given below.

Non-Option 103 <−135 dBc/Hz at 100 Hz offset

Option 103 <−110 dBc/Hz at 100 Hz offset

VIDEO OUTPUT* (Deleted on Option 327)

Connector BNC female, rear panel

Impedance (dc coupled) 50 Ω

Amplitude (RES BW ≥300 Hz) 0 to +1 V full scale

Scaling

RES BW ≥300 Hz linear or log 100 dB/V

RES BW ≤100 Hz 4.8 kHz, auto-ranged level with dc offset

Chapter 3 131
8561E/EC Specifications and Characteristics
Inputs and Outputs Characteristics

LO SWP|FAV OUTPUT and

LO SWP|0.5 V/GHz OUTPUT*

Connector BNC female, rear panel

Impedance (dc coupled) 120 Ω

LO SWP OUTPUT (no load) 0 to + 10 V

0.5 V/GHz OUTPUT

Internal Mixer Mode 0.5 V/GHz of tuned frequency (no load)

External Mixer Mode ([(1.5 V/GHz) × LO frequency)] − 0.2054 V) ±50 mV

0.25 V/GHz OUTPUT† 0.25 V/GHz of tuned frequency (no load)

* This connector is labeled LO SWP|0.5 V/GHz OUTPUT on older spectrum analyzers and
LO SWP|FAV OUTPUT on newer spectrum analyzers.
† The 0.25 V/GHz output is available only in the 8564E and 8565E.

BLKG/GATE OUTPUT

Connector BNC female, rear panel

Impedance 50 Ω

Blanking Mode

Amplitude during sweep Low TTL Level

Amplitude during retrace High TTL Level

Gate Mode

Gate On High TTL level

Gate Off Low TTL level

EXT/GATE TRIG INPUT

Connector BNC female, rear panel

Impedance 10 kΩ

Trigger Level Settable to high TTL, or low TTL, or edge triggered

TTL

PROBE POWER (front panel)

Voltage +15 V dc, −12.6 V dc

Current 150 mA maximum, each

132 Chapter 3
8561E/EC Specifications and Characteristics
Inputs and Outputs Characteristics

EARPHONE

Connector 1/8 inch miniature monophonic jack, rear panel

Power Output 0.2 W into 4 Ω

(Option 001 instruments only)

Connector SMA female, rear panel

Impedance 50 Ω

Frequency 310.7 MHz

Frequency Range 3 dB BW Noise Figure Conversion

Gain

30 Hz to 2.9 GHz >28 MHz 25 dB −15 dB

2.9 GHz to 6.5 GHz >28 MHz 20 dB −8 dB

ALT SWEEP OUT

(Option 005 analyzers only)

Connector BNC female, rear panel

Impedance 100 Ω

Chapter 3 133
8561E/EC Specifications and Characteristics
Regulatory Information

Regulatory Information
The following information applies to 8561EC spectrum analyzers.

134 Chapter 3
8561E/EC Specifications and Characteristics
Regulatory Information

The following information applies to the Agilent 8561E spectrum analyzer.

Chapter 3 135
8561E/EC Specifications and Characteristics
Regulatory Information

Notice for Germany: Noise Declaration

LpA < 70 dB am Arbeitsplatz (operator position) normaler Betrieb (normal
position) nach DIN 45635 T. 19 (per ISO 7779)

CE: European Community

The product design was approved for the European Community.

ISM1-A: Industrial Scientific and Medical Group 1, Class A

The instrument meets the requirements of CISPER 11, Clause 4.

CSA: Canadian Standards Association

The CSA mark is a registered trademark of the Canadian Standards Association.
The product meets the requirements.

IEC: International Electrotechnical Commission

136 Chapter 3
4 8562E/EC Specifications and
Characteristics

137
8562E/EC Specifications and Characteristics
Specifications and Characteristics

Specifications and Characteristics

The following tables list the spectrum analyzer specifications. Unless stated
otherwise, all specifications describe the analyzer warranted performance under
the following conditions:
• Five-minute warmup for ambient conditions
• Autocoupled controls
• Preselector peaked at the signal of interest
• Digital trace display
• IF ADJ ON
• REF LVL CAL adjusted
• 1ST LO OUTPUT terminated in 50 ohms
• 2ND IF OUTPUT terminated in 50 ohms
• Two-year calibration cycle (See “Calibration Cycle” below.)
• Environmental requirements met
After a 30-minute warmup at a temperature between 20 °C and 30 °C, the
preselector does not have to be peaked at each signal of interest. Factory
preselector-peak values are sufficient to meet all specifications.

NOTE REF LVL ADJ uses the CAL OUTPUT signal to calibrate the reference level. How
often this adjustment should be performed depends on internal temperature
changes. Amplitude temperature drift is a nominal 1 dB/10 °C. The nominal
temperature drift is 10 °C, most of which occurs during the first 30 minutes after
power-on. Internal temperature equilibrium is reached after 2 hours of operation at
a stable ambient temperature.

Characteristics provide useful information in the form of typical, nominal, or

approximate values for analyzer performance. Tables of the spectrum analyzer
characteristics follow the specifications.

138 Chapter 4
8562E/EC Specifications and Characteristics
Calibration Cycle

Calibration Cycle
The performance tests located in Chapter 2 should be used every two years to
check the analyzer against the specifications listed in this chapter.
The frequency reference needs to be adjusted as well as checked at the same time.
Refer to the 10 MHz Frequency Reference Adjustment in the Agilent 8562E and
8562EC Spectrum Analyzers Service Guide.

Chapter 4 139
8562E/EC Specifications and Characteristics
Frequency Specifications

Frequency Specifications
Frequency Range

Internal Mixing

AC Coupled 100 kHz to 13.2 GHz

DC Coupled 30 Hz to 13.2 GHz

Internal Mixing Bands Frequency Range Harmonic Mixing Mode N*

Band 0 30 Hz to 2.9 GHz 1−

Band 1 2.75 GHz to 6.5 GHz 1−

Band 2 6.5 GHz to 13.2 GHz 2−

External Mixing 18 GHz to 325 GHz

Non-Option 327

External Mixing Bands

Frequency Band Frequency Range Harmonic Mixing Mode (N*)

Preselected Unpreselected

K 18.0 to 26.5 n/a 6−

A 26.5 to 40.0 8+ 8−

Q 33.0 to 50.0 10+ 10−

U 40.0 to 60.0 10+ 10−

V 50.0 to 75.0 14+ 14−

E 60.0 to 90.0 n/a 16−

W 75.0 to 110.0 18+ 18−

F 90.0 to 140.0 n/a 24−

D 110.0 to 170.0 n/a 30−

G 140.0 to 220.0 n/a 36−

Y 170.0 to 260.0 n/a 44−

J 220.0 to 325.0 n/a 54−

140 Chapter 4
8562E/EC Specifications and Characteristics
Frequency Specifications

Frequency Readout Accuracy

Accuracy of START, CENTER,

STOP or MARKER frequency

SPAN > 2 MHz × N* <±(frequency readout × frequency reference accuracy† + 5% of

frequency span + 15% of resolution bandwidth + 10 Hz)

SPAN ≤ 2 MHz × N* <±(frequency readout × frequency reference accuracy† + 1% of

frequency span + 15% of resolution bandwidth + 10 Hz)

* N is the harmonic mixing mode.

†
frequency reference accuracy = (aging × period of time since adjustment) + initial achievable accuracy +
temperature stability.

Frequency Count Marker

Frequency Count Marker Resolution Selectable from 1 Hz to 1 MHz

Frequency Count Marker Accuracy <±(marker frequency × frequency reference accuracy‡ +

(for signal-to-noise ratio ≥25 dB)
2 Hz × N† + 1 LSD)

Delta Frequency Count Accuracy <±(delta frequency × frequency reference accuracy‡ +

(for signal-to-noise ratio ≥25 dB)
4 Hz × N† + 2 LSD)

† N is the harmonic mixing mode.

‡ Frequency Reference Accuracy = (aging × period of time since adjustment + initial achievable accuracy +
temperature stability).

Chapter 4 141
8562E/EC Specifications and Characteristics
Frequency Specifications

Frequency Reference Accuracy

Non-Option 103

Aging <±0.5 × 10−9/day (after 7 day warmup)

<±1 × 10−7/year

Temperature Stability <±1 × 10−8, −10 °C to +55 °C, referenced to 25 °C

Option 103

Aging <±2 × 10−6/year

Settability <±1 × 10−6

Temperature Stability <±1 × 10−6, −10 °C to +55 °C, referenced to 25 °C

142 Chapter 4
8562E/EC Specifications and Characteristics
Frequency Specifications

Stability

Residual FM

(zero span, 10 Hz RES BW)

Non-Option 103 < 1.0 Hz × N* peak-to-peak in 20 ms†

Option 103 < 10 Hz × N* peak-to-peak in 20 ms

Noise Sidebands

For Frequencies ≤1 GHz

(Refer to the characteristics section for

frequencies > 2.9 GHz)

Offset Non-Option 103 Option 103

100 Hz <−88 dBc/Hz‡ <−70 dBc/Hz‡

1 kHz <−97 dBc/Hz‡ <−90 dBc/Hz‡

10 kHz†† <−113 dBc/Hz§ <−113 dBc/Hz§

30 kHz†† <−113 dBc/Hz# <−113 dBc/Hz#

100 kHz‡‡ <−117 dBc/Hz <−117 dBc/Hz

* N is the harmonic mixing mode.

† See Resolution Bandwidth Usability in “Frequency Characteristics” for further information.
‡
Add 5.2 dB × (f/1 GHz) −1) for f > 1 GHz and f ≤ 2.9 GHz.
§
Add 2.5 dB × (f/1 GHz) −1) for f > 1 GHz and f ≤ 2.9 GHz.
#
Add 3.0 dB × (f/1 GHz) −1) for f > 1 GHz and f ≤ 2.9 GHz.

**Add 2.0 dB for frequencies > 1 GHz and ≤ 2.9 GHz

††
For resolution bandwidth ≤ 1 kHz or frequency span ≤ 745 kHz.
‡‡
For resolution bandwidth ≥ 3 kHz or frequency span > 745 kHz.

Chapter 4 143
8562E/EC Specifications and Characteristics
Frequency Specifications

Frequency Span

Range

Internal Mixing 0 Hz, 100 Hz to 13.2 GHz over the 10-division display horizontal axis,
variable in approximately 1% increments, or in a 1, 2, 5 sequence.

External Mixing† Minimum span = 100 Hz × N*

Accuracy

SPAN > 2 MHz × N* <±5%

SPAN ≤ 2 MHz × N* <±1%

* N is the harmonic mixing mode.

† Resolution bandwidths ≤100 Hz are not available in external mixing. External mixing is not available for
Option 002 or Option 327.

144 Chapter 4
8562E/EC Specifications and Characteristics
Frequency Specifications

Resolution Bandwidths (−3 dB)

Range*

Non-Option 103 1 Hz to 1 MHz (selectable in a 1, 3, 10 sequence) and 2 MHz

(3 MHz at −6 dB)

Option 103 10 Hz to 1 MHz (selectable in a 1, 3, 10 sequence) and 2 MHz

(3 MHz at −6 dB)

Accuracy

1 Hz to 300 kHz RES BW <±10%

1 MHz RES BW <±25%

2 MHz RES BW <+50%, −25%

Selectivity (60 dB/3 dB bandwidth ratio)

RES BW ≥300 Hz <15:1

RES BW ≤100 Hz <5:1

Bandwidth Shape

1 and 2 MHz RES BW Approximately Gaussian

300 Hz to 300 kHz RES BW Synchronously tuned, 4-pole filters

1 Hz to 100 Hz RES BW Digital, approximately Gaussian

* Resolution bandwidths ≤100 Hz are not available in external mixing.

Video Bandwidth

(Post-detection low-pass filter averages displayed noise for a

smooth trace.)*

Range 1 Hz to 3 MHz† in a 1, 3, 10 sequence

Chapter 4 145
8562E/EC Specifications and Characteristics
Frequency Specifications

Sweep

Sweep Time

Range

Span = 0

Non-Option 007 (E-Series)

Analog display 50 μs to <30 ms

Digital display 30 ms to 6,000 s

Option 007 E-Series and all

EC-Series instruments

Digital display 50 μs to 6,000 s

Span ≥ 100 Hz

RES BW ≥300 Hz 50 ms to 2,000 s

RES BW ≤100 Hz 50 ms to 100,000 s (span-dependent)

Accuracy (Span = 0 Hz)

Non-Option 007 E-Series

Sweep time 30 ms to 6,000 s <±1%

Sweep time <30 ms <±10%

Option 007 E-Series and all

EC-Series instruments

Sweep time 30 ms to 6,000 s <±1%

Sweep time <30 ms <±0.1%

Sweep Trigger Delayed, Free Run, Single, Line, External, or Video#

# Video trigger is not available in RES BW settings ≤100 Hz.

146 Chapter 4
8562E/EC Specifications and Characteristics
Frequency Specifications

Delayed Sweep

Trigger Modes Free Run, Line, External, Video*

Range

Span = 0

Non-Option 007 (E-Series) +2 μs to +65.535 ms

Option 007 E-Series and all EC-Series

instruments

Sweep time ≥ 30 ms +2 μs to +65.535 ms

Sweep time < 30 ms −9.9 ms to +65.535 ms††

Span ≥ 100 Hz +2 μs to +65.535 ms

Resolution 1 μs

Accuracy# ±1 μs

* Video trigger is not available in RES BW settings ≤ 100 Hz.

†† Negative delayed sweep (pre-trigger) is also limited to 50 × sweep time.
# In E-Series instruments without Option 007, the delay time will be subject to up to ±0.5 μs of jitter due to
synchronization of the input edge trigger to the internal 1 MHz timebase. In E-series instruments with Option
007 and in EC-instruments using sweeptimes <30 ms, the delay time will experience up to ±83 ns of jitter
due to synchronization of the input edge trigger to the internal 12 MHz timebase.

Chapter 4 147
8562E/EC Specifications and Characteristics
Frequency Specifications

Time-Gated Spectrum Analysis

Gate Delay* Edge Mode Level Mode

Range 3 μs to 65.535 ms ≤0.5 μs

Resolution 1 μs

Accuracy† <±1 μs

* Time from GATE TRIGGER INPUT to positive edge of GATE OUTPUT.

† The gate delay time will experience up to ±0.5 μs of jitter due to synchronization of the input edge trigger to
the internal 1 MHz timebase.

Gate Length*

Range 1 μs to 65.535 ms

Resolution 1 μs

Accuracy <±1 μs

* Time from positive edge to negative edge of GATE OUTPUT.

Marker Frequency Resolution SPAN/600 to a minimum of 1 Hz

Marker Time Resolution Sweep time/600

148 Chapter 4
8562E/EC Specifications and Characteristics
Amplitude Specifications

Amplitude Specifications

Measurement Range

Maximum Safe Input Power

Average Continuous Power +30 dBm (1 W)

(input attenuation ≥10 dB)

Peak Pulse Power +50 dBm (100 W) for pulse widths ≤10 μs and <1% duty cycle.
(input attenuation ≥30 dB)

DC Voltage

AC Coupled <±50 V

DC Coupled <±0.2 V

Gain Compression

10 MHz to 2.9 GHz <1.0 dB

(≤−5 dBm at input mixer‡)

2.9 GHz to 6.46 GHz <1.0 dB

(≤0 dBm at input mixer†)

6.46 GHz to 13.2 GHz

(≤−3 dBm at input mixer)† <1.0 dB

‡ Mixer level = input level − input attenuation.

Chapter 4 149
8562E/EC Specifications and Characteristics
Amplitude Specifications

Displayed Average Noise Level

With no signal at input, 1 Hz video bandwidth, and

0 dB input attenuation, tracking generator off.

Frequency Range 10 Hz RES BW 1 Hz RES BW

(Option 103) (Non-Option 103)

30 Hz <−80 dBm <−90 dBm

1 kHz <−95 dBm <−105 dBm

10 kHz <−110 dBm <−120 dBm

100 kHz <−110 dBm <−120 dBm

1 MHz to 10 MHz <−130 dBm <−140 dBm

10 MHz to 2.9 GHz <−141 dBm <−151 dBm

2.9 GHz to 6.5 GHz <−138 dBm <−148 dBm

6.46 GHz to 13.2 GHz <−135 dBm <−145 dBm

150 Chapter 4
8562E/EC Specifications and Characteristics
Amplitude Specifications

Spurious Responses

All input-related spurious responses, except as noted below. Mixer Level* Distortion

10 MHz to 13.2 GHz −40 dBm <(−75 + 20 log N†) dBc

Second Harmonic Distortion

Applied Signal Frequency Range

1 MHz to 1.45 GHz −40 dBm <−79 dBc

1.45 Hz to 2.0 GHz −10 dBm <−85 dBc

2.0 Hz to 6.6 GHz −10 dBm <−100 dBc

Third Order Intermodulation Distortion

(with two signals at input mixer, spaced ≥1 kHz apart)

Frequency Range

20 MHz to 2.9 GHz −30 dBm each <−82 dBc

2.9 GHz to 6.46 GHz −30 dBm each <−90 dBc

6.46 GHz to 13.2 GHz −30 dBm each <−75 dBc

Image, Multiple Responses, and Out of Range Responses

Frequency Range

10 MHz to 6.5 GHz −10 dBm <−80 dBc

* Mixer Level = input level − input attenuation

†
N = harmonic mixing number

Residual Responses

>200 kHz with no signal at input, 0 dB input attenuation, N† 1 <−90 dBm

†
N harmonic mixing number

Chapter 4 151
8562E/EC Specifications and Characteristics
Amplitude Specifications

Display Range

Amplitude Scale 10 vertical display divisions, with the reference level (0 dB) at the top
graticule line.

Calibration

LOG 10 dB/DIV for 100 dB display from reference level.*

5 dB/DIV for 50 dB display expanded from reference level.†

2 dB/DIV for 20 dB display expanded from reference level.

1 dB/DIV for 10 dB display expanded from reference level.†

LINEAR 10% of reference level per division over the top nine divisions

(all 10 divisions for RES BW ≤100 Hz) when calibrated in voltage.

* 10 dB/DIV for 70 dB display from reference level for RES BW ≤100 Hz when SPAN = 0 Hz.
†
In E-Series instruments without Option 007 these scales are not available for sweep times < 30 ms.

Accuracy

Reference Level Range

LOG, adjustable in 0.1 dB steps −120 dBm to +30 dBm

LINEAR, settable in 1% steps 2.2 μV to 7.07 V

152 Chapter 4
8562E/EC Specifications and Characteristics
Amplitude Specifications

Reference Level Uncertainty

Frequency Response

(with 10 dB input attenuation) Typical

Relative (referenced to midpoint between highest and lowest peak (20 °C to 30 °C)
excursions)

DC Coupled

30 Hz to 2.9 GHz <±1.25 dB <±0.8 dB

100 MHz to 2.3 GHz <±0.9 dB <±0.8 dB

2.9 GHz to 6.46 GHz <±1.5 dB <±1.1 dB

6.46 GHz to 13.2 GHz <±2.2 dB <±1.5 dB

AC Coupled

100 kHz to 2.9 GHz <±1.25 dB <±0.8 dB

2.9 GHz to 6.5 GHz <±2.0 dB <±1.0 dB

6.46 GHz to 13.2 GHz <±2.2 dB <±1.5 dB

Absolute (referenced to 300 MHz CAL OUTPUT)

DC Coupled

30 Hz to 2.9 GHz <±1.80 dB <±1.0 dB

2.9 GHz to 6.46 GHz <±2.5 dB <±1.5 dB

6.46 GHz to 13.2 GHz <±2.9 dB <±2.0 dB

AC Coupled

100 kHz to 2.9 GHz <±1.9 dB <±1.2 dB

2.9 GHz to 6.46 GHz <±3.0 dB <±1.5 dB

6.46 GHz to 13.2 GHz <±3.0 dB <±2.0 dB

Band Switching Uncertainty

(Additional uncertainty added to Relative Frequency Response for measurements <±1.0 dB

between any two bands)

Calibrator Uncertainty

−10 dBm, 300 MHz <±0.3 dB

Chapter 4 153
8562E/EC Specifications and Characteristics
Amplitude Specifications

Input Attenuator Switching Uncertainty

(20 to 70 dB settings, referenced to 10 dB input attenuation)

30 Hz to 2.9 GHz <±0.6 dB/10 dB step, 1.8 dB max.

IF Gain Uncertainty

(0 dBm to −80 dBm reference levels with 10 dB input attenuation) <±1.0 dB

Resolution Bandwidth Switching Uncertainty

(Referenced to 300 kHz resolution bandwidth at the reference level.)* <±0.5 dB

154 Chapter 4
8562E/EC Specifications and Characteristics
Amplitude Specifications

Pulse Digitization Uncertainty

(Pulse response mode, PRF >720/sweep time)

LOG

Resolution Bandwidth ≤ 1 MHz <1.25 dB peak-to-peak

Resolution Bandwidth = 2 MHz <3 dB peak-to-peak

LINEAR

Resolution Bandwidth ≤ 1 MHz <4% of reference level peak-to-peak

Resolution Bandwidth = 2 MHz <12% of reference level peak-to-peak

IF Alignment Uncertainty

(additional uncertainty when using 300 Hz RES BW only) <±0.5 dB

Chapter 4 155
8562E/EC Specifications and Characteristics
Amplitude Specifications

Scale Fidelity*

LOG

Incremental

0 to −90 dB range†

RES BW ≥ 300 Hz <±0.1 dB/dB

RES BW ≤ 100 Hz <±0.2 dB/2 dB

Cumulative

0 to −90 dB range†

RES BW ≥ 300 Hz <±0.1 dB/dB from the reference level to a maximum of ±0.85 dB

RES BW ≤ 100 Hz <±0.2 dB/2 dB from the reference level to a maximum of ±0.85 dB

0 to −100 dB range†

RES BW ≥ 300 Hz ±2.5 dB characteristic

RES BW ≤ 100 Hz maximum of ±1.5 dB

LINEAR <±3% of reference level

* Scale fidelity is not the same for RES BW ≤100 Hz as for RES BW ≥ 300 Hz. Therefore, signals not at the
reference level will experience an additional amplitude difference when switching between these two sets of
RES BW settings due to the differences in scale fidelity.
†
0 to −70 dB range for RES BW ≤100 Hz when SPAN = 0 Hz.

Marker Amplitude Resolution*

(Sweep time ≥ 30 ms)

Scale: LOG 10 dB/DIV (1/6) dB

LOG 5 dB/DIV (1/12) dB

LOG 2 dB/DIV (1/30) dB

LOG 1 dB/DIV (1/60) dB

LINEAR Reference Level/600

* In E-Series instruments markers are not available for sweep times < 30 ms with RES BW ≥ 300 Hz without
Option 007. For Option 007, see the characteristics section.

156 Chapter 4
8562E/EC Specifications and Characteristics
Inputs and Outputs Specifications

Inputs and Outputs Specifications

CAUTION Any electrostatic discharge according to IEC 801-2/1991 to the center pins of any
of the connectors may cause damage to the associated circuitry.

IF INPUT (Deleted on and Option 327)

Connector SMA female, front panel

Input level for full-screen deflections −30 dBm ± 1.5 dB

(external mixing mode, 0 dBm reference level, 30 dB conversion loss)

GPIB

Connector IEEE-488 bus connector

Interface Functions SH1, AH1, T6, TE0, L4, LE0, SR1, RL1, PP1, DC1, DT1, C1, C28

Direct Plotter Output Supports Agilent 7225A, Agilent 7440A, Agilent 7470A, Agilent 7475A,
Agilent 7550A

Direct Printer Output Supports HP 3630A PaintJet, HP 2225A ThinkJet

CAL OUTPUT

Connector BNC female, front panel

Frequency 300 MHz ±(300 MHz × frequency reference accuracy†)

Amplitude −10 dBm ±0.3 dB

† Frequency Reference Accuracy = (aging × period of time since adjustment + initial achievable accuracy +
temperature stability).

1ST LO OUTPUT

Connector SMA female, front panel

Amplitude +16.5 dBm ±2.0 dB

10 MHz REF IN/OUT

Connector BNC female, rear panel

Output Frequency 10 MHz ±(10 MHz × frequency reference accuracy†)

†
Frequency Reference Accuracy = (aging × period of time since adjustment + initial achievable accuracy +
temperature stability).

Chapter 4 157
8562E/EC Specifications and Characteristics
General Specifications

General Specifications
Environmental Specifications

Military Specification per MIL-T-28800, Type III, Class 3, Style B (EC)/Style C (EC), as follows:

Calibration Interval 2 years

Warmup 5 minutes from ambient conditions*

Temperature

Operating −10 °C to +55 °C (E) / 0 °C to +55 °C (EC)

Non-operating −51 °C to +71 °C

Humidity 95% at 40 °C for 5 days

Altitude

Operating 15,000 feet

Non-operating 50,000 feet

Rain resistance Drip-proof at 16 liters/hour/square foot

Vibration

5 to 15 Hz 0.060 inch peak-to-peak excursion

16 to 25 Hz 0.040 inch peak-to-peak excursion

26 to 55 Hz 0.020 inch peak-to-peak excursion

Pulse Shock

Half Sine 30 g for 11 ms duration

Transit Drop 8 inch drop on 6 faces and 8 corners

Power Main Voltage fluctuations within the range specified in the spectrum
analyzer “Power Requirements.”

Power Main Operating environment within the limits of installation category II

according to IEC 1010.

Pollution Operating environment within the limits of pollution degree 2

according to IEC 664.

158 Chapter 4
8562E/EC Specifications and Characteristics
General Specifications

Electromagnetic Compatibility

Conducted and radiated interference is in compliance with CISPR,

Publication 11 (1990).

Military Specification Meets the requirements of MIL-STD-461C, Part 2, with the

exceptions shown below:

Conducted Emissions

CE01 (Narrowband) 1 kHz to 15 kHz only

CE03 (Narrowband) Full limits

CE03 (Broadband) 20 dB relaxation from 15 kHz to 100 kHz

Conducted Susceptibility

CS01 Full Limits

CS02 Full Limits with 40 dB relaxation at IF frequencies. Refer also to

“Radiated Immunity” in Amplitude Characteristics.

CS06 Full Limits

Radiated Emissions

RE01 Test probe at 15 cm, front and rear panel search excluded.

RE02 Full limits to 1 GHz

Radiated Susceptibility

RS03 Limited to 3 V/m from 14 kHz to 1 GHz with 40 dB relaxation at IF

frequencies. Refer also to “Radiated Immunity” in Amplitude
Characteristics.

Chapter 4 159
8562E/EC Specifications and Characteristics
General Specifications

Power Requirements

115 Vac Operation

Voltage 90 V to 140 V rms

Current 3.2 A rms maximum

Frequency 47 Hz to 440 Hz

230 Vac Operation

Voltage 180 V to 250 V rms

Current 1.8 A rms maximum

Frequency 47 Hz to 66 Hz

Maximum Power Dissipation 180 W

Audible Noise <5.0 Bels, 20 °C to 30 °C (ISO DP7779)

Weight 20 kg (44 lb)

160 Chapter 4
8562E/EC Specifications and Characteristics
General Specifications

Dimensions

With Handle and Front Cover: Without Handle and Front Cover:

(A) 202 mm (7-15/16 in) high (B) 187 mm (7-3/8 in) high

(F) 503 mm (19-13/16 in) deep (E) 461 mm (18-1/8 in) deep

Chapter 4 161
8562E/EC Specifications and Characteristics
Frequency Characteristics

Frequency Characteristics
These are not specifications. Characteristics provide useful information about
instrument performance.

Frequency Reference Accuracy

Non-Option 103

Initial Achievable Accuracy <±2.2 × 10−8

(includes gravitational sensitivity, retrace,

and settability)

Daily Aging (average over 7 days after being <±5 × 10−10

powered on for 7 days)

Warmup

(Internal frequency reference selected)

After 5 minutes <±1 × 10−7 of final frequency* (0 °C to +55 °C)

<±1 × 10−6 of final frequency* (−10 °C)

After 15 minutes <±1 × 10−8 of final frequency* (−10 °C to +55 °C)

Option 103

Initial Achievable Accuracy <±1 × 10−6

* Final frequency is defined as frequency 60 minutes after power-on with analyzer set to internal frequency
reference.

Bandwidth Selectivity

RES BW ≤100 Hz <4.5:1

RES BW = 1 MHz <8:1

RES BW = 2 MHz <5.5:1

162 Chapter 4
8562E/EC Specifications and Characteristics
Frequency Characteristics

Impulse Bandwidth

RES BW 2 MHz 2.93 MHz ±10%

RES BW 1 MHz 1.60 MHz ±7%

RES BW 300 kHz 491 kHz ±7%

300 Hz ≤ RES BW ≤ 100 kHz 1.62 × RES BW ± 10%

Stability

Noise Sidebands

For frequencies ≤ 1 GHz, 100 kHz offset from carrier, and frequency span > ≤121 dBc/Hz
2 MHz

Chapter 4 163
8562E/EC Specifications and Characteristics
Frequency Characteristics

Figure 4-1 Noise Sidebands Normalized to 1 Hz BW vs. Offset from Carrier

Figure 4-2 Typical On-Screen Dynamic Range vs. Offset from 1 GHz Center Freq. for all
RBW's

164 Chapter 4
8562E/EC Specifications and Characteristics
Frequency Characteristics

Sweep

Sweep Time Accuracy

Span ≥100 Hz <±15%

Resolution Bandwidth Usability* (Non-Option 103)

RES BW Maximum Usable Frequency

Video Average OFF Video Average ON, 10 Video Averages

Source/Spectrum Analyzer Frequency References

Locked† Independent‡

≥30 Hz >13.2 GHz >13.2 GHz >13.2 GHz

10 Hz >13.2 GHz >13.2 GHz >13.2 GHz

3 Hz >13.2 GHz >13.2 GHz 2 GHz

1 Hz >13.2 GHz >13.2 GHz 200 MHz

Chapter 4 165
8562E/EC Specifications and Characteristics
Amplitude Characteristics

Amplitude Characteristics

Dynamic Range

Figure 4-3 Nominal Dynamic Range

Amplitude Measurement Range

Spurious Responses Frequency Range Distortion

(all input related spurious responses <1 kHz from the 10 MHz to 2.9 GHz <−55 dBc
carrier)

166 Chapter 4
8562E/EC Specifications and Characteristics
Amplitude Characteristics

Amplitude Accuracy

Band-to-Band Frequency Response (dB)

Frequency response uncertainty for measurements between any two internal mixing bands. Equivalent to the
sum of the two Relative Frequency Response values plus Band Switching Uncertainty.

Band 0. 30 Hz to 2.9 GHz

Band 1. 2.9 GHz to 6.46 GHz
Band 2. 6.46 GHz to 13.2 GHz

Band-to-Band Frequency Response, DC-Coupled

(dB peak-to-peak)

Band 0 Band 1 Band 2

Band 0 n/a 3.75 dB 4.45 dB

Band 1 3.75 dB n/a 4.7 dB

Band 2 4.45 dB 4.7 dB n/a

Band-to-Band Frequency Response, AC-Coupled

(dB peak-to-peak)

Band 0 Band 1 Band 2

Band 0 n/a 4.25 dB 4.45 dB

Band 1 4.25 dB n/a 5.2 dB

Band 2 4.45 dB 5.2 dB n/a

Input Attenuator Repeatability <±0.2 dB

Input Attenuator Accuracy

2.9 GHz to 13.2 GHz <±1.5 dB/10 dB step, ±3.0 dB max.

Pulse Digitization Uncertainty

(Pulse response mode, PRF >720/sweep time)

Standard Deviation <0.2 dB

Chapter 4 167
8562E/EC Specifications and Characteristics
Amplitude Characteristics

Marker Amplitude Resolution

(EC-Series instruments and E-Series with Option 007, sweep

time < 30 ms, zero span)

Scale: LOG 10 dB/DIV ≤ (1/2) dB

LOG 5 dB/DIV ≤ (1/4) dB

LOG 2 dB/DIV ≤ (1/10) dB

LOG 1 dB/DIV ≤ (1/20) dB

LINEAR ≤ Reference Level/200

Demodulation

Spectrum Demodulation

Modulation Type AM and FM (5 kHz peak deviation)

Audio Output Internal speaker and phone jack with volume control.

Pause Time at Marker Frequency 100 ms to 60 s

Radiated Immunity

168 Chapter 4
8562E/EC Specifications and Characteristics
Inputs and Outputs Characteristics

Inputs and Outputs Characteristics

CAUTION Any electrostatic discharge according to IEC 801-2/1991 to the center pins of any
of the connectors may cause damage to the associated circuitry.

INPUT 50Ω

Connector Precision Type N female, front panel

Impedance 50 Ω

VSWR (at tuned frequency)

<1.5:1 for ≥10 dB Input Attenuation

<3.0:1 for 0 dB Input Attenuation

LO Emission Level* (average)

10 dB Input Attenuation <−80 dBm

* Level of 1st LO, 3.0 to 6.8 GHz, present at INPUT 50Ω connector.

IF INPUT (Deleted on Option 002 and Option 327)

(2nd IF input for use with external mixers)

Connector SMA female, front panel

Impedance (dc coupled) 50 Ω

Frequency 310.7 MHz

Noise Figure 7 dB

1 dB Gain Compression Level −23 dBm

Full Screen Level −30 dBm

(Gain Compression and Full Screen Levels apply with 30 dB conversion

loss setting and 0 dBm reference level.)

1ST LO OUTPUT

Connector SMA female, front panel

Impedance 50 Ω

Frequency Range 3.0000 GHz to 6.8107 GHz†

†
3.8107 GHz to 6.8107 GHz for analyzers equipped with Option 002.

Chapter 4 169
8562E/EC Specifications and Characteristics
Inputs and Outputs Characteristics

CAL OUTPUT

Connector BNC female, front panel

Impedance 50 Ω

10 MHz REF IN/OUT

Connector BNC female, rear panel

Impedance 50 Ω

Output Amplitude 0 dBm

Input Frequency 10 MHz × (1±2×10−5)

Input Amplitude −2 to +10 dBm

External Reference Phase Noise

Analyzer noise sideband performance will not be degraded if the

external reference phase noise is within the limits given below.

Non-Option 103 <−135 dBc/Hz at 100 Hz offset

Option 103 <−110 dBc/Hz at 100 Hz offset

VIDEO OUTPUT* (Deleted on Option 327)

Connector BNC female, rear panel

Impedance (dc coupled) 50 Ω

Amplitude (RES BW ≥300 Hz) 0 to +1 V full scale

Scaling

RES BW ≥300 Hz linear or log 100 dB/V

RES BW ≤100 Hz 4.8 kHz, auto-ranged level with dc offset

170 Chapter 4
8562E/EC Specifications and Characteristics
Inputs and Outputs Characteristics

LO SWP|FAV OUTPUT and

LO SWP|0.5 V/GHz OUTPUT*

Connector BNC female, rear panel

Impedance (dc coupled) 120 Ω

LO SWP OUTPUT (no load) 0 to + 10 V

0.5 V/GHz OUTPUT

Internal Mixer Mode 0.5 V/GHz of tuned frequency (no load)

External Mixer Mode ([(1.5 V/GHz) × LO frequency)] − 0.2054 V) ±50 mV

0.25 V/GHz OUTPUT† 0.25 V/GHz of tuned frequency (no load)

* This connector is labeled LO SWP|0.5 V/GHz OUTPUT on older spectrum analyzers and
LO SWP|FAV OUTPUT on newer spectrum analyzers.
† The 0.25 V/GHz output is available only in the 8564E and 8565E.

BLKG/GATE OUTPUT

Connector BNC female, rear panel

Impedance 50 Ω

Blanking Mode

Amplitude during sweep Low TTL Level

Amplitude during retrace High TTL Level

Gate Mode

Gate On High TTL level

Gate Off Low TTL level

EXT/GATE TRIG INPUT

Connector BNC female, rear panel

Impedance 10 kΩ

Trigger Level Settable to high TTL, or low TTL, or edge triggered

TTL

PROBE POWER (front panel)

Voltage +15 V dc, −12.6 V dc

Current 150 mA maximum, each

Chapter 4 171
8562E/EC Specifications and Characteristics
Inputs and Outputs Characteristics

EARPHONE

Connector 1/8 inch miniature monophonic jack, rear panel

Power Output 0.2 W into 4 Ω

2ND IF OUT

(Option 001 instruments only)

Connector SMA female, rear panel

Impedance 50 Ω

Frequency 310.7 MHz

Frequency Range 3 dB BW Noise Figure Conversion

Gain

30 Hz to 2.9 GHz >28 MHz 20 dB −8 dB

2.9 GHz to 6.5 GHz >30 MHz 22 dB −12 dB

6.5 GHz to 13.2 GHz >30 MHz 26 dB −16 dB

ALT SWEEP OUT

(Option 005 analyzers only)

Connector BNC female, rear panel

Impedance 100 Ω

172 Chapter 4
8562E/EC Specifications and Characteristics
Regulatory Information

Regulatory Information
The following information applies to the 8562EC spectrum analyzer.

Chapter 4 173
8562E/EC Specifications and Characteristics
Regulatory Information

The following information applies to the 8562E spectrum analyzer.

174 Chapter 4
8562E/EC Specifications and Characteristics
Regulatory Information

Notice for Germany: Noise Declaration

LpA < 70 dB am Arbeitsplatz (operator position) normaler Betrieb (normal
position) nach DIN 45635 T. 19 (per ISO 7779)

CE: European Community

The product design was approved for the European Community.

ISM1-A: Industrial Scientific and Medical Group 1, Class A

The instrument meets the requirements of CISPER 11, Clause 4.

CSA: Canadian Standards Association

The CSA mark is a registered trademark of the Canadian Standards Association.
The product meets the requirements.

IEC: International Electrotechnical Commission

Chapter 4 175
8562E/EC Specifications and Characteristics
Regulatory Information

176 Chapter 4
5 8563E/EC Specifications and
Characteristics

177
8563E/EC Specifications and Characteristics
Specifications and Characteristics

Specifications and Characteristics

The following tables list the spectrum analyzer specifications. Unless stated
otherwise, all specifications describe the analyzer warranted performance under
the following conditions:
• Five-minute warmup for ambient conditions
• Autocoupled controls
• Preselector peaked at the signal of interest
• Digital trace display
• IF ADJ ON
• REF LVL CAL adjusted
• 1ST LO OUTPUT terminated in 50 ohms
• 2ND IF OUTPUT terminated in 50 ohms
• Two-year calibration cycle (See “Calibration Cycle” below.)
• Environmental requirements met
After a 30-minute warmup at a temperature between 20 °C and 30 °C, the
preselector does not have to be peaked at each signal of interest. Factory
preselector-peak values are sufficient to meet all specifications.

Characteristics provide useful information in the form of typical, nominal, or

approximate values for analyzer performance. Tables of the spectrum analyzer
characteristics follow the specifications.

178 Chapter 5
8563E/EC Specifications and Characteristics
Calibration Cycle

Chapter 5 179
8563E/EC Specifications and Characteristics
Frequency Specifications

Frequency Specifications
Frequency Range

Internal Mixing

Non-Option 006 9 kHz to 26.5 GHz

Option 006 30 Hz to 26.5 GHz

Internal Mixing Bands Frequency Range Harmonic Mixing Mode N*

Band 0 Non-Option 006 9 kHz to 2.9 GHz 1−

Band 0 Option 006 30 Hz to 2.9 GHz 1−

Band 1 2.75 GHz to 6.46 GHz 1−

Band 2 5.86 GHz to 13.2 GHz 2−

Band 3 12.4 GHz to 26.5 GHz 4−

External Mixing 18 GHz to 325 GHz

External Mixing Bands

Frequency Band Frequency Range Harmonic Mixing Mode (N*)

Preselected Unpreselected

K 18.0 to 26.5 n/a 6−

A 26.5 to 40.0 8+ 8−

Q 33.0 to 50.0 10+ 10−

U 40.0 to 60.0 10+ 10−

V 50.0 to 75.0 14+ 14−

E 60.0 to 90.0 n/a 16−

W 75.0 to 110.0 18+ 18−

F 90.0 to 140.0 n/a 24−

D 110.0 to 170.0 n/a 30−

G 140.0 to 220.0 n/a 36−

Y 170.0 to 260.0 n/a 44−

J 220.0 to 325.0 n/a 54−

180 Chapter 5
8563E/EC Specifications and Characteristics
Frequency Specifications

Frequency Readout Accuracy

Accuracy of START, CENTER,

STOP or MARKER frequency

SPAN > 2 MHz × N* <±(frequency readout × frequency reference accuracy† + 5% of

frequency span + 15% of resolution bandwidth + 10 Hz)

SPAN ≤ 2 MHz × N* <±(frequency readout × frequency reference accuracy† + 1% of

frequency span + 15% of resolution bandwidth + 10 Hz)

* N is the harmonic mixing mode.

†
frequency reference accuracy = (aging × period of time since adjustment) + initial achievable accuracy +
temperature stability.

Frequency Count Marker

Frequency Count Marker Resolution Selectable from 1 Hz to 1 MHz

Frequency Count Marker Accuracy <±(marker frequency × frequency reference accuracy‡ +

(for signal-to-noise ratio ≥25 dB)
2 Hz × N† + 1 LSD)

Delta Frequency Count Accuracy <±(delta frequency × frequency reference accuracy‡ +

(for signal-to-noise ratio ≥25 dB)
4 Hz × N† + 2 LSD)

† N is the harmonic mixing mode.

‡ Frequency Reference Accuracy = (aging × period of time since adjustment + initial achievable accuracy +
temperature stability).

Chapter 5 181
8563E/EC Specifications and Characteristics
Frequency Specifications

Frequency Reference Accuracy

Non-Option 103

Aging <±0.5 × 10−9/day (after 7 day warmup)

<±1 × 10−7/year

Temperature Stability <±1 × 10−8, −10 °C to +55 °C, referenced to 25 °C

Option 103

Aging <±2 × 10−6/year

Settability <±1 × 10−6

Temperature Stability <±1 × 10−6, −10 °C to +55 °C, referenced to 25 °C

182 Chapter 5
8563E/EC Specifications and Characteristics
Frequency Specifications

Stability

Residual FM

(zero span, 10 Hz RES BW)

Non-Option 103 < 1.0 Hz × N* peak-to-peak in 20 ms†

Option 103 < 10 Hz × N* peak-to-peak in 20 ms

Noise Sidebands

For Frequencies ≤1 GHz

(Refer to the characteristics section for

frequencies > 2.9 GHz)

Offset Non-Option 103 Option 103

100 Hz

serial number prefix <3436A <−80 dBc/Hz‡ <−70 dBc/Hz‡

serial number prefix ≥3436A <−88 dBc/Hz‡ <−70 dBc/Hz‡

1 kHz <−97 dBc/Hz‡ <−90 dBc/Hz‡

10 kHz†† <−113 dBc/Hz§ <−113 dBc/Hz§

30 kHz†† <−113 dBc/Hz# <−113 dBc/Hz#

100 kHz‡‡

serial number prefix <3436A <−113 dBc/Hz§ <−113 dBc/Hz§

serial number prefix ≥3436A <−117 dBc/Hz <−117 dBc/Hz

* N is the harmonic mixing mode.

**Add 2.0 dB for frequencies > 1 GHz and ≤ 2.9 GHz

††
For resolution bandwidth ≤ 1 kHz or frequency span ≤ 745 kHz.
‡‡
For resolution bandwidth ≥ 3 kHz or frequency span > 745 kHz.

Chapter 5 183
8563E/EC Specifications and Characteristics
Frequency Specifications

Frequency Span

Range

Internal Mixing 0 Hz, 100 Hz to 13.2 GHz over the 10-division display horizontal axis,
variable in approximately 1% increments, or in a 1, 2, 5 sequence.

External Mixing† Minimum span = 100 Hz × N*

Accuracy

SPAN > 2 MHz × N* <±5%

SPAN ≤ 2 MHz × N* <±1%

* N is the harmonic mixing mode.

† Resolution bandwidths ≤100 Hz are not available in external mixing. External mixing is not available for
Option 002 or Option 327.

184 Chapter 5
8563E/EC Specifications and Characteristics
Frequency Specifications

Resolution Bandwidths (−3 dB)

Range*

Non-Option 103 1 Hz to 1 MHz (selectable in a 1, 3, 10 sequence) and 2 MHz

(3 MHz at −6 dB)

Option 103 10 Hz to 1 MHz (selectable in a 1, 3, 10 sequence) and 2 MHz

(3 MHz at −6 dB)

Accuracy

1 Hz to 300 kHz RES BW <±10%

1 MHz RES BW <±25%

2 MHz RES BW <+50%, −25%

Selectivity (60 dB/3 dB bandwidth ratio)

RES BW ≥300 Hz <15:1

RES BW ≤100 Hz <5:1

Bandwidth Shape

1 and 2 MHz RES BW Approximately Gaussian

300 Hz to 300 kHz RES BW Synchronously tuned, 4-pole filters

1 Hz to 100 Hz RES BW Digital, approximately Gaussian

* Resolution bandwidths ≤100 Hz are not available in external mixing.

Video Bandwidth

(Post-detection low-pass filter averages displayed noise for a

smooth trace.)*

Range 1 Hz to 3 MHz† in a 1, 3, 10 sequence

Chapter 5 185
8563E/EC Specifications and Characteristics
Frequency Specifications

Sweep

Sweep Time

Range

Span = 0

Non-Option 007 (E-Series)

Analog display 50 μs to <30 ms

Digital display 30 ms to 6,000 s

Option 007 E-Series and all

EC-Series instruments

Digital display 50 μs to 6,000 s

Span ≥ 100 Hz

RES BW ≥300 Hz 50 ms to 2,000 s

RES BW ≤100 Hz 50 ms to 100,000 s (span-dependent)

Accuracy (Span = 0 Hz)

Non-Option 007 (E-Series)

Sweep time 30 ms to 6,000 s <±1%

Sweep time <30 ms <±10%

Option 007 (E-Series) and all

EC-Series instruments

Sweep time 30 ms to 6,000 s <±1%

Sweep time <30 ms <±0.1%

Sweep Trigger Delayed, Free Run, Single, Line, External, or Video#

# Video trigger is not available in RES BW settings ≤100 Hz.

186 Chapter 5
8563E/EC Specifications and Characteristics
Frequency Specifications

Delayed Sweep

Trigger Modes Free Run, Line, External, Video*

Range

Span = 0

Non-Option 007 (E-Series) +2 μs to +65.535 ms

Option 007 E-Series and all EC-Series

instruments

Sweep time ≥ 30 ms +2 μs to +65.535 ms

Sweep time < 30 ms −9.9 ms to +65.535 ms††

Span ≥ 100 Hz +2 μs to +65.535 ms

Resolution 1 μs

Accuracy#

Serial prefix 3310A and above ±1 μs

Serial prefix <3310A

20 °C to 30 °C ±(1 μs + (0.05% × DELAY SWEEP setting)

−10 °C to +55 °C ±(1 μs + (0.12% × DELAY SWEEP setting)

* Video trigger is not available in RES BW settings ≤ 100 Hz.

Chapter 5 187
8563E/EC Specifications and Characteristics
Frequency Specifications

Time-Gated Spectrum Analysis

Gate Delay* Edge Mode Level Mode

Range 3 μs to 65.535 ms ≤0.5 μs

Resolution 1 μs

Accuracy†

Serial prefix 3310A and above <±1 μs

Serial prefix <3310A

20 °C to 30 °C ± (1 μs + (0.05% × GATE DELAY setting)

−10 °C to 55 °C ± (1 μs + (0.12% × GATE DELAY setting)

* Time from GATE TRIGGER INPUT to positive edge of GATE OUTPUT.

†
The gate delay time will experience up to ±0.5 μs of jitter due to synchronization of the input edge trigger to
the internal 1 MHz timebase.

Gate Length*

Range 1 μs to 65.535 ms

Resolution 1 μs

Accuracy

Serial prefix 3310A and above <±1 μs

Serial prefix <3310A

20 °C to 30 °C ± (0.2 μs + (0.05% × GATE LENGTH setting)

−10 °C to 55 °C ± (0.2 μs + (0.12% × GATE LENGTH setting)

* Time from positive edge to negative edge of GATE OUTPUT.

Marker Frequency Resolution SPAN/600 to a minimum of 1 Hz

Marker Time Resolution Sweep time/600

188 Chapter 5
8563E/EC Specifications and Characteristics
Amplitude Specifications

Amplitude Specifications

Measurement Range

Maximum Safe Input Power

Average Continuous Power +30 dBm (1 W)

(input attenuation ≥10 dB)

Peak Pulse Power +50 dBm (100 W) for pulse widths ≤10 μs and <1% duty cycle.
(input attenuation ≥30 dB)

DC Voltage <±0.2 V

Gain Compression

10 MHz to 2.9 GHz <1.0 dB

(≤−5 dBm at input mixer‡)

2.9 GHz to 6.46 GHz <1.0 dB

(≤0 dBm at input mixer†)

6.46 GHz to 26.5 GHz

(≤−3 dBm at input mixer)† <1.0 dB

‡
Mixer level = input level − input attenuation.

Chapter 5 189
8563E/EC Specifications and Characteristics
Amplitude Specifications

Displayed Average Noise Level

With no signal at input, 1 Hz video bandwidth, and

0 dB input attenuation, tracking generator off.

Frequency Range 10 Hz RES BW 1 Hz RES BW

(Option 103) (Non-Option 103)

30 Hz (Option 006) <−80 dBm <−90 dBm

1 kHz (Option 006) <−95 dBm <−105 dBm

10 kHz <−110 dBm <−120 dBm

100 kHz <−110 dBm <−120 dBm

1 MHz to 10 MHz <−130 dBm <−140 dBm

10 MHz to 2.9 GHz

serial number prefix <3246A <−135 dBm <−145 dBm

serial number prefix 3246A to <3645A <−134 dBm <−144 dBm

serial number prefix ≥3645A <−139 dBm <−149 dBm

Option H13 <−139 dBm <−149 dBm

2.9 GHz to 6.46 GHz <−138 dBm <−148 dBm

6.46 GHz to 13.2 GHz <−135 dBm <−145 dBm

13.2 GHz to 22.0 GHz <−130 dBm <−140 dBm

22.0 GHz to 26.5 GHz <−129 dBm <−139 dBm

190 Chapter 5
8563E/EC Specifications and Characteristics
Amplitude Specifications

Spurious Responses

All input-related spurious responses, except as noted below. Mixer Level* Distortion

10 MHz to 26.5 GHz −40 dBm <(−75 + 20 log N†) dBc

Second Harmonic Distortion

Applied Signal Frequency Range

1 MHz to 1.45 GHz (serial number prefix <3645A) −40 dBm <−72 dBc

20 MHz to 1.45 GHz (serial number prefix ≥3645A) −40 dBm <−79 dBc

20 MHz to 1.45 GHz (Option H13) −40 dBm <−79 dBc

1.45 GHz to 2.0 GHz −10 dBm <−85 dBc

2.0 GHz to 13.25 GHz −10 dBm <−100 dBc

Third Order Intermodulation Distortion

(with two signals at the input mixer, spaced by ≥1 kHz)*

Frequency Range

1 MHz to 2.9 GHz (serial number prefix <3645A) −30 dBm each <−78 dBc

20 MHz to 2.9 GHz (serial number prefix ≥3645A) −30 dBm each <−82 dBc

20 MHz to 2.9 GHz (Option H13) −30 dBm each <−82 dBc

2.9 GHz to 6.46 GHz −30 dBm each <−90 dBc

6.46 GHz to 26.5 GHz −30 dBm each <−75 dBc

Image, Multiple, and Out-of-Band Responses

Frequency Range

10 MHz to 26.5 GHz −10 dBm <−80 dBc

* Mixer level = input level − input attenuation.

† N = harmonic mixing number

Residual Responses

>200 kHz with no signal at input, 0 dB input attenuation, N† 1 <−90 dBm

† N harmonic mixing number

Chapter 5 191
8563E/EC Specifications and Characteristics
Amplitude Specifications

Display Range

Amplitude Scale 10 vertical display divisions, with the reference level (0 dB) at the top
graticule line.

Calibration

LOG 10 dB/DIV for 100 dB display from reference level.*

5 dB/DIV for 50 dB display expanded from reference level.†

2 dB/DIV for 20 dB display expanded from reference level.

1 dB/DIV for 10 dB display expanded from reference level.†

LINEAR 10% of reference level per division over the top nine divisions

(all 10 divisions for RES BW ≤100 Hz) when calibrated in voltage.

* 10 dB/DIV for 70 dB display from reference level for RES BW ≤100 Hz when SPAN = 0 Hz.
†
In E-Series instruments these scales are not available for sweep times < 30 ms without Option 007.

Accuracy

Reference Level Range

LOG, adjustable in 0.1 dB steps

Frequency Band Range

30 Hz to 26.5 GHz (Option 006) −120 dBm to +30 dBm

9 kHz to 26.5 GHz (Non-Option 006) −120 dBm to +30 dBm

LINEAR, settable in 1% steps

30 Hz to 26.5 GHz (Option 006) 2.2 μV to 7.07 V

9 kHz to 26.5 GHz (Non-Option 006) 2.2 μV to 7.07 V

192 Chapter 5
8563E/EC Specifications and Characteristics
Amplitude Specifications

Reference Level Uncertainty

Frequency Response

(with 10 dB input attenuation) Typical

Relative (referenced to midpoint between highest and lowest peak (20 °C to 30 °C)
excursions)

30 Hz to 2.9 GHz (Option 006) <±1.25 dB <±0.8 dB

9 kHz to 2.9 GHz (Non-option 006) <±1.25 dB <±0.8 dB

100 MHz to 2.0 GHz (serial number prefix ≥3645A <±1.0 dB <±0.8 dB

2.9 GHz to 6.46 GHz <±1.5 dB <±1.0 dB

6.46 GHz to 13.2 GHz <±2.2 dB <±1.5 dB

13.2 kHz to 22.0 GHz <±2.5 dB <±1.5 dB

22.0 GHz to 26.5 GHz <±3.3 dB <±2.2 dB

Absolute (referenced to 300 MHz CAL OUTPUT)

30 Hz to 2.9 GHz (Option 006) <±1.80 dB <±1.0 dB

9 kHz to 2.9 GHz (Non-option 006) <±1.80 dB <±1.0 dB

2.9 GHz to 6.46 GHz <±2.4 dB <±1.5 dB

6.46 GHz to 13.2 GHz <±2.9 dB <±2.0 dB

13.2 GHz to 26.5 GHz <±4.0 dB <±2.5 dB

30 Hz to 26.5 GHz (Option 006) <±4.0 dB <±2.5 dB

9 kHz to 26.5 GHz (Non-option 006) <±4.0 dB <±2.5 dB

Band Switching Uncertainty

(Additional uncertainty added to Relative Frequency Response for measurements <±1.0 dB

between any two bands)

Calibrator Uncertainty

−10 dBm, 300 MHz <±0.3 dB

Chapter 5 193
8563E/EC Specifications and Characteristics
Amplitude Specifications

Input Attenuator Switching Uncertainty

(20 to 70 dB settings, referenced to 10 dB attenuation)

Frequency Range

9 kHz to 2.9 GHz <±0.6 dB/10 dB step, ±1.8 dB max.

30 Hz to 2.9 GHz (Option 006) <±0.6 dB/10 dB step, ±1.8 dB max.

IF Gain Uncertainty

(0 dBm to −80 dBm reference levels with 10 dB input attenuation) <±1.0 dB

Resolution Bandwidth Switching Uncertainty

(Referenced to 300 kHz resolution bandwidth at the reference level.)* <±0.5 dB

194 Chapter 5
8563E/EC Specifications and Characteristics
Amplitude Specifications

Pulse Digitization Uncertainty

(Pulse response mode, PRF >720/sweep time)

LOG

Resolution Bandwidth ≤ 1 MHz <1.25 dB peak-to-peak

Resolution Bandwidth = 2 MHz <3 dB peak-to-peak

LINEAR

Resolution Bandwidth ≤ 1 MHz <4% of reference level peak-to-peak

Resolution Bandwidth = 2 MHz <12% of reference level peak-to-peak

IF Alignment Uncertainty

(additional uncertainty when using 300 Hz RES BW only) <±0.5 dB

Chapter 5 195
8563E/EC Specifications and Characteristics
Amplitude Specifications

Scale Fidelity*

LOG

Incremental

0 to −90 dB range†

RES BW ≥ 300 Hz <±0.1 dB/dB

RES BW ≤ 100 Hz <±0.2 dB/2 dB

Cumulative

0 to −90 dB range†

RES BW ≥ 300 Hz <±0.1 dB/dB from the reference level to a maximum of ±0.85 dB

RES BW ≤ 100 Hz <±0.2 dB/2 dB from the reference level to a maximum of ±0.85 dB

0 to −100 dB range†

RES BW ≥ 300 Hz ±2.5 dB characteristic

RES BW ≤ 100 Hz maximum of ±1.5 dB

LINEAR <±3% of reference level

* Scale fidelity is not the same for RES BW ≤100 Hz as for RES BW ≥ 300 Hz. Therefore, signals not at the
reference level will experience an additional amplitude difference when switching between these two sets of
RES BW settings due to the differences in scale fidelity.
†
0 to −70 dB range for RES BW ≤100 Hz when SPAN = 0 Hz.

Marker Amplitude Resolution*

(Sweep time ≥ 30 ms)

Scale: LOG 10 dB/DIV (1/6) dB

LOG 5 dB/DIV (1/12) dB

LOG 2 dB/DIV (1/30) dB

LOG 1 dB/DIV (1/60) dB

LINEAR Reference Level/600

* In E-Series instruments markers are not available for sweep times < 30 ms with RES BW ≥ 300 Hz without
Option 007. For Option 007, see the characteristics section.

196 Chapter 5
8563E/EC Specifications and Characteristics
Inputs and Outputs Specifications

Inputs and Outputs Specifications

CAUTION Any electrostatic discharge according to IEC 801-2/1991 to the center pins of any
of the connectors may cause damage to the associated circuitry.

IF INPUT

Connector SMA female, front panel

Input level for full-screen deflections −30 dBm ± 1.5 dB

(external mixing mode, 0 dBm reference level, 30 dB conversion loss)

GPIB

Connector IEEE-488 bus connector

Interface Functions SH1, AH1, T6, TE0, L4, LE0, SR1, RL1, PP1, DC1, DT1, C1, C28

Direct Plotter Output Supports HP/Agilent 7225A, HP/Agilent 7440A, HP/Agilent 7470A,
HP/Agilent 7475A, HP/Agilent 7550A

Direct Printer Output Supports HP 3630A PaintJet, HP 2225A ThinkJet

CAL OUTPUT

Connector BNC female, front panel

Frequency 300 MHz ±(300 MHz × frequency reference accuracy†)

Amplitude −10 dBm ±0.3 dB

† Frequency Reference Accuracy = (aging × period of time since adjustment + initial achievable accuracy +
temperature stability).

1ST LO OUTPUT

Connector SMA female, front panel

Amplitude +16.5 dBm ±2.0 dB

10 MHz REF IN/OUT

Connector BNC female, rear panel

Output Frequency 10 MHz ±(10 MHz × frequency reference accuracy†)

†
Frequency Reference Accuracy = (aging × period of time since adjustment + initial achievable accuracy +
temperature stability).

Chapter 5 197
8563E/EC Specifications and Characteristics
General Specifications

General Specifications
Environmental Specifications

Military Specification per MIL-T-28800, Type III, Class 3, Style B (EC)/ Style C (E), as follows:

Calibration Interval 2 years

Warmup 5 minutes from ambient conditions*

Temperature

Operating −10 °C to +55 °C (E) / 0 °C to +55 °C (EC)

Non-operating −51 °C to +71 °C

Humidity 95% at 40 °C for 5 days

Altitude

Operating 15,000 feet

Non-operating 50,000 feet

Rain resistance Drip-proof at 16 liters/hour/square foot

Vibration

5 to 15 Hz 0.060 inch peak-to-peak excursion

16 to 25 Hz 0.040 inch peak-to-peak excursion

26 to 55 Hz 0.020 inch peak-to-peak excursion

Pulse Shock

Half Sine 30 g for 11 ms duration

Transit Drop 8 inch drop on 6 faces and 8 corners

Power Main Voltage fluctuations within the range specified in the spectrum
analyzer “Power Requirements.”

Power Main Operating environment within the limits of installation category II

according to IEC 1010.

Pollution Operating environment within the limits of pollution degree 2

according to IEC 664.

198 Chapter 5
8563E/EC Specifications and Characteristics
General Specifications

Electromagnetic Compatibility

Conducted and radiated interference is in compliance with CISPR,

Publication 11 (1990).

Military Specification Meets the requirements of MIL-STD-461C, Part 2, with the

exceptions shown below:

Conducted Emissions

CE01 (Narrowband) 1 kHz to 15 kHz only

CE03 (Narrowband) Full limits

CE03 (Broadband) 20 dB relaxation from 15 kHz to 100 kHz

Conducted Susceptibility

CS01 Full Limits

CS02 Full Limits with 40 dB relaxation at IF frequencies. Refer also to

“Radiated Immunity” in Amplitude Characteristics.

CS06 Full Limits

Radiated Emissions

RE01 Test probe at 15 cm, front and rear panel search excluded.

RE02 Full limits to 1 GHz

Radiated Susceptibility

RS03 Limited to 3 V/m from 14 kHz to 1 GHz with 40 dB relaxation at IF

frequencies. Refer also to “Radiated Immunity” in Amplitude
Characteristics.

Chapter 5 199
8563E/EC Specifications and Characteristics
General Specifications

Power Requirements

115 Vac Operation

Voltage 90 V to 140 V rms

Current 3.2 A rms maximum

Frequency 47 Hz to 440 Hz

230 Vac Operation

Voltage 180 V to 250 V rms

Current 1.8 A rms maximum

Frequency 47 Hz to 66 Hz

Maximum Power Dissipation 180 W

Audible Noise <5.0 Bels, 20 °C to 30 °C (ISO DP7779)

Weight 20 kg (44 lb)

200 Chapter 5
8563E/EC Specifications and Characteristics
General Specifications

Dimensions

With Handle and Front Cover: Without Handle and Front Cover:

(A) 202 mm (7-15/16 in) high (B) 187 mm (7-3/8 in) high

(F) 503 mm (19-13/16 in) deep (E) 461 mm (18-1/8 in) deep

Chapter 5 201
8563E/EC Specifications and Characteristics
Frequency Characteristics

Frequency Characteristics
These are not specifications. Characteristics provide useful information about
instrument performance.

Frequency Reference Accuracy

Non-Option 103

Initial Achievable Accuracy <±2.2 × 10−8

(includes gravitational sensitivity, retrace,

and settability)

Daily Aging (average over 7 days after being <±5 × 10−10

powered on for 7 days)

Warmup

(Internal frequency reference selected)

After 5 minutes <±1 × 10−7 of final frequency* (0 °C to +55 °C)

<±1 × 10−6 of final frequency* (−10 °C)

After 15 minutes <±1 × 10−8 of final frequency* (−10 °C to +55 °C)

Option 103

Initial Achievable Accuracy <±1 × 10−6

* Final frequency is defined as frequency 60 minutes after power-on with analyzer set to internal frequency
reference.

Bandwidth Selectivity

RES BW ≤100 Hz <4.5:1

RES BW = 1 MHz <8:1

RES BW = 2 MHz <5.5:1

202 Chapter 5
8563E/EC Specifications and Characteristics
Frequency Characteristics

Impulse Bandwidth

RES BW 2 MHz 2.93 MHz ±10%

RES BW 1 MHz 1.60 MHz ±7%

RES BW 300 kHz 491 kHz ±7%

300 Hz ≤ RES BW ≤ 100 kHz 1.62 × RES BW ± 10%

Stability

Noise Sidebands

For frequencies ≤ 1 GHz, 100 kHz offset from carrier, and frequency span > ≤121 dBc/Hz
2 MHz

Chapter 5 203
8563E/EC Specifications and Characteristics
Frequency Characteristics

Figure 5-1 Noise Sidebands Normalized to 1 Hz BW versus Offset from Carrier

Figure 5-2 Typical On-Screen Dynamic Range vs. Offset from 1 GHz Center Freq. for all
RBW's

204 Chapter 5
8563E/EC Specifications and Characteristics
Frequency Characteristics

Sweep

Sweep Time Accuracy

Span ≥100 Hz <±15%

Resolution Bandwidth Usability* (Non-Option 103)

RES BW Maximum Usable Frequency

Video Average OFF Video Average ON, 10 Video Averages

Source/Spectrum Analyzer Frequency References

Locked† Independent‡

≥30 Hz >26.5 GHz >26.5 GHz >26.5 GHz

10 Hz >26.5 GHz >26.5 GHz >26.5 GHz

3 Hz >26.5 GHz >26.5 GHz 2 GHz

1 Hz >26.5 GHz >26.5 GHz 200 MHz

Chapter 5 205
8563E/EC Specifications and Characteristics
Amplitude Characteristics

Amplitude Characteristics

Dynamic Range

Figure 5-3 Nominal Dynamic Range

Amplitude Measurement Range

Spurious Responses Frequency Range Distortion

(all input related spurious responses <1 kHz from the 10 MHz to 2.9 GHz <−55 dBc
carrier)

206 Chapter 5
8563E/EC Specifications and Characteristics
Amplitude Characteristics

Amplitude Accuracy

Band-to-Band Frequency Band-to-Band Frequency Response (dB)

Response

Frequency response uncertainty Band 0 Band 1 Band 2 Band 3A Band 3B

for measurements between any
two internal mixing bands. Band 0 n/a 3.75 dB 4.45 dB 4.75 dB 5.55 dB
Equivalent to the sum of the two Band 1 3.75 dB n/a 4.7 dB 5.0 dB 5.8 dB
Relative Frequency Response
values plus Band Switching Band 2 4.45 dB 4.7 dB n/a 5.7 dB 6.5 dB
Uncertainty.
Band 3A 4.75 dB 5.0 dB 5.7 dB n/a 6.8 dB

Band 3B 5.55 dB 5.8 dB 6.5 dB 6.8 dB n/a

Band 0 30 Hz to 2.9
GHz
Band 1 2.9 GHz to
6.46 GHz
Band 2 6.46 GHz to
13.2 GHz
Band 3A 13.2 GHz to
22 GHz
Band 3B 22 GHz to
26.5 GHz

Input Attenuator Repeatability <±0.2 dB

Input Attenuator Accuracy

2.9 GHz to 18 GHz <±1.5 dB/10 dB step, ±3.0 dB max.

18 GHz to 26.5 GHz <±3.0 dB/10 dB step, ±6.0 dB max.

Pulse Digitization Uncertainty

(Pulse response mode, PRF >720/sweep time)

Standard Deviation <0.2 dB

Chapter 5 207
8563E/EC Specifications and Characteristics
Amplitude Characteristics

Marker Amplitude Resolution

EC-Series and E-Series with Option 007,

sweep time < 30 ms, zero span

Scale: LOG 10 dB/DIV ≤ (1/2) dB

LOG 5 dB/DIV ≤ (1/4) dB

LOG 2 dB/DIV ≤ (1/10) dB

LOG 1 dB/DIV ≤ (1/20) dB

LINEAR ≤ Reference Level/200

Demodulation

Spectrum Demodulation

Modulation Type AM and FM (5 kHz peak deviation)

Audio Output Internal speaker and phone jack with volume control.

Pause Time at Marker Frequency 100 ms to 60 s

Radiated Immunity

208 Chapter 5
8563E/EC Specifications and Characteristics
Inputs and Outputs Characteristics

Inputs and Outputs Characteristics

CAUTION Any electrostatic discharge according to IEC 801-2/1991 to the center pins of any
of the connectors may cause damage to the associated circuitry.

INPUT 50Ω

Connector Precision Type N female, front panel

Impedance 50 Ω

VSWR (at tuned frequency)

<1.5:1 for <2.9 GHz and ≥10 dB Input Attenuation

<2.3:1 for <2.9 GHz and ≥10 dB Input Attenuation

<3.0:1 for 0 dB Input Attenuation

LO Emission Level* (average)

10 dB Input Attenuation <−80 dBm

* Level of 1st LO, 3.0 to 6.8 GHz, present at INPUT 50Ω connector.

IF INPUT (Deleted on Option 002 and Option 327)

(2nd IF input for use with external mixers)

Connector SMA female, front panel

Impedance (dc coupled) 50 Ω

Frequency 310.7 MHz

Noise Figure 7 dB

1 dB Gain Compression Level −23 dBm

Full Screen Level −30 dBm

(Gain Compression and Full Screen Levels apply with 30 dB conversion

loss setting and 0 dBm reference level.)

1ST LO OUTPUT

Connector SMA female, front panel

Impedance 50 Ω

Frequency Range 3.0000 GHz to 6.8107 GHz†

†
3.8107 GHz to 6.8107 GHz for analyzers equipped with Option 002.

Chapter 5 209
8563E/EC Specifications and Characteristics
Inputs and Outputs Characteristics

CAL OUTPUT

Connector BNC female, front panel

Impedance 50 Ω

10 MHz REF IN/OUT

Connector BNC female, rear panel

Impedance 50 Ω

Output Amplitude 0 dBm

Input Frequency 10 MHz × (1±2×10−5)

Input Amplitude −2 to +10 dBm

External Reference Phase Noise

Analyzer noise sideband performance will not be degraded if the

external reference phase noise is within the limits given below.

Non-Option 103 <−135 dBc/Hz at 100 Hz offset

Option 103 <−110 dBc/Hz at 100 Hz offset

VIDEO OUTPUT*

Connector BNC female, rear panel

Impedance (dc coupled) 50 Ω

Amplitude (RES BW ≥300 Hz) 0 to +1 V full scale

Scaling

RES BW ≥300 Hz linear or log 100 dB/V

RES BW ≤100 Hz 4.8 kHz, auto-ranged level with dc offset

210 Chapter 5
8563E/EC Specifications and Characteristics
Inputs and Outputs Characteristics

LO SWP|FAV OUTPUT and

LO SWP|0.5 V/GHz OUTPUT*

Connector BNC female, rear panel

Impedance (dc coupled) 120 Ω

LO SWP OUTPUT (no load) 0 to + 10 V

0.5 V/GHz OUTPUT

Internal Mixer Mode 0.5 V/GHz of tuned frequency (no load)

External Mixer Mode ([(1.5 V/GHz) × LO frequency)] − 0.2054 V) ±50 mV

0.25 V/GHz OUTPUT† 0.25 V/GHz of tuned frequency (no load)

* This connector is labeled LO SWP|0.5 V/GHz OUTPUT on older spectrum analyzers and
LO SWP|FAV OUTPUT on newer spectrum analyzers.
† The 0.25 V/GHz output is available only in the Agilent 8564E and Agilent 8565E.

BLKG/GATE OUTPUT

Connector BNC female, rear panel

Impedance 50 Ω

Blanking Mode

Amplitude during sweep Low TTL Level

Amplitude during retrace High TTL Level

Gate Mode

Gate On High TTL level

Gate Off Low TTL level

EXT/GATE TRIG INPUT

Connector BNC female, rear panel

Impedance 10 kΩ

Trigger Level Settable to high TTL, or low TTL, or edge triggered

TTL

PROBE POWER (front panel)

Voltage +15 V dc, −12.6 V dc

Current 150 mA maximum, each

Chapter 5 211
8563E/EC Specifications and Characteristics
Inputs and Outputs Characteristics

EARPHONE

Connector 1/8 inch miniature monophonic jack, rear panel

Power Output 0.2 W into 4 Ω

2ND IF OUT

(Option 001 instruments only)

Connector SMA female, rear panel

Impedance 50 Ω

Frequency 310.7 MHz

Frequency Range 3 dB BW Noise Figure Conversion

Gain

10 kHz to 2.9 GHz

serial number prefix <3645A >28 MHz 25 dB −15 dB

serial number prefix ≥3645A >28 MHz 20 dB − 8 dB

2.9 GHz to 6.5 GHz >30 MHz 22 dB −3 dB

6.5 GHz to 13.2 GHz >30 MHz 26 dB −7 dB

13.2 GHz to 22 GHz >30 MHz 30 dB −11 dB

22 GHz to 26.5 GHz >30 MHz 32 dB −13 dB

ALT SWEEP OUT

(Option 005 analyzers only)

Connector BNC female, rear panel

Impedance 100 Ω

212 Chapter 5
8563E/EC Specifications and Characteristics
Regulatory Information

Regulatory Information
The following information applies to the Agilent 8563EC spectrum analyzer.

Chapter 5 213
8563E/EC Specifications and Characteristics
Regulatory Information

The following information applies to the 8563E spectrum analyzer.

214 Chapter 5
8563E/EC Specifications and Characteristics
Regulatory Information

Notice for Germany: Noise Declaration

LpA < 70 dB am Arbeitsplatz (operator position) normaler Betrieb (normal
position) nach DIN 45635 T. 19 (per ISO 7779)

CE: European Community

The product design was approved for the European Community.

ISM1-A: Industrial Scientific and Medical Group 1, Class A

The instrument meets the requirements of CISPER 11, Clause 4.

CSA: Canadian Standards Association

The CSA mark is a registered trademark of the Canadian Standards Association.
The product meets the requirements.

IEC: International Electrotechnical Commission

Chapter 5 215
8563E/EC Specifications and Characteristics
Regulatory Information

216 Chapter 5
6 8564E/EC Specifications and
Characteristics

217
8564E/EC Specifications and Characteristics
Specifications and Characteristics

Specifications and Characteristics

The following tables list the spectrum analyzer specifications.
Unless stated otherwise, all specifications describe the analyzer warranted
performance under the following conditions:
• Five-minute warmup for ambient conditions
• Autocoupled controls
• Preselector peaked at the signal of interest
• Digital trace display
• IF ADJ ON
• REF LVL CAL adjusted
• 1ST LO OUTPUT terminated in 50 ohms
• 2ND IF OUTPUT terminated in 50 ohms
• One-year calibration cycle (See “Calibration Cycle” below.)
• Environmental requirements met
After a 30-minute warmup at a temperature between 20 °C and 30 °C, the
preselector does not have to be peaked at each signal of interest. Factory
preselector-peak values are sufficient to meet all specifications.

Characteristics provide useful information in the form of typical, nominal, or

approximate values for analyzer performance. Tables of the spectrum analyzer
characteristics follow the specifications.

218 Chapter 6
8564E/EC Specifications and Characteristics
Calibration Cycle

Calibration Cycle
The performance tests located in Chapter 2 should be used once every year to
check the analyzer against the specifications listed in this chapter.
The frequency reference needs to be adjusted as well as checked at the same time.
Refer to the 10 MHz Frequency Reference Adjustment in the Agilent Technologies
8564E/EC and Agilent Technologies 8565E/EC Spectrum Analyzers Service
Guide.

Chapter 6 219
8564E/EC Specifications and Characteristics
Frequency Specifications

Frequency Specifications
Frequency Range
Internal Mixing
Non-Option 006 9 kHz to 40 GHz
Option 006 30 Hz to 40 GHz
Internal Mixing Bands Frequency Range Harmonic Mixing Mode N*
Band 0 Non-Option 006 9 kHz to 2.9 GHz 1−
Band 0 Option 006 30 Hz to 2.9 GHz 1−
Band 1 2.75 GHz to 6.46 GHz 1−
Band 2 5.86 GHz to 13.2 GHz 2−
Band 3 12.4 GHz to 26.8 GHz 4−
Band 4 26.4 GHz to 31.15 GHz 4
Band 5 31.0 GHz to 40 GHz 8−
External Mixing 18 GHz to 325 GHz
External Mixing Bands
Frequency Band Frequency Range Harmonic Mixing Mode (N*)
Preselected Unpreselected
K 18.0 to 26.5 n/a 6−
A 26.5 to 40.0 8+ 8−
Q 33.0 to 50.0 10+ 10−
U 40.0 to 60.0 10+ 10−
V 50.0 to 75.0 14+ 14−
E 60.0 to 90.0 n/a 16−
W 75.0 to 110.0 18+ 18−
F 90.0 to 140.0 n/a 24−
D 110.0 to 170.0 n/a 30−
G 140.0 to 220.0 n/a 36−
Y 170.0 to 260.0 n/a 44−
J 220.0 to 325.0 n/a 54−
* N is the harmonic mixing mode. For negative mixing modes (as indicated by the “−”), the desired 1st LO
harmonic is higher than the tuned frequency by the 1st IF. For positive mixing modes, (as indicated by the
“+”), the desired LO Harmonic is lower than the tuned frequency by the 1st IF. The 1st IF is 3.9107 GHz for
internal mixing bands 0, 4, and 5, and 310.7 MHz for all other internal mixing bands and all external mixing
bands.

220 Chapter 6
8564E/EC Specifications and Characteristics
Frequency Specifications

Frequency Readout Accuracy

Accuracy of START, CENTER,

STOP or MARKER frequency

SPAN > 2 MHz × N* <±(frequency readout × frequency reference accuracy† + 5% of

frequency span + 15% of resolution bandwidth + 10 Hz)

SPAN ≤ 2 MHz × N* <±(frequency readout × frequency reference accuracy† + 1% of

frequency span + 15% of resolution bandwidth + 10 Hz)

* N is the harmonic mixing mode.

†
frequency reference accuracy = (aging × period of time since adjustment) + initial achievable accuracy +
temperature stability.

Frequency Count Marker

Frequency Count Marker Resolution Selectable from 1 Hz to 1 MHz

Frequency Count Marker Accuracy <±(marker frequency × frequency reference accuracy‡ +

(for signal-to-noise ratio ≥25 dB)
2 Hz × N† + 1 LSD)

Delta Frequency Count Accuracy <±(delta frequency × frequency reference accuracy‡ +

(for signal-to-noise ratio ≥25 dB)
4 Hz × N† + 2 LSD)

† N is the harmonic mixing mode.

‡ Frequency Reference Accuracy = (aging × period of time since adjustment + initial achievable accuracy +
temperature stability).

Chapter 6 221
8564E/EC Specifications and Characteristics
Frequency Specifications

Frequency Reference Accuracy

Non-Option 103

Aging <±0.5 × 10−9/day (after 7 day warmup)

<±1 × 10−7/year

Temperature Stability <±1 × 10−8, −10 °C to +55 °C, referenced to 25 °C

Option 103

Aging <±2 × 10−6/year

Settability <±1 × 10−6

Temperature Stability <±1 × 10−6, −10 °C to +55 °C, referenced to 25 °C

222 Chapter 6
8564E/EC Specifications and Characteristics
Frequency Specifications

Stability

Residual FM

(zero span, 10 Hz RES BW)

Non-Option 103 < 1.0 Hz × N* peak-to-peak in 20 ms†

Option 103 < 10 Hz × N* peak-to-peak in 20 ms

Noise Sidebands

For Frequencies ≤1 GHz

(Refer to the characteristics section for

frequencies > 2.9 GHz)

Offset Non-Option 103 Option 103

100 Hz

serial number prefix <3510A <−80 dBc/Hz‡ <−70 dBc/Hz‡

serial number prefix ≥3510A <−88 dBc/Hz‡ <−70 dBc/Hz‡

1 kHz <−97 dBc/Hz‡ <−90 dBc/Hz‡

10 kHz** <−113 dBc/Hz§ <−113 dBc/Hz§

100 kHz††

serial number prefix <3510A <−116 dBc/Hz# <−116 dBc/Hz#

serial number prefix ≥3510A <−117 dBc/Hz# <−117 dBc/Hz#

* N is the harmonic mixing mode.

† See Resolution Bandwidth Usability in “Frequency Characteristics” for further information.
‡
Add 5.2 dB × (f/1 GHz) −1) for f > 1 GHz and f ≤ 2.9 GHz.
§
Add 2.5 dB × (f/1 GHz) −1) for f > 1 GHz and f ≤ 2.9 GHz.
#
Add 3.0 dB × (f/1 GHz) −1) for f > 1 GHz and f ≤ 2.9 GHz.

**Add 2.0 dB for frequencies > 1 GHz and ≤ 2.9 GHz

††
For resolution bandwidth ≤ 1 kHz or frequency span ≤ 745 kHz.
‡‡ For resolution bandwidth ≥ 3 kHz or frequency span > 745 kHz.

Chapter 6 223
8564E/EC Specifications and Characteristics
Frequency Specifications

Frequency Span

Range

Internal Mixing 0 Hz, 100 Hz to 13.2 GHz over the 10-division display horizontal axis,
variable in approximately 1% increments, or in a 1, 2, 5 sequence.

External Mixing† Minimum span = 100 Hz × N*

Accuracy

SPAN > 2 MHz × N* <±5%

SPAN ≤ 2 MHz × N* <±1%

* N is the harmonic mixing mode.

† Resolution bandwidths ≤100 Hz are not available in external mixing. External mixing is not available for
Option 002 or Option 327.

224 Chapter 6
8564E/EC Specifications and Characteristics
Frequency Specifications

Resolution Bandwidths (−3 dB)

Range*

Non-Option 103 1 Hz to 1 MHz (selectable in a 1, 3, 10 sequence) and 2 MHz

(3 MHz at −6 dB)

Option 103 10 Hz to 1 MHz (selectable in a 1, 3, 10 sequence) and 2 MHz

(3 MHz at −6 dB)

Accuracy

1 Hz to 300 kHz RES BW <±10%

1 MHz RES BW <±25%

2 MHz RES BW <+50%, −25%

Selectivity (60 dB/3 dB bandwidth ratio)

RES BW ≥300 Hz <15:1

RES BW ≤100 Hz <5:1

Bandwidth Shape

1 and 2 MHz RES BW Approximately Gaussian

300 Hz to 300 kHz RES BW Synchronously tuned, 4-pole filters

1 Hz to 100 Hz RES BW Digital, approximately Gaussian

* Resolution bandwidths ≤100 Hz are not available in external mixing.

Video Bandwidth

(Post-detection low-pass filter averages displayed noise for a

smooth trace.)*

Range 1 Hz to 3 MHz† in a 1, 3, 10 sequence

Chapter 6 225
8564E/EC Specifications and Characteristics
Frequency Specifications

Sweep

Sweep Time

Range

Span = 0

Non-Option 007 (E-Series)

Analog display 50 μs to <30 ms

Digital display 30 ms to 6,000 s

Option 007 E-Series and all

EC-Series instruments

Digital display 50 μs to 6,000 s

Span ≥ 100 Hz

RES BW ≥300 Hz 50 ms to 2,000 s

RES BW ≤100 Hz 50 ms to 100,000 s (span-dependent)

Accuracy (Span = 0 Hz)

Non-Option 007 (E-Series)

Sweep time 30 ms to 6,000 s <±1%

Sweep time <30 ms <±10%

Option 007 E-Series and all

EC-Series instruments

Sweep time 30 ms to 6,000 s <±1%

Sweep time <30 ms <±0.1%

Sweep Trigger Delayed, Free Run, Single, Line, External, or Video#

# Video trigger is not available in RES BW settings ≤100 Hz.

226 Chapter 6
8564E/EC Specifications and Characteristics
Frequency Specifications

Delayed Sweep

Trigger Modes Free Run, Line, External, Video*

Range

Span = 0

Non-Option 007 (E-Series) +2 μs to +65.535 ms

Option 007 E-Series and all EC-Series

instruments

Sweep time ≥ 30 ms +2 μs to +65.535 ms

Sweep time < 30 ms −9.9 ms to +65.535 ms††

Span ≥ 100 Hz +2 μs to +65.535 ms

Resolution 1 μs

Accuracy# ±1 μs

* Video trigger is not available in RES BW settings ≤ 100 Hz.

†† Negative delayed sweep (pre-trigger) is also limited to 50 × sweep time.
# In E-Series instruments without Option 007, the delay time will be subject to up to ±0.5 μs of jitter due to
synchronization of the input edge trigger to the internal 1 MHz timebase. In E -series instruments with
Option 007 and in EC-series instruments using sweeptimes <30 ms, the delay time will experience up to ±83
ns of jitter due to synchronization of the input edge trigger to the internal 12 MHz timebase.

Chapter 6 227
8564E/EC Specifications and Characteristics
Frequency Specifications

Time-Gated Spectrum Analysis

Gate Delay* Edge Mode Level Mode

Range 3 μs to 65.535 ms ≤0.5 μs

Resolution 1 μs

Accuracy† <±1 μs

* Time from GATE TRIGGER INPUT to positive edge of GATE OUTPUT.

† The gate delay time will experience up to ±0.5 μs of jitter due to synchronization of the input edge trigger to
the internal 1 MHz timebase.

Gate Length*

Range 1 μs to 65.535 ms

Resolution 1 μs

Accuracy <±1 μs

* Time from positive edge to negative edge of GATE OUTPUT.

Marker Frequency Resolution SPAN/600 to a minimum of 1 Hz

Marker Time Resolution Sweep time/600

228 Chapter 6
8564E/EC Specifications and Characteristics
Amplitude Specifications

Amplitude Specifications

Measurement Range

Maximum Safe Input Power

Average Continuous Power +30 dBm (1 W)

(input attenuation ≥10 dB)

Peak Pulse Power +50 dBm (100 W) for pulse widths ≤10 μs and <1% duty cycle.
(input attenuation ≥30 dB)

DC Voltage <±0.2 V

Gain Compression

10 MHz to 2.9 GHz <1.0 dB

(≤−5 dBm at input mixer‡)

2.9 GHz to 6.46 GHz <1.0 dB

(≤0 dBm at input mixer†)

6.46 GHz to 26.8 GHz

(≤−3 dBm at input mixer)† <1.0 dB

26.8 GHz to 40 GHz

(≤0 dBm at input mixer)† <1.0 dB m (characteristic)

‡
Mixer level = input level − input attenuation.

Chapter 6 229
8564E/EC Specifications and Characteristics
Amplitude Specifications

Displayed Average Noise Level

With no signal at input, 1 Hz video bandwidth, and

0 dB input attenuation, tracking generator off.

Frequency Range 10 Hz RES BW 1 Hz RES BW

(Option 103) (Non-Option 103)

30 Hz <−80 dBm <−90 dBm

1 kHz <−95 dBm <−105 dBm

10 kHz <−110 dBm <−120 dBm

100 kHz <−110 dBm <−120 dBm

1 MHz to 10 MHz <−130 dBm <−140 dBm

10 MHz to 2.9 GHz

serial number prefix <3641A <−130 dBm <−140 dBm

serial number prefix ≥3641A <−135 dBm <−145 dBm

Option H13 <−135 dBm <−145 dBm

2.9 GHz to 6.46 GHz <−137 dBm <−147 dBm

6.46 GHz to 13.2 GHz <−133 dBm <−143 dBm

13.2 GHz to 22.0 GHz <−130 dBm <−140 dBm

22.0 GHz to 26.8 GHz <−126 dBm <−136 dBm

26.8 GHz to 31.15 GHz <−129 dBm <−139 dBm

31.15 GHz to 40 GHz <−120 dBm <−130 dBm*

* Refer to Resolution Bandwidth Usability.

230 Chapter 6
8564E/EC Specifications and Characteristics
Amplitude Specifications

Spurious Responses

All input-related spurious responses, except as noted below. Mixer Level* Distortion

10 MHz to 40 GHz −40 dBm <(−75 + 20 log N†) dBc

Second Harmonic Distortion

Applied Signal Frequency Range

1 MHz to 1.45 GHz (serial number prefix <3641A) −40 dBm <−72 dBc

20 MHz to 1.45 GHz (serial number prefix ≥3641A) −40 dBm <−79 dBc

20 MHz to 1.45 GHz (Option H13) −40 dBm <−79 dBc

1.45 GHz to 2.0 GHz −10 dBm <−85 dBc

2.0 GHz to 20 GHz −10 dBm <−90 dBc

Third Order Intermodulation Distortion

(with two signals at the input mixer, spaced by ≥1 kHz)*

Frequency Range

1 MHz to 2.9 GHz (serial number prefix <3641A) −30 dBm each <−78 dBc

20 MHz to 2.9 GHz (serial number prefix ≥3641A) −30 dBm each <−82 dBc

20 MHz to 2.9 GHz (Option H13) −30 dBm each <−82 dBc

2.9 GHz to 6.46 GHz −30 dBm each <−90 dBc

6.46 GHz to 26.8 GHz −30 dBm each <−75 dBc

26.8 GHz to 40 GHz (Characteristic) −30 dBm each <−85 dBc

Image Responses

Frequency Range

10 MHz to 26.8 GHz −10 dBm <−80 dBc

26.8 GHz to 40 GHz −30 dBm <−60 dBc

Multiple and Out-of-Band Responses

Frequency Range

10 MHz to 26.8 GHz −10 dBm <−80 dBc

26.8 GHz to 40 GHz −30 dBm <−55 dBc

* Mixer level = input level − input attenuation.

† N = harmonic mixing number

Chapter 6 231
8564E/EC Specifications and Characteristics
Amplitude Specifications

Residual Responses

>200 kHz with no signal at input, 0 dB input attenuation, N† 1 <−90 dBm

† N harmonic mixing number

Display Range

Amplitude Scale 10 vertical display divisions, with the reference level (0 dB) at the top
graticule line.

Calibration

LOG 10 dB/DIV for 100 dB display from reference level.*

5 dB/DIV for 50 dB display expanded from reference level.†

2 dB/DIV for 20 dB display expanded from reference level.

1 dB/DIV for 10 dB display expanded from reference level.†

LINEAR 10% of reference level per division over the top nine divisions

(all 10 divisions for RES BW ≤100 Hz) when calibrated in voltage.

* 10 dB/DIV for 70 dB display from reference level for RES BW ≤100 Hz when SPAN = 0 Hz.
† In E-Series instruments these scales are not available for sweep times < 30 ms without Option 007.

Accuracy

Reference Level Range

LOG, adjustable in 0.1 dB steps

Frequency Band Range

30 Hz to 31.15 GHz (Option 006) −120 dBm to +30 dBm

9 kHz to 31.15 GHz (Non-Option 006) −120 dBm to +30 dBm

31.15 GHz to 40 GHz −115 dBm to +30 dBm

LINEAR, settable in 1% steps

30 Hz to 31.15 GHz (Option 006) 2.2 μV to 7.07 V

9 kHz to 31.15 GHz (Non-Option 006) 2.2 μV to 7.07 V

31.15 GHz to 40 GHz 3.98 μV to 7.07 V

232 Chapter 6
8564E/EC Specifications and Characteristics
Amplitude Specifications

Reference Level Uncertainty

Frequency Response

(with 10 dB input attenuation)

Relative (referenced to midpoint between highest and lowest peak −10 °C to 55 20 °C to 30 °C

excursions) °C

30 Hz to 2.9 GHz (Option 006) <±1.0 dB <±0.8 dB

9 kHz to 2.9 GHz (Non-Option 006) <±1.0 dB <±0.8 dB

100 MHz to 2.0 GHz (serial number prefix ≥3641A) <±0.9 dB <±0.8 dB

2.9 GHz to 6.46 GHz <±1.7 dB <±1.4 dB

6.46 GHz to 13.2 GHz <±2.6 dB <±2.2 dB

13.2 GHz to 22.0 GHz <±2.5 dB <±2.5 dB

22.0 GHz to 26.8 GHz <±3.3 dB <±2.2 dB

26.8 GHz to 31.15 GHz <±3.1 dB <±2.9 dB

31.15 GHz to 40 GHz <±2.6 dB <±2.4 dB

Absolute (referenced to 300 MHz CAL OUTPUT)

30 Hz to 2.9 GHz (Option 006) <±1.5 dB <±1.0 dB

9 kHz to 2.9 GHz (Non-Option 006) <±1.5 dB <±1.0 dB

2.9 GHz to 6.46 GHz <±2.6 dB <±1.8 dB

6.46 GHz to 13.2 GHz <±3.0 dB <±2.8 dB

13.2 GHz to 22 GHz <±4.0 dB <±3.5 dB

22 GHz to 26.8 GHz <±4.5 dB <±4.0 dB

26.8 GHz to 31.15 GHz <±4.0 dB <±3.0 dB

31.15 GHz to 40 GHz <±4.0 dB <±3.2 dB

Band Switching Uncertainty

(Additional uncertainty added to Relative Frequency Response for measurements <±1.0 dB

between any two bands)

Calibrator Uncertainty

−10 dBm, 300 MHz <±0.3 dB

Chapter 6 233
8564E/EC Specifications and Characteristics
Amplitude Specifications

Input Attenuator Switching Uncertainty

(20 to 70 dB settings, referenced to 10 dB attenuation)

Frequency Range

9 kHz to 2.9 GHz <±0.6 dB/10 dB step, ±1.8 dB max.

30 Hz to 2.9 GHz (Option 006) <±0.6 dB/10 dB step, ±1.8 dB max.

IF Gain Uncertainty

(0 dBm to −80 dBm reference levels with 10 dB input attenuation) <±1.0 dB

Resolution Bandwidth Switching Uncertainty

(Referenced to 300 kHz resolution bandwidth at the reference level.)* <±0.5 dB

234 Chapter 6
8564E/EC Specifications and Characteristics
Amplitude Specifications

Pulse Digitization Uncertainty

(Pulse response mode, PRF >720/sweep time)

LOG

Resolution Bandwidth ≤ 1 MHz <1.25 dB peak-to-peak

Resolution Bandwidth = 2 MHz <3 dB peak-to-peak

LINEAR

Resolution Bandwidth ≤ 1 MHz <4% of reference level peak-to-peak

Resolution Bandwidth = 2 MHz <12% of reference level peak-to-peak

IF Alignment Uncertainty

(additional uncertainty when using 300 Hz RES BW only) <±0.5 dB

Chapter 6 235
8564E/EC Specifications and Characteristics
Amplitude Specifications

Scale Fidelity*

LOG

Incremental

0 to −90 dB range†

RES BW ≥ 300 Hz <±0.1 dB/dB

RES BW ≤ 100 Hz <±0.2 dB/2 dB

Cumulative

0 to −90 dB range†

RES BW ≥ 300 Hz <±0.1 dB/dB from the reference level to a maximum of ±0.85 dB

RES BW ≤ 100 Hz <±0.2 dB/2 dB from the reference level to a maximum of ±0.85 dB

0 to −100 dB range†

RES BW ≥ 300 Hz ±2.5 dB characteristic

RES BW ≤ 100 Hz maximum of ±1.5 dB

LINEAR <±3% of reference level

* Scale fidelity is not the same for RES BW ≤100 Hz as for RES BW ≥ 300 Hz. Therefore, signals not at the
reference level will experience an additional amplitude difference when switching between these two sets of
RES BW settings due to the differences in scale fidelity.
†
0 to −70 dB range for RES BW ≤100 Hz when SPAN = 0 Hz.

Marker Amplitude Resolution*

(Sweep time ≥ 30 ms)

Scale: LOG 10 dB/DIV (1/6) dB

LOG 5 dB/DIV (1/12) dB

LOG 2 dB/DIV (1/30) dB

LOG 1 dB/DIV (1/60) dB

LINEAR Reference Level/600

* In E-Series instruments without Option 007 markers are not available for sweep times < 30 ms with RES BW
≥ 300 Hz. For Option 007, see the characteristics section.

236 Chapter 6
8564E/EC Specifications and Characteristics
Inputs and Outputs Specifications

Inputs and Outputs Specifications

CAUTION Any electrostatic discharge according to IEC 801-2/1991 to the center pins of any
of the connectors may cause damage to the associated circuitry.

IF INPUT

Connector SMA female, front panel

Input level for full-screen deflections −30 dBm ± 1.5 dB

(external mixing mode, 0 dBm reference level, 30 dB conversion loss)

GPIB

Connector IEEE-488 bus connector

Interface Functions SH1, AH1, T6, TE0, L4, LE0, SR1, RL1, PP1, DC1, DT1, C1, C28

Direct Plotter Output Supports Agilent 7225A, Agilent 7440A, Agilent 7470A, Agilent 7475A,
Agilent 7550A

Direct Printer Output Supports HP 3630A PaintJet, HP 2225A ThinkJet

CAL OUTPUT

Connector BNC female, front panel

Frequency 300 MHz ±(300 MHz × frequency reference accuracy†)

Amplitude −10 dBm ±0.3 dB

† Frequency Reference Accuracy = (aging × period of time since adjustment + initial achievable accuracy +
temperature stability).

1ST LO OUTPUT

Connector SMA female, front panel

Amplitude +16.5 dBm ±2.0 dB

10 MHz REF IN/OUT

Connector BNC female, rear panel

Output Frequency 10 MHz ±(10 MHz × frequency reference accuracy†)

†
Frequency Reference Accuracy = (aging × period of time since adjustment + initial achievable accuracy +
temperature stability).

Chapter 6 237
8564E/EC Specifications and Characteristics
General Specifications

General Specifications
Environmental Specifications

Military Specification per MIL-T-28800, Type III, Class 3, Style B (EC)/Style C (E), as follows:

Calibration Interval 1 year

Warmup 5 minutes from ambient conditions*

Temperature

Operating −10 °C to +55 °C (E) / 0 °C to +55 °C (EC)

Non-operating −51 °C to +71 °C

Humidity 95% at 40 °C for 5 days

Altitude

Operating 15,000 feet

Non-operating 50,000 feet

Rain resistance Drip-proof at 16 liters/hour/square foot

Vibration

5 to 15 Hz 0.060 inch peak-to-peak excursion

16 to 25 Hz 0.040 inch peak-to-peak excursion

26 to 55 Hz 0.020 inch peak-to-peak excursion

Pulse Shock

Half Sine 30 g for 11 ms duration

Transit Drop 8 inch drop on 6 faces and 8 corners

Power Main Voltage fluctuations within the range specified in the spectrum
analyzer “Power Requirements.”

Power Main Operating environment within the limits of installation category II

according to IEC 1010.

Pollution Operating environment within the limits of pollution degree 2

according to IEC 664.

238 Chapter 6
8564E/EC Specifications and Characteristics
General Specifications

Electromagnetic Compatibility

Conducted and radiated interference is in compliance with CISPR,

Publication 11 (1990).

Military Specification Meets the requirements of MIL-STD-461C, Part 2, with the

exceptions shown below:

Conducted Emissions

CE01 (Narrowband) 1 kHz to 15 kHz only

CE03 (Narrowband) Full limits

CE03 (Broadband) 20 dB relaxation from 15 kHz to 100 kHz

Conducted Susceptibility

CS01 Full Limits

CS02 Full Limits with 40 dB relaxation at IF frequencies. Refer also to

“Radiated Immunity” in Amplitude Characteristics.

CS06 Full Limits

Radiated Emissions

RE01 Test probe at 15 cm, front and rear panel search excluded.

RE02 Full limits to 1 GHz

Radiated Susceptibility

RS03 Limited to 3 V/m from 14 kHz to 1 GHz with 40 dB relaxation at IF

frequencies. Refer also to “Radiated Immunity” in Amplitude
Characteristics.

Chapter 6 239
8564E/EC Specifications and Characteristics
General Specifications

Power Requirements

115 Vac Operation

Voltage 90 V to 140 V rms

Current 3.2 A rms maximum

Frequency 47 Hz to 440 Hz

230 Vac Operation

Voltage 180 V to 250 V rms

Current 1.8 A rms maximum

Frequency 47 Hz to 66 Hz

Maximum Power Dissipation 180 W

Audible Noise <5.0 Bels, 20 °C to 30 °C (ISO DP7779)

Weight 20 kg (44 lb)

240 Chapter 6
8564E/EC Specifications and Characteristics
General Specifications

Dimensions

With Handle and Front Cover: Without Handle and Front Cover:

(A) 202 mm (7-15/16 in) high (B) 187 mm (7-3/8 in) high

(F) 503 mm (19-13/16 in) deep (E) 461 mm (18-1/8 in) deep

Chapter 6 241
8564E/EC Specifications and Characteristics
Frequency Characteristics

Frequency Characteristics
These are not specifications. Characteristics provide useful information about
instrument performance.

Frequency Reference Accuracy

Non-Option 103

Initial Achievable Accuracy <±2.2 × 10−8

(includes gravitational sensitivity, retrace,

and settability)

Daily Aging (average over 7 days after being <±5 × 10−10

powered on for 7 days)

Warmup

(Internal frequency reference selected)

After 5 minutes <±1 × 10−7 of final frequency* (0 °C to +55 °C)

<±1 × 10−6 of final frequency* (−10 °C)

After 15 minutes <±1 × 10−8 of final frequency* (−10 °C to +55 °C)

Option 103

Initial Achievable Accuracy <±1 × 10−6

* Final frequency is defined as frequency 60 minutes after power-on with analyzer set to internal frequency
reference.

Bandwidth Selectivity

RES BW ≤100 Hz <4.5:1

RES BW = 1 MHz <8:1

RES BW = 2 MHz <5.5:1

242 Chapter 6
8564E/EC Specifications and Characteristics
Frequency Characteristics

Impulse Bandwidth

RES BW 2 MHz 2.93 MHz ±10%

RES BW 1 MHz 1.60 MHz ±7%

RES BW 300 kHz 491 kHz ±7%

300 Hz ≤ RES BW ≤ 100 kHz 1.62 × RES BW ± 10%

Stability

Noise Sidebands

For frequencies ≤ 1 GHz, 100 kHz offset from carrier, and frequency span > ≤121 dBc/Hz
2 MHz

Chapter 6 243
8564E/EC Specifications and Characteristics
Frequency Characteristics

Figure 6-1 Noise Sidebands Normalized to 1 Hz BW versus Offset from Carrier

Figure 6-2 Typical On-Screen Dynamic Range vs. Offset from 1 GHz Center Freq. for all
RBW's

244 Chapter 6
8564E/EC Specifications and Characteristics
Frequency Characteristics

Sweep

Sweep Time Accuracy

Span ≥100 Hz <±15%

Resolution Bandwidth Usability* (Non-Option 103)

RES BW Maximum Usable Frequency

Video Average OFF Video Average ON, 10 Video Averages

Source/Spectrum Analyzer Frequency References

Locked† Independent‡

≥30 Hz >40 GHz >40 GHz >40 GHz

10 Hz >40 GHz >40 GHz >15 GHz

3 Hz >40 GHz >40 GHz 2 GHz

1 Hz >40 GHz >40 GHz 200 MHz

Chapter 6 245
8564E/EC Specifications and Characteristics
Amplitude Characteristics

Amplitude Characteristics

Dynamic Range

Figure 6-3 Nominal Dynamic Range

Amplitude Measurement Range

Spurious Responses Frequency Range Distortion

(all input related spurious responses <1 kHz from the 10 MHz to 2.9 GHz <−55 dBc
carrier)

246 Chapter 6
8564E/EC Specifications and Characteristics
Amplitude Characteristics

Amplitude Accuracy

Band-to-Band Frequency Response (dB)

Frequency response uncertainty for measurements between any two internal mixing bands.
Equivalent to the sum of the two Relative Frequency Response values plus Band Switching
Uncertainty.

Band 0. 30 Hz to 2.9 GHz

Band 1. 2.9 GHz to 6.46 GHz
Band 2. 6.46 GHz to 13.2 GHz
Band 3A. 13.2 GHz to 22 GHz
Band 3B. 22 GHz to 26.8 GHz
Band 4. 26.8 GHz to 31.15 GHz
Band 5. 31.15 GHz to 40 GHz

Band-to-Band Frequency Response, 20 °C to 30 °C

(dB peak-to-peak)

Band 0 Band 1 Band 2 Band 3A Band 3B Band 4 Band 5

Band 0 n/a 3.2 dB 4.0 dB 4.3 dB 4.0 dB 4.7 dB 4.2 dB

Band 1 3.2 dB n/a 4.6 dB 4.9 dB 4.6 dB 5.3 dB 4.8 dB

Band 2 4.0 dB 4.6 dB n/a 5.7 dB 5.4 dB 6.1 dB 5.6 dB

Band 3A 4.3 dB 4.9 dB 5.7 dB n/a 5.7 dB 6.4 dB 5.9 dB

Band 3B 4.0 dB 4.6 dB 5.4 dB 5.7 dB n/a 6.1 dB 5.6 dB

Band 4 4.7 dB 5.3 dB 6.1 dB 6.4 dB 6.1 dB n/a 6.3 dB

Band 5 4.2 dB 4.8 dB 5.6 dB 5.9 dB 5.6 dB 6.3 dB n/a

Band-to-Band Frequency Response, −10 °C to 55 °C

(dB peak-to-peak)

Band 0 Band 1 Band 2 Band 3A Band 3B Band 4 Band 5

Band 0 n/a 3.7 dB 4.6 dB 4.5 dB 5.3 dB 5.1 dB 4.6 dB

Band 1 3.7 dB n/a 5.3 dB 5.2 dB 6.0 dB 5.8 dB 5.3 dB

Band 2 4.6 dB 5.3 dB n/a 6.1 dB 6.9 dB 6.7 dB 6.2 dB

Band 3A 4.5 dB 5.2 dB 6.1 dB n/a 6.8 dB 6.6 dB 6.1 dB

Band 3B 5.3 dB 6.0 dB 6.9 dB 6.8 dB n/a 7.4 dB 6.9 dB

Band 4 5.1 dB 5.8 dB 6.7 dB 6.6 dB 7.4 dB n/a 6.7 dB

Band 5 4.6 dB 5.3 dB 6.2 dB 6.1 dB 6.9 dB 6.7 dB n/a

Chapter 6 247
8564E/EC Specifications and Characteristics
Amplitude Characteristics

Input Attenuator Repeatability <±0.2 dB

Input Attenuator Accuracy

2.9 GHz to 18 GHz <±1.5 dB/10 dB step, ±3.0 dB max.

18 GHz to 26.8 GHz <±3.0 dB/10 dB step, ±6.0 dB max.

26.8 GHz to 40 GHz <±3.0 dB/10 dB step, ±6.0 dB max.

Pulse Digitization Uncertainty

(Pulse response mode, PRF >720/sweep time)

Standard Deviation <0.2 dB

248 Chapter 6
8564E/EC Specifications and Characteristics
Amplitude Characteristics

Marker Amplitude Resolution

(EC-Series instruments and E-Series

instruments with Option 007, sweep time < 30
ms, zero span)

Scale: LOG 10 dB/DIV ≤ (1/2) dB

LOG 5 dB/DIV ≤ (1/4) dB

LOG 2 dB/DIV ≤ (1/10) dB

LOG 1 dB/DIV ≤ (1/20) dB

LINEAR ≤ Reference Level/200

Demodulation

Spectrum Demodulation

Modulation Type AM and FM (5 kHz peak deviation)

Audio Output Internal speaker and phone jack with volume control.

Pause Time at Marker Frequency 100 ms to 60 s

Radiated Immunity

Chapter 6 249
8564E/EC Specifications and Characteristics
Inputs and Outputs Characteristics

Inputs and Outputs Characteristics

CAUTION Any electrostatic discharge according to IEC 801-2/1991 to the center pins of any
of the connectors may cause damage to the associated circuitry.

INPUT 50Ω

Connector Precision 2.4mm Male, front panel

Impedance 50 Ω

VSWR (at tuned frequency)

<1.5:1 for <2.9 GHz and ≥10 dB Input Attenuation

<2.3:1 for <2.9 GHz and ≥10 dB Input Attenuation

LO Emission Level* (average)

10 dB Input Attenuation <−80 dBm

* Level of 1st LO, 3.0 to 6.8 GHz, present at INPUT 50Ω connector.

IF INPUT (Deleted on Option 002 and Option 327)

(2nd IF input for use with external mixers)

Connector SMA female, front panel

Impedance (dc coupled) 50 Ω

Frequency 310.7 MHz

Noise Figure 7 dB

1 dB Gain Compression Level −23 dBm

Full Screen Level −30 dBm

(Gain Compression and Full Screen Levels apply with 30 dB conversion

loss setting and 0 dBm reference level.)

1ST LO OUTPUT

Connector SMA female, front panel

Impedance 50 Ω

Frequency Range 3.0000 GHz to 6.8107 GHz†

†
3.8107 GHz to 6.8107 GHz for analyzers equipped with Option 002.

250 Chapter 6
8564E/EC Specifications and Characteristics
Inputs and Outputs Characteristics

CAL OUTPUT

Connector BNC female, front panel

Impedance 50 Ω

10 MHz REF IN/OUT

Connector BNC female, rear panel

Impedance 50 Ω

Output Amplitude 0 dBm

Input Frequency 10 MHz × (1±2×10−5)

Input Amplitude −2 to +10 dBm

External Reference Phase Noise

Analyzer noise sideband performance will not be degraded if the

external reference phase noise is within the limits given below.

Non-Option 103 <−135 dBc/Hz at 100 Hz offset

Option 103 <−110 dBc/Hz at 100 Hz offset

VIDEO OUTPUT*

Connector BNC female, rear panel

Impedance (dc coupled) 50 Ω

Amplitude (RES BW ≥300 Hz) 0 to +1 V full scale

Scaling

RES BW ≥300 Hz linear or log 100 dB/V

RES BW ≤100 Hz 4.8 kHz, auto-ranged level with dc offset

Chapter 6 251
8564E/EC Specifications and Characteristics
Inputs and Outputs Characteristics

LO SWP|FAV OUTPUT and

LO SWP|0.5 V/GHz OUTPUT*

Connector BNC female, rear panel

Impedance (dc coupled) 120 Ω

LO SWP OUTPUT (no load) 0 to + 10 V

0.5 V/GHz OUTPUT

Internal Mixer Mode 0.5 V/GHz of tuned frequency (no load)

External Mixer Mode ([(1.5 V/GHz) × LO frequency)] − 0.2054 V) ±50 mV

0.25 V/GHz OUTPUT† 0.25 V/GHz of tuned frequency (no load)

* This connector is labeled LO SWP|0.5 V/GHz OUTPUT on older spectrum analyzers and
LO SWP|FAV OUTPUT on newer spectrum analyzers.
† The 0.25 V/GHz output is available only in the 8564E/EC and 8565E/EC.

BLKG/GATE OUTPUT

Connector BNC female, rear panel

Impedance 50 Ω

Blanking Mode

Amplitude during sweep Low TTL Level

Amplitude during retrace High TTL Level

Gate Mode

Gate On High TTL level

Gate Off Low TTL level

EXT/GATE TRIG INPUT

Connector BNC female, rear panel

Impedance 10 kΩ

Trigger Level Settable to high TTL, or low TTL, or edge triggered

TTL

PROBE POWER (front panel)

Voltage +15 V dc, −12.6 V dc

Current 150 mA maximum, each

252 Chapter 6
8564E/EC Specifications and Characteristics
Inputs and Outputs Characteristics

EARPHONE

Connector 1/8 inch miniature monophonic jack, rear panel

Power Output 0.2 W into 4 Ω

2ND IF OUT

(Option 001 instruments only)

Connector SMA female, rear panel

Impedance 50 Ω

Frequency 310.7 MHz

Frequency Range 3 dB BW Noise Figure Conversion

Gain

10 kHz to 2.9 GHz

serial number prefix <3641A >28 MHz 25 dB −6 dB

serial number prefix ≥3641A >28 MHz 20 dB 1 dB

2.9 GHz to 6.5 GHz >30 MHz 22 dB −3 dB

6.5 GHz to 13.2 GHz >30 MHz 26 dB −7 dB

13.2 GHz to 22 GHz >30 MHz 30 dB −11 dB

22 GHz to 26.8 GHz >30 MHz 32 dB −13 dB

26.8 GHz to 31.15 GHz >28 MHz 24 dB −14 dB

31.15 GHz to 40 GHz >28 MHz 34 dB −14 dB

ALT SWEEP OUT

(Option 005 analyzers only)

Connector BNC female, rear panel

Impedance 100 Ω

Chapter 6 253
8564E/EC Specifications and Characteristics
Regulatory Information

Regulatory Information
The following information applies to the 8564EC spectrum analyzer.

254 Chapter 6
8564E/EC Specifications and Characteristics
Regulatory Information

The following information applies to the 8564E spectrum analyzer.

Chapter 6 255
8564E/EC Specifications and Characteristics
Regulatory Information

Notice for Germany: Noise Declaration

LpA < 70 dB am Arbeitsplatz (operator position) normaler Betrieb (normal
position) nach DIN 45635 T. 19 (per ISO 7779)

CE: European Community

The product design was approved for the European Community.

ISM1-A: Industrial Scientific and Medical Group 1, Class A

The instrument meets the requirements of CISPER 11, Clause 4.

CSA: Canadian Standards Association

The CSA mark is a registered trademark of the Canadian Standards Association.
The product meets the requirements.

IEC: International Electrotechnical Commission

256 Chapter 6
7 8565E/EC Specifications and
Characteristics

257
8565E/EC Specifications and Characteristics
Specifications and Characteristics

Specifications and Characteristics

The following tables list the spectrum analyzer specifications.
Unless stated otherwise, all specifications describe the analyzer warranted
performance under the following conditions:
• Five-minute warmup for ambient conditions
• Autocoupled controls
• Preselector peaked at the signal of interest
• Digital trace display
• IF ADJ ON
• REF LVL CAL adjusted
• 1ST LO OUTPUT terminated in 50 ohms
• 2ND IF OUTPUT terminated in 50 ohms
• One-year calibration cycle (See “Calibration Cycle” below.)
• Environmental requirements met
After a 30-minute warmup at a temperature between 20 °C and 30 °C, the
preselector does not have to be peaked at each signal of interest. Factory
preselector-peak values are sufficient to meet all specifications.

Characteristics provide useful information in the form of typical, nominal, or

approximate values for analyzer performance. Tables of the spectrum analyzer
characteristics follow the specifications.

258 Chapter 7
8565E/EC Specifications and Characteristics
Calibration Cycle

Chapter 7 259
8565E/EC Specifications and Characteristics
Frequency Specifications

Frequency Specifications
Frequency Range
Internal Mixing
Non-Option 006 9 kHz to 50 GHz
Option 006 30 Hz to 50 GHz
Internal Mixing Bands Frequency Range Harmonic Mixing Mode N*
Band 0 Non-Option 006 9 kHz to 2.9 GHz 1−
Band 0 Option 006 30 Hz to 2.9 GHz 1−
Band 1 2.75 GHz to 6.46 GHz 1−
Band 2 5.86 GHz to 13.2 GHz 2−
Band 3 12.4 GHz to 26.8 GHz 4−
Band 4 26.4 GHz to 31.15 GHz 4+
Band 5 31.0 GHz to 50 GHz 8−
External Mixing 18 GHz to 325 GHz
External Mixing Bands
Frequency Band Frequency Range Harmonic Mixing Mode (N*)
Preselected Unpreselected
K 18.0 to 26.5 n/a 6−
A 26.5 to 40.0 8+ 8−
Q 33.0 to 50.0 10+ 10−
U 40.0 to 60.0 10+ 10−
V 50.0 to 75.0 14+ 14−
E 60.0 to 90.0 n/a 16−
W 75.0 to 110.0 18+ 18−
F 90.0 to 140.0 n/a 24−
D 110.0 to 170.0 n/a 30−
G 140.0 to 220.0 n/a 36−
Y 170.0 to 260.0 n/a 44−
J 220.0 to 325.0 n/a 54−
* N is the harmonic mixing mode. For negative mixing modes (as indicated by the “−”), the desired 1st LO
harmonic is higher than the tuned frequency by the 1st IF. For positive mixing modes, (as indicated by the
“+”), the desired LO Harmonic is lower than the tuned frequency by the 1st IF. The 1st IF is 3.9107 GHz for
internal mixing bands 0, 4, and 5, and 310.7 MHz for all other internal mixing bands and all external mixing
bands.

260 Chapter 7
8565E/EC Specifications and Characteristics
Frequency Specifications

Frequency Readout Accuracy

Accuracy of START, CENTER,

STOP or MARKER frequency

SPAN > 2 MHz × N* <±(frequency readout × frequency reference accuracy† + 5% of

frequency span + 15% of resolution bandwidth + 10 Hz)

SPAN ≤ 2 MHz × N* <±(frequency readout × frequency reference accuracy† + 1% of

frequency span + 15% of resolution bandwidth + 10 Hz)

* N is the harmonic mixing mode.

†
frequency reference accuracy = (aging × period of time since adjustment) + initial achievable accuracy +
temperature stability.

Frequency Count Marker

Frequency Count Marker Resolution Selectable from 1 Hz to 1 MHz

Frequency Count Marker Accuracy <±(marker frequency × frequency reference accuracy‡ +

(for signal-to-noise ratio ≥25 dB)
2 Hz × N† + 1 LSD)

Delta Frequency Count Accuracy <±(delta frequency × frequency reference accuracy‡ +

(for signal-to-noise ratio ≥25 dB)
4 Hz × N† + 2 LSD)

† N is the harmonic mixing mode.

‡ Frequency Reference Accuracy = (aging × period of time since adjustment + initial achievable accuracy +
temperature stability).

Chapter 7 261
8565E/EC Specifications and Characteristics
Frequency Specifications

Frequency Reference Accuracy

Non-Option 103

Aging <±0.5 × 10−9/day (after 7 day warmup)

<±1 × 10−7/year

Temperature Stability <±1 × 10−8, −10 °C to +55 °C, referenced to 25 °C

Option 103

Aging <±2 × 10−6/year

Settability <±1 × 10−6

Temperature Stability <±1 × 10−6, −10 °C to +55 °C, referenced to 25 °C

262 Chapter 7
8565E/EC Specifications and Characteristics
Frequency Specifications

Stability

Residual FM

(zero span, 10 Hz RES BW)

Non-Option 103 < 1.0 Hz × N* peak-to-peak in 20 ms†

Option 103 < 10 Hz × N* peak-to-peak in 20 ms

Noise Sidebands

For Frequencies ≤1 GHz

(Refer to the characteristics section for

frequencies > 2.9 GHz)

Offset Non-Option 103 Option 103

100 Hz

serial number prefix <3510A <−80 dBc/Hz‡ <−70 dBc/Hz‡

serial number prefix ≥3510A <−88 dBc/Hz‡ <−70 dBc/Hz‡

1 kHz <−97 dBc/Hz‡ <−90 dBc/Hz‡

10 kHz** <−113 dBc/Hz§ <−113 dBc/Hz§

100 kHz††

serial number prefix <3510A <−116 dBc/Hz# <−116 dBc/Hz#

serial number prefix ≥3510A <−117 dBc/Hz# <−117 dBc/Hz#

* N is the harmonic mixing mode.

† See Resolution Bandwidth Usability in “Frequency Characteristics” for further information.
‡
Add 5.2 dB × (f/1 GHz) −1) for f > 1 GHz and f ≤ 2.9 GHz.
§
Add 2.5 dB × (f/1 GHz) −1) for f > 1 GHz and f ≤ 2.9 GHz.
#
Add 3.0 dB × (f/1 GHz) −1) for f > 1 GHz and f ≤ 2.9 GHz.

**Add 2.0 dB for frequencies > 1 GHz and ≤ 2.9 GHz

††
For resolution bandwidth ≤ 1 kHz or frequency span ≤ 745 kHz.
‡‡ For resolution bandwidth ≥ 3 kHz or frequency span > 745 kHz.

Chapter 7 263
8565E/EC Specifications and Characteristics
Frequency Specifications

Frequency Span

Range

Internal Mixing 0 Hz, 100 Hz to 13.2 GHz over the 10-division display horizontal axis,
variable in approximately 1% increments, or in a 1, 2, 5 sequence.

External Mixing† Minimum span = 100 Hz × N*

Accuracy

SPAN > 2 MHz × N* <±5%

SPAN ≤ 2 MHz × N* <±1%

* N is the harmonic mixing mode.

† Resolution bandwidths ≤100 Hz are not available in external mixing. External mixing is not available for
Option 002 or Option 327.

264 Chapter 7
8565E/EC Specifications and Characteristics
Frequency Specifications

Resolution Bandwidths (−3 dB)

Range*

Non-Option 103 1 Hz to 1 MHz (selectable in a 1, 3, 10 sequence) and 2 MHz

(3 MHz at −6 dB)

Option 103 10 Hz to 1 MHz (selectable in a 1, 3, 10 sequence) and 2 MHz

(3 MHz at −6 dB)

Accuracy

1 Hz to 300 kHz RES BW <±10%

1 MHz RES BW <±25%

2 MHz RES BW <+50%, −25%

Selectivity (60 dB/3 dB bandwidth ratio)

RES BW ≥300 Hz <15:1

RES BW ≤100 Hz <5:1

Bandwidth Shape

1 and 2 MHz RES BW Approximately Gaussian

300 Hz to 300 kHz RES BW Synchronously tuned, 4-pole filters

1 Hz to 100 Hz RES BW Digital, approximately Gaussian

* Resolution bandwidths ≤100 Hz are not available in external mixing.

Video Bandwidth

(Post-detection low-pass filter averages displayed noise for a

smooth trace.)*

Range 1 Hz to 3 MHz† in a 1, 3, 10 sequence

Chapter 7 265
8565E/EC Specifications and Characteristics
Frequency Specifications

Sweep

Sweep Time

Range

Span = 0

Non-Option 007 (E-Series)

Analog display 50 μs to <30 ms

Digital display 30 ms to 6,000 s

Option 007 E-Series and all

EC-Series instruments

Digital display 50 μs to 6,000 s

Span ≥ 100 Hz

RES BW ≥300 Hz 50 ms to 2,000 s

RES BW ≤100 Hz 50 ms to 100,000 s (span-dependent)

Accuracy (Span = 0 Hz)

Non-Option 007 (E-Series)

Sweep time 30 ms to 6,000 s <±1%

Sweep time <30 ms <±10%

Option 007 E-Series and all

EC-Series instruments

Sweep time 30 ms to 6,000 s <±1%

Sweep time <30 ms <±0.1%

Sweep Trigger Delayed, Free Run, Single, Line, External, or Video#

# Video trigger is not available in RES BW settings ≤100 Hz.

266 Chapter 7
8565E/EC Specifications and Characteristics
Frequency Specifications

Delayed Sweep

Trigger Modes Free Run, Line, External, Video*

Range

Span = 0

Non-Option 007 (E-Series) +2 μs to +65.535 ms

Option 007 E-Series and all EC-Series

instruments

Sweep time ≥ 30 ms +2 μs to +65.535 ms

Sweep time < 30 ms −9.9 ms to +65.535 ms††

Span ≥ 100 Hz +2 μs to +65.535 ms

Resolution 1 μs

Accuracy# ±1 μs

* Video trigger is not available in RES BW settings ≤ 100 Hz.

†† Negative delayed sweep (pre-trigger) is also limited to 50 × sweep time.
# In E-Series instruments without Option 007, the delay time will be subject to up to ±0.5 μs of jitter due to
synchronization of the input edge trigger to the internal 1 MHz timebase. In E-series instruments with Option
007 and EC-series instruments using sweeptimes <30 ms, the delay time will experience up to ±83 ns of jitter
due to synchronization of the input edge trigger to the internal 12 MHz timebase.

Chapter 7 267
8565E/EC Specifications and Characteristics
Frequency Specifications

Time-Gated Spectrum Analysis

Gate Delay* Edge Mode Level Mode

Range 3 μs to 65.535 ms ≤0.5 μs

Resolution 1 μs

Accuracy† <±1 μs

* Time from GATE TRIGGER INPUT to positive edge of GATE OUTPUT.

† The gate delay time will experience up to ±0.5 μs of jitter due to synchronization of the input edge trigger to
the internal 1 MHz timebase.

Gate Length*

Range 1 μs to 65.535 ms

Resolution 1 μs

Accuracy <±1 μs

* Time from positive edge to negative edge of GATE OUTPUT.

Marker Frequency Resolution SPAN/600 to a minimum of 1 Hz

Marker Time Resolution Sweep time/600

268 Chapter 7
8565E/EC Specifications and Characteristics
Amplitude Specifications

Amplitude Specifications

Measurement Range

Maximum Safe Input Power

Average Continuous Power +30 dBm (1 W)

(input attenuation ≥10 dB)

Peak Pulse Power +50 dBm (100 W) for pulse widths ≤10 μs and <1% duty cycle.
(input attenuation ≥30 dB)

DC Voltage <±0.2 V

Gain Compression

10 MHz to 2.9 GHz <1.0 dB

(≤−5 dBm at input mixer‡)

2.9 GHz to 6.46 GHz <1.0 dB

(≤0 dBm at input mixer†)

6.46 GHz to 26.8 GHz

(≤−3 dBm at input mixer)† <1.0 dB

26.8 GHz to 40 GHz

(≤0 dBm at input mixer)† <1.0 dB m (characteristic)

‡
Mixer level = input level − input attenuation.

Chapter 7 269
8565E/EC Specifications and Characteristics
Amplitude Specifications

Displayed Average Noise Level

With no signal at input, 1 Hz video bandwidth, and

0 dB input attenuation, tracking generator off.

Frequency Range 10 Hz RES BW 1 Hz RES BW

(Option 103) (Non-Option 103)

30 Hz (Option 006) <−80 dBm <−90 dBm

1 kHz (Option 006) <−95 dBm <−105 dBm

10 kHz <−110 dBm <−120 dBm

100 kHz <−110 dBm <−120 dBm

1 MHz to 10 MHz <−130 dBm <−140 dBm

10 MHz to 2.9 GHz

serial number prefix <3641A <−130 dBm <−140 dBm

serial number prefix ≥3641A <−135 dBm <−145 dBm

Option H13 <−135 dBm <−145 dBm

2.9 GHz to 6.46 GHz <−137 dBm <−147 dBm

6.46 GHz to 13.2 GHz <−133 dBm <−143 dBm

13.2 GHz to 22.0 GHz <−130 dBm <−140 dBm

22.0 GHz to 26.8 GHz <−126 dBm <−136 dBm

26.8 GHz to 31.15 GHz <−129 dBm <−139 dBm

31.15 GHz to 40 GHz <−120 dBm <−130 dBm*

40 GHz to 50 GHz <−117 dBm <−127 dBm*

* Refer to Resolution Bandwidth Usability.

270 Chapter 7
8565E/EC Specifications and Characteristics
Amplitude Specifications

Spurious Responses

All input-related spurious responses, except as noted below. Mixer Level* Distortion

10 MHz to 50 GHz −40 dBm <(−75 + 20 log N†) dBc

Second Harmonic Distortion

Applied Signal Frequency Range

1 MHz to 1.45 GHz (serial number prefix <3641A) −40 dBm <−72 dBc

20 MHz to 1.45 GHz (serial number prefix ≥3641A) −40 dBm <−79 dBc

20 MHz to 1.45 GHz (Option H13) −40 dBm <−79 dBc

1.45 GHz to 2.0 GHz −10 dBm <−85 dBc

2.0 GHz to 25 GHz −10 dBm <−90 dBc

Third Order Intermodulation Distortion

(with two signals at the input mixer, spaced by ≥1 kHz)*

Frequency Range

1 MHz to 2.9 GHz (serial number prefix <3641A) −30 dBm each <−78 dBc

20 MHz to 2.9 GHz (serial number prefix ≥3641A) −30 dBm each <−82 dBc

20 MHz to 2.9 GHz (Option H13) −30 dBm each <−82 dBc

2.9 GHz to 6.46 GHz −30 dBm each <−90 dBc

6.46 GHz to 26.8 GHz −30 dBm each <−75 dBc

26.8 GHz to 50 GHz (Characteristic) −30 dBm each <−85 dBc

Image Responses

Frequency Range

10 MHz to 26.8 GHz −10 dBm <−80 dBc

26.8 GHz to 50 GHz −30 dBm <−60 dBc

Multiple and Out-of-Band Responses

Frequency Range

10 MHz to 26.8 GHz −10 dBm <−80 dBc

26.8 GHz to 50 GHz −30 dBm <−55 dBc

* Mixer level = input level − input attenuation.

† N = harmonic mixing number

Chapter 7 271
8565E/EC Specifications and Characteristics
Amplitude Specifications

Residual Responses

>200 kHz with no signal at input, 0 dB input attenuation, N† 1 <−90 dBm

† N harmonic mixing number

Display Range

Amplitude Scale 10 vertical display divisions, with the reference level (0 dB) at the top
graticule line.

Calibration

LOG 10 dB/DIV for 100 dB display from reference level.*

5 dB/DIV for 50 dB display expanded from reference level.†

2 dB/DIV for 20 dB display expanded from reference level.

1 dB/DIV for 10 dB display expanded from reference level.†

LINEAR 10% of reference level per division over the top nine divisions

(all 10 divisions for RES BW ≤100 Hz) when calibrated in voltage.

* 10 dB/DIV for 70 dB display from reference level for RES BW ≤100 Hz when SPAN = 0 Hz.
† In E-Series instruments these scales are not available for sweep times < 30 ms without Option 007.

Accuracy

Reference Level Range

LOG, adjustable in 0.1 dB steps

Frequency Band Range

30 Hz to 31.15 GHz (Option 006) −120 dBm to +30 dBm

9 kHz to 31.15 GHz (Non-Option 006) −120 dBm to +30 dBm

31.15 GHz to 50 GHz −115 dBm to +30 dBm

LINEAR, settable in 1% steps

30 Hz to 31.15 GHz (Option 006) 2.2 μV to 7.07 V

9 kHz to 31.15 GHz (Non-Option 006) 2.2 μV to 7.07 V

31.15 GHz to 50 GHz 3.98 μV to 7.07 V

272 Chapter 7
8565E/EC Specifications and Characteristics
Amplitude Specifications

Reference Level Uncertainty

Frequency Response

(with 10 dB input attenuation)

Relative (referenced to midpoint between highest and lowest peak −10 °C to 55 20 °C to 30 °C

excursions) °C

30 Hz to 2.9 GHz (Option 006) <±1.0 dB <±0.8 dB

9 kHz to 2.9 GHz (Non-Option 006) <±1.0 dB <±0.8 dB

100 MHz to 2.0 GHz (serial number prefix ≥3641A) <±0.9 dB <±0.8 dB

2.9 GHz to 6.46 GHz <±1.7 dB <±1.4 dB

6.46 GHz to 13.2 GHz <±2.6 dB <±2.2 dB

13.2 GHz to 22.0 GHz <±2.5 dB <±2.5 dB

22.0 GHz to 26.8 GHz <±3.3 dB <±2.2 dB

26.8 GHz to 31.15 GHz <±3.1 dB <±2.9 dB

31.15 GHz to 50 GHz <±3.2 dB <±3.0 dB

Absolute (referenced to 300 MHz CAL OUTPUT)

30 Hz to 2.9 GHz (Option 006) <±1.5 dB <±1.0 dB

9 kHz to 2.9 GHz (Non-Option 006) <±1.5 dB <±1.0 dB

2.9 GHz to 6.46 GHz <±2.6 dB <±1.8 dB

6.46 GHz to 13.2 GHz <±3.0 dB <±2.8 dB

13.2 GHz to 22 GHz <±4.0 dB <±3.5 dB

22 GHz to 26.8 GHz <±4.5 dB <±4.0 dB

26.8 GHz to 31.15 GHz <±4.0 dB <±3.0 dB

31.15 GHz to 50 GHz <±4.0 dB <±4.0 dB

Band Switching Uncertainty

(Additional uncertainty added to Relative Frequency Response for measurements <±1.0 dB

between any two bands)

Calibrator Uncertainty

−10 dBm, 300 MHz <±0.3 dB

Chapter 7 273
8565E/EC Specifications and Characteristics
Amplitude Specifications

Input Attenuator Switching Uncertainty

(20 to 70 dB settings, referenced to 10 dB attenuation)

Frequency Range

9 kHz to 2.9 GHz <±0.6 dB/10 dB step, ±1.8 dB max.

30 Hz to 2.9 GHz (Option 006) <±0.6 dB/10 dB step, ±1.8 dB max.

IF Gain Uncertainty

(0 dBm to −80 dBm reference levels with 10 dB input attenuation) <±1.0 dB

Resolution Bandwidth Switching Uncertainty

(Referenced to 300 kHz resolution bandwidth at the reference level.)* <±0.5 dB

274 Chapter 7
8565E/EC Specifications and Characteristics
Amplitude Specifications

Pulse Digitization Uncertainty

(Pulse response mode, PRF >720/sweep time)

LOG

Resolution Bandwidth ≤ 1 MHz <1.25 dB peak-to-peak

Resolution Bandwidth = 2 MHz <3 dB peak-to-peak

LINEAR

Resolution Bandwidth ≤ 1 MHz <4% of reference level peak-to-peak

Resolution Bandwidth = 2 MHz <12% of reference level peak-to-peak

IF Alignment Uncertainty

(additional uncertainty when using 300 Hz RES BW only) <±0.5 dB

Chapter 7 275
8565E/EC Specifications and Characteristics
Amplitude Specifications

Scale Fidelity*

LOG

Incremental

0 to −90 dB range†

RES BW ≥ 300 Hz <±0.1 dB/dB

RES BW ≤ 100 Hz <±0.2 dB/2 dB

Cumulative

0 to −90 dB range†

RES BW ≥ 300 Hz <±0.1 dB/dB from the reference level to a maximum of ±0.85 dB

RES BW ≤ 100 Hz <±0.2 dB/2 dB from the reference level to a maximum of ±0.85 dB

0 to −100 dB range†

RES BW ≥ 300 Hz ±2.5 dB characteristic

RES BW ≤ 100 Hz maximum of ±1.5 dB

LINEAR <±3% of reference level

* Scale fidelity is not the same for RES BW ≤100 Hz as for RES BW ≥ 300 Hz. Therefore, signals not at the
reference level will experience an additional amplitude difference when switching between these two sets of
RES BW settings due to the differences in scale fidelity.
†
0 to −70 dB range for RES BW ≤100 Hz when SPAN = 0 Hz.

Marker Amplitude Resolution*

(Sweep time ≥ 30 ms)

Scale: LOG 10 dB/DIV (1/6) dB

LOG 5 dB/DIV (1/12) dB

LOG 2 dB/DIV (1/30) dB

LOG 1 dB/DIV (1/60) dB

LINEAR Reference Level/600

* For E-Series instruments without Option 007 markers are not available for sweep times < 30 ms with RES
BW ≥ 300 Hz. For Option 007, see the characteristics section.

276 Chapter 7
8565E/EC Specifications and Characteristics
Inputs and Outputs Specifications

Inputs and Outputs Specifications

CAUTION Any electrostatic discharge according to IEC 801-2/1991 to the center pins of any
of the connectors may cause damage to the associated circuitry.

IF INPUT

Connector SMA female, front panel

Input level for full-screen deflections −30 dBm ± 1.5 dB

(external mixing mode, 0 dBm reference level, 30 dB conversion loss)

GPIB

Connector IEEE-488 bus connector

Interface Functions SH1, AH1, T6, TE0, L4, LE0, SR1, RL1, PP1, DC1, DT1, C1, C28

Direct Plotter Output Supports Agilent 7225A, Agilent 7440A, Agilent 7470A, Agilent 7475A,
Agilent 7550A

Direct Printer Output Supports HP 3630A PaintJet, HP 2225A ThinkJet

CAL OUTPUT

Connector BNC female, front panel

Frequency 300 MHz ±(300 MHz × frequency reference accuracy†)

Amplitude −10 dBm ±0.3 dB

† Frequency Reference Accuracy = (aging × period of time since adjustment + initial achievable accuracy +
temperature stability).

1ST LO OUTPUT

Connector SMA female, front panel

Amplitude +16.5 dBm ±2.0 dB

10 MHz REF IN/OUT

Connector BNC female, rear panel

Output Frequency 10 MHz ±(10 MHz × frequency reference accuracy†)

†
Frequency Reference Accuracy = (aging × period of time since adjustment + initial achievable accuracy +
temperature stability).

Chapter 7 277
8565E/EC Specifications and Characteristics
General Specifications

General Specifications
Environmental Specifications

Military Specification per MIL-T-28800, Type III, Class 3, Style B (EC)/ Style C,(E) as follows:

Calibration Interval 1 year

Warmup 5 minutes from ambient conditions*

Temperature

Operating −10 °C to +55 °C (E) / 0 °C to +55 °C (EC)

Non-operating −51 °C to +71 °C

Humidity 95% at 40 °C for 5 days

Altitude

Operating 15,000 feet

Non-operating 50,000 feet

Rain resistance Drip-proof at 16 liters/hour/square foot

Vibration

5 to 15 Hz 0.060 inch peak-to-peak excursion

16 to 25 Hz 0.040 inch peak-to-peak excursion

26 to 55 Hz 0.020 inch peak-to-peak excursion

Pulse Shock

Half Sine 30 g for 11 ms duration

Transit Drop 8 inch drop on 6 faces and 8 corners

Power Main Voltage fluctuations within the range specified in the spectrum
analyzer “Power Requirements.”

Power Main Operating environment within the limits of installation category II

according to IEC 1010.

Pollution Operating environment within the limits of pollution degree 2

according to IEC 664.

278 Chapter 7
8565E/EC Specifications and Characteristics
General Specifications

Electromagnetic Compatibility

Conducted and radiated interference is in compliance with CISPR,

Publication 11 (1990).

Military Specification Meets the requirements of MIL-STD-461C, Part 2, with the

exceptions shown below:

Conducted Emissions

CE01 (Narrowband) 1 kHz to 15 kHz only

CE03 (Narrowband) Full limits

CE03 (Broadband) 20 dB relaxation from 15 kHz to 100 kHz

Conducted Susceptibility

CS01 Full Limits

CS02 Full Limits with 40 dB relaxation at IF frequencies. Refer also to

“Radiated Immunity” in Amplitude Characteristics.

CS06 Full Limits

Radiated Emissions

RE01 Test probe at 15 cm, front and rear panel search excluded.

RE02 Full limits to 1 GHz

Radiated Susceptibility

RS03 Limited to 3 V/m from 14 kHz to 1 GHz with 40 dB relaxation at IF

frequencies. Refer also to “Radiated Immunity” in Amplitude
Characteristics.

Chapter 7 279
8565E/EC Specifications and Characteristics
General Specifications

Power Requirements

115 Vac Operation

Voltage 90 V to 140 V rms

Current 3.2 A rms maximum

Frequency 47 Hz to 440 Hz

230 Vac Operation

Voltage 180 V to 250 V rms

Current 1.8 A rms maximum

Frequency 47 Hz to 66 Hz

Maximum Power Dissipation 180 W

Audible Noise <5.0 Bels, 20 °C to 30 °C (ISO DP7779)

Weight 20 kg (44 lb)

280 Chapter 7
8565E/EC Specifications and Characteristics
General Specifications

Dimensions

With Handle and Front Cover: Without Handle and Front Cover:

(A) 202 mm (7-15/16 in) high (B) 187 mm (7-3/8 in) high

(F) 503 mm (19-13/16 in) deep (E) 461 mm (18-1/8 in) deep

Chapter 7 281
8565E/EC Specifications and Characteristics
Frequency Characteristics

Frequency Characteristics
These are not specifications. Characteristics provide useful information about
instrument performance.

Frequency Reference Accuracy

Non-Option 103

Initial Achievable Accuracy <±2.2 × 10−8

(includes gravitational sensitivity, retrace,

and settability)

Daily Aging (average over 7 days after being <±5 × 10−10

powered on for 7 days)

Warmup

(Internal frequency reference selected)

After 5 minutes <±1 × 10−7 of final frequency* (0 °C to +55 °C)

<±1 × 10−6 of final frequency* (−10 °C)

After 15 minutes <±1 × 10−8 of final frequency* (−10 °C to +55 °C)

Option 103

Initial Achievable Accuracy <±1 × 10−6

* Final frequency is defined as frequency 60 minutes after power-on with analyzer set to internal frequency
reference.

Bandwidth Selectivity

RES BW ≤100 Hz <4.5:1

RES BW = 1 MHz <8:1

RES BW = 2 MHz <5.5:1

282 Chapter 7
8565E/EC Specifications and Characteristics
Frequency Characteristics

Impulse Bandwidth

RES BW 2 MHz 2.93 MHz ±10%

RES BW 1 MHz 1.60 MHz ±7%

RES BW 300 kHz 491 kHz ±7%

300 Hz ≤ RES BW ≤ 100 kHz 1.62 × RES BW ± 10%

Stability

Noise Sidebands

For frequencies ≤ 1 GHz, 100 kHz offset from carrier, and frequency span > ≤121 dBc/Hz
2 MHz

Chapter 7 283
8565E/EC Specifications and Characteristics
Frequency Characteristics

Figure 7-1 Noise Sidebands Normalized to 1 Hz BW vs. Offset from Carrier

Figure 7-2 Typical On-Screen Dynamic Range vs. Offset from 1 GHz Center Freq. for all
RBW's

284 Chapter 7
8565E/EC Specifications and Characteristics
Frequency Characteristics

Sweep

Sweep Time Accuracy

Span ≥100 Hz <±15%

Resolution Bandwidth Usability* (Non-Option 103)

RES BW Maximum Usable Frequency

Video Average OFF Video Average ON, 10 Video Averages

Source/Spectrum Analyzer Frequency References

Locked† Independent‡

≥30 Hz >50 GHz >50 GHz >26.5 GHz

10 Hz >50 GHz >50 GHz >15 GHz

3 Hz >50 GHz >50 GHz 2 GHz

1 Hz >50 GHz >50 GHz 200 MHz

Chapter 7 285
8565E/EC Specifications and Characteristics
Amplitude Characteristics

Amplitude Characteristics

Dynamic Range

Figure 7-3 Nominal Dynamic Range

Amplitude Measurement Range

Spurious Responses Frequency Range Distortion

(all input related spurious responses <1 kHz from the 10 MHz to 2.9 GHz <−55 dBc
carrier)

286 Chapter 7
8565E/EC Specifications and Characteristics
Amplitude Characteristics

Amplitude Accuracy

Band-to-Band Frequency Response (dB)

Frequency response uncertainty for measurements between any two internal mixing bands.
Equivalent to the sum of the two Relative Frequency Response values plus Band Switching
Uncertainty.

Band 0. 30 Hz to 2.9 GHz

Band 1. 2.9 GHz to 6.46 GHz
Band 2. 6.46 GHz to 13.2 GHz
Band 3A. 13.2 GHz to 22 GHz
Band 3B. 22 GHz to 26.8 GHz
Band 4. 26.8 GHz to 31.15 GHz
Band 5. 31.15 GHz to 50 GHz

Band-to-Band Frequency Response, 20 °C to 30 °C

(dB peak-to-peak)

Band 0 Band 1 Band 2 Band 3A Band 3B Band 4 Band 5

Band 0 n/a 3.2 dB 4.0 dB 4.3 dB 4.0 dB 4.7 dB 4.8 dB

Band 1 3.2 dB n/a 4.6 dB 4.9 dB 4.6 dB 5.3 dB 5.4 dB

Band 2 4.0 dB 4.6 dB n/a 5.7 dB 5.4 dB 6.1 dB 6.2 dB

Band 3A 4.3 dB 4.9 dB 5.7 dB n/a 5.7 dB 6.4 dB 6.5 dB

Band 3B 4.0 dB 4.6 dB 5.4 dB 5.7 dB n/a 6.1 dB 6.2 dB

Band 4 4.7 dB 5.3 dB 6.1 dB 6.4 dB 6.1 dB n/a 6.9 dB

Band 5 4.8 dB 5.4 dB 6.2 dB 6.5 dB 6.2 dB 6.9 dB n/a

Band-to-Band Frequency Response, −10 °C to 55 °C

(dB peak-to-peak)

Band 0 Band 1 Band 2 Band 3A Band 3B Band 4 Band 5

Band 0 n/a 3.7 dB 4.6 dB 4.5 dB 5.3 dB 5.1 dB 5.2 dB

Band 1 3.7 dB n/a 5.3 dB 5.2 dB 6.0 dB 5.8 dB 5.9 dB

Band 2 4.6 dB 5.3 dB n/a 6.1 dB 6.9 dB 6.7 dB 6.8 dB

Band 3A 4.5 dB 5.2 dB 6.1 dB n/a 6.8 dB 6.6 dB 6.7 dB

Band 3B 5.3 dB 6.0 dB 6.9 dB 6.8 dB n/a 7.4 dB 7.5 dB

Band 4 5.1 dB 5.8 dB 6.7 dB 6.6 dB 7.4 dB n/a 7.3 dB

Band 5 4.6 dB 5.3 dB 6.2 dB 6.1 dB 6.9 dB 6.7 dB n/a

Chapter 7 287
8565E/EC Specifications and Characteristics
Amplitude Characteristics

Input Attenuator Repeatability <±0.2 dB

Input Attenuator Accuracy

2.9 GHz to 18 GHz <±1.5 dB/10 dB step, ±3.0 dB max.

18 GHz to 26.8 GHz <±3.0 dB/10 dB step, ±6.0 dB max.

26.8 GHz to 50 GHz <±3.0 dB/10 dB step, ±6.0 dB max.

Pulse Digitization Uncertainty

(Pulse response mode, PRF >720/sweep time)

Standard Deviation <0.2 dB

288 Chapter 7
8565E/EC Specifications and Characteristics
Amplitude Characteristics

Marker Amplitude Resolution

EC-Series and E-Series with Option 007, sweep time < 30 ms,
zero span)

Scale: LOG 10 dB/DIV ≤ (1/2) dB

LOG 5 dB/DIV ≤ (1/4) dB

LOG 2 dB/DIV ≤ (1/10) dB

LOG 1 dB/DIV ≤ (1/20) dB

LINEAR ≤ Reference Level/200

Demodulation

Spectrum Demodulation

Modulation Type AM and FM (5 kHz peak deviation)

Audio Output Internal speaker and phone jack with volume control.

Pause Time at Marker Frequency 100 ms to 60 s

Radiated Immunity

Chapter 7 289
8565E/EC Specifications and Characteristics
Inputs and Outputs Characteristics

Inputs and Outputs Characteristics

CAUTION Any electrostatic discharge according to IEC 801-2/1991 to the center pins of any
of the connectors may cause damage to the associated circuitry.

INPUT 50Ω

Connector Precision 2.4mm Male, front panel

Impedance 50 Ω

VSWR (at tuned frequency)

<1.5:1 for <2.9 GHz and ≥10 dB Input Attenuation

<2.3:1 for <2.9 GHz and ≥10 dB Input Attenuation

LO Emission Level* (average)

10 dB Input Attenuation <−80 dBm

* Level of 1st LO, 3.0 to 6.8 GHz, present at INPUT 50Ω connector.

IF INPUT (Deleted on Option 002 and Option 327)

(2nd IF input for use with external mixers)

Connector SMA female, front panel

Impedance (dc coupled) 50 Ω

Frequency 310.7 MHz

Noise Figure 7 dB

1 dB Gain Compression Level −23 dBm

Full Screen Level −30 dBm

(Gain Compression and Full Screen Levels apply with 30 dB conversion

loss setting and 0 dBm reference level.)

1ST LO OUTPUT

Connector SMA female, front panel

Impedance 50 Ω

Frequency Range 3.0000 GHz to 6.8107 GHz†

†
3.8107 GHz to 6.8107 GHz for analyzers equipped with Option 002.

290 Chapter 7
8565E/EC Specifications and Characteristics
Inputs and Outputs Characteristics

CAL OUTPUT

Connector BNC female, front panel

Impedance 50 Ω

10 MHz REF IN/OUT

Connector BNC female, rear panel

Impedance 50 Ω

Output Amplitude 0 dBm

Input Frequency 10 MHz × (1±2×10−5)

Input Amplitude −2 to +10 dBm

External Reference Phase Noise

Analyzer noise sideband performance will not be degraded if the

external reference phase noise is within the limits given below.

Non-Option 103 <−135 dBc/Hz at 100 Hz offset

Option 103 <−110 dBc/Hz at 100 Hz offset

VIDEO OUTPUT*

Connector BNC female, rear panel

Impedance (dc coupled) 50 Ω

Amplitude (RES BW ≥300 Hz) 0 to +1 V full scale

Scaling

RES BW ≥300 Hz linear or log 100 dB/V

RES BW ≤100 Hz 4.8 kHz, auto-ranged level with dc offset

Chapter 7 291
8565E/EC Specifications and Characteristics
Inputs and Outputs Characteristics

LO SWP|FAV OUTPUT and

LO SWP|0.5 V/GHz OUTPUT*

Connector BNC female, rear panel

Impedance (dc coupled) 120 Ω

LO SWP OUTPUT (no load) 0 to + 10 V

0.5 V/GHz OUTPUT

Internal Mixer Mode 0.5 V/GHz of tuned frequency (no load)

External Mixer Mode ([(1.5 V/GHz) × LO frequency)] − 0.2054 V) ±50 mV

0.25 V/GHz OUTPUT† 0.25 V/GHz of tuned frequency (no load)

BLKG/GATE OUTPUT

Connector BNC female, rear panel

Impedance 50 Ω

Blanking Mode

Amplitude during sweep Low TTL Level

Amplitude during retrace High TTL Level

Gate Mode

Gate On High TTL level

Gate Off Low TTL level

EXT/GATE TRIG INPUT

Connector BNC female, rear panel

Impedance 10 kΩ

Trigger Level Settable to high TTL, or low TTL, or edge triggered

TTL

PROBE POWER (front panel)

Voltage +15 V dc, −12.6 V dc

Current 150 mA maximum, each

292 Chapter 7
8565E/EC Specifications and Characteristics
Inputs and Outputs Characteristics

EARPHONE

Connector 1/8 inch miniature monophonic jack, rear panel

Power Output 0.2 W into 4 Ω

2ND IF OUT

(Option 001 instruments only)

Connector SMA female, rear panel

Impedance 50 Ω

Frequency 310.7 MHz

Frequency Range 3 dB BW Noise Figure Conversion

Gain

10 kHz to 2.9 GHz

serial number prefix <3641A >28 MHz 25 dB −6 dB

serial number prefix ≥3641A >28 MHz 20 dB 1 dB

2.9 GHz to 6.5 GHz >30 MHz 22 dB −3 dB

6.5 GHz to 13.2 GHz >30 MHz 26 dB −7 dB

13.2 GHz to 22 GHz >30 MHz 30 dB −11 dB

22 GHz to 26.8 GHz >30 MHz 32 dB −13 dB

26.8 GHz to 31.15 GHz >28 MHz 24 dB −14 dB

31.15 GHz to 50 GHz >28 MHz 34 dB −14 dB

ALT SWEEP OUT

(Option 005 analyzers only)

Connector BNC female, rear panel

Impedance 100 Ω

Chapter 7 293
8565E/EC Specifications and Characteristics
Regulatory Information

Regulatory Information
The following information applies to the 8565EC spectrum analyzer.

294 Chapter 7
8565E/EC Specifications and Characteristics
Regulatory Information

The following information applies to the 8565E spectrum analyzer.

Chapter 7 295
8565E/EC Specifications and Characteristics
Regulatory Information

Notice for Germany: Noise Declaration

LpA < 70 dB am Arbeitsplatz (operator position) normaler Betrieb (normal
position) nach DIN 45635 T. 19 (per ISO 7779)

CE: European Community

The product design was approved for the European Community.

ISM1-A: Industrial Scientific and Medical Group 1, Class A

The instrument meets the requirements of CISPER 11, Clause 4.

CSA: Canadian Standards Association

The CSA mark is a registered trademark of the Canadian Standards Association.
The product meets the requirements.

IEC: International Electrotechnical Commission

296 Chapter 7
8 Using Performance Tests:
3335A Source not Available

297
Using Performance Tests: 3335A Source not Available
What You'll Find in This Chapter

What You'll Find in This Chapter

These procedures test the electrical performance of the spectrum analyzer against
the specifications. None of the test procedures requires removing the cover of the
instrument.
The Agilent 3335A Synthesizer Level Generator has been discontinued
and will neither be available from Agilent Technologies nor will technical support
be available after October of the year 2000. Because of the unavailability of the
Agilent 3335A, new performance test procedures were required that use different
signal sources. In the event that the Agilent 3335A is not available, substitute these
procedures for those of the same number found in Chapter 1 of Volume II, of the
Agilent 8560 E-Series and EC-Series Spectrum Analyzers Calibration Guide. If
you have an Agilent 3335A Synthesizer Level Generator you will find instructions
for all performance tests in Chapter 1, of Volume II, of the calibration guide.

298 Chapter 8
Using Performance Tests: 3335A Source not Available
Before You Start

Before You Start

There are three things you must do before starting performance verification or
operation verification:
1. Switch the analyzer on and let it warm up in accordance with warm-up
requirements in the specifications chapter.
2. After the analyzer has warmed up as specified, perform “Trace Alignment
Procedure and Reference Level Calibration” in the user's guide.
3. Read the rest of this section before you start any of the tests.

Test Equipment You'll Need

Table 8-2 lists the recommended test equipment for the performance tests. Any
equipment that meets the critical specifications given in the table can be
substituted for the recommended model (s). The table also lists the recommended
equipment for the analyzer adjustment procedures. The adjustment procedures are
located in the service guide.

Recording Test Results

Record test results in the performance test record located in Chapter 2 of volume
II, of the Agilent Technologies 8560 E-Series and EC-Series Spectrum Analyzers
Calibration Guide. The test record lists test specifications and acceptable limits.
We recommend that you make a copy of this table, record the complete test results
on the copy, and keep the copy for your calibration test record. This record could
prove invaluable in tracking gradual changes in test results over long periods of
time.

If the Analyzer Doesn't Meet Specifications

If the analyzer doesn't meet one or more of the specifications during testing,
complete any remaining tests and record all test results on a copy of the test record.
Refer to the user's guide chapter “If You Have A Problem”. If an error message is
displayed, press PRESET CAL, and select REALIGN LO & IF. If the error
message persists after the automatic RF, LO, and IF adjustments are completed,
refer to the troubleshooting information in the user's guide.

Calibration Cycle
The performance tests should be used to check the spectrum analyzer against its
specifications every two years for the Agilent 8560E/EC, Agilent 8561E/EC,
Agilent 8562E/EC, and Agilent 8563E/EC, and every one year for the
Agilent 8564E/EC and Agilent 8565E/EC.
The frequency reference must be adjusted and checked at the same time. Refer to
the “10 MHz Frequency Reference Adjustment” in the service guide.

Chapter 8 299
Using Performance Tests: 3335A Source not Available
Before You Start

Table 8-1 Required Performance Tests: Agilent 3335A Source Not Available

Test 8560E/EC 8561E/EC 8562E/EC 8563E/EC 8564E/EC 8565E/EC

11. Resolution Bandwidth √ √ √ √ √ √

Switching and IF
Alignment Uncertainty
12. Resolution Bandwidth √ √ √ √ √ √
Accuracy and Selectivity
13. Input Attenuator Switching √ √ √ √
Uncertainty
14. Input Attenuator Switching √ √
Uncertainty
15. IF Gain Uncertainty √ √ √ √ √ √
16. Scale Fidelity √ √ √ √ √ √
33. Second Harmonic √
Distortion
34. Second Harmonic √
Distortion
36. Frequency Response √
37. Frequency Response √
38. Frequency Response √
39. Frequency Response √
40. Frequency Response √
41. Frequency Response √
43. Third Order √
Intermodulation Distortion
44. Third Order √
Intermodulation Distortion
45. Third Order √ √
Intermodulation Distortion
46. Third Order √ √
Intermodulation Distortion

300 Chapter 8
Using Performance Tests: 3335A Source not Available
Required Test Equipment

Required Test Equipment

The following table lists the test equipment required to execute the performance
test in this chapter. These test originally required the use of the Agilent 3335A
Synthesizer Level Generator. For test equipment used in performance tests other
than those listed in this chapter, refer to Table 10-1 in Volume II of the calibration
guide.
Table 8-2 Recommended Test Equipment

Instrument Critical Specifications for Equipment Recommended Model Use

Substitution

Sources

4. Synthesized Signal Generator Frequency range: 250 kHz to 3 GHz Agilent E4421 or P,A
Agilent E4422,
Frequency resolution: 1 Hz
Agilent E4432,
Attenuator resolution: 0.02 dB Agilent E4433
Level accuracy: ±0.5 dB
External 10 MHz Ref. Input

Synthesized sweeper Frequency range: Agilent 83640B* P,A,T,

M,V
8560E, 10 MHz to 12.0 GHz Agilent 83630A
Agilent 8561E, 10 MHz to 12.0 GHz Opt 001, 008
Agilent 8562E, 10 MHz to 13.2 GHz
Agilent 8563E, 10 MHz to 26.5 GHz

Frequency accuracy (CW): 1 × 10−9/day

Leveling modes: Internal &External
Modulation modes: AM &Pulse
Power level range: −80 to +16 dBm

Synthesized sweeper Frequency range: Agilent 83650A P,A,T,

V
(for Agilent 8564E and Agilent Agilent 8564E, 10 MHz to 40.0 GHz Opt 001, 008
8565E)
Agilent 8565E, 10 MHz to 50.0 GHz

Frequency accuracy (CW): 1 × 10−9/day

Leveling mode: Internal
Power level range: −35 to +16 dBm

Function Generator Frequency Range: 100 kHz to 250 kHz Agilent 3324A or P
Frequency Accuracy: ±0.02% Agilent 33120A

Chapter 8 301
Using Performance Tests: 3335A Source not Available
Required Test Equipment

Table 8-2 Recommended Test Equipment (Continued)

Instrument Critical Specifications for Equipment Recommended Model Use

Substitution

Receivers

Measuring receiver Compatible w/power sensors Agilent 8902A* P,A,T,

M,V
dB relative mode
Resolution: 0.01 dB
Reference accuracy: <±1.2%

Sensors

Power sensor Frequency range: 10 MHz to 13.2 GHz Agilent 8481A* P,A,T,
M,V
(for 8560E, Agilent 8561E or Maximum SWR:
Agilent 8562E)
1.40 (10 to 30 MHz)
1.18 (30 to 50 MHz)
1.10 (50 MHz to 2 GHz)
1.18 (2 to 13.2 GHz)

Power sensor Frequency range: 100 kHz to 2.9 GHz Agilent 8482A* P,A,T,
Maximum SWR: M,V
1.1 (1 MHz to 2.0 GHz)
1.30 (2.0 GHz to 2.9 GHz)

Power sensor Frequency range: 50 MHz to 26.5 GHz Agilent 8485A* P,A,T,
(for Agilent 8563E) Maximum SWR: M,V
1.15 (50 to 100 MHz)
1.10 (100 MHz to 2 GHz)
1.15 (2.0 to 12.4 GHz)
1.20 (12.4 to 18 GHz)
1.25 (18 to 26.5 GHz)

302 Chapter 8
Using Performance Tests: 3335A Source not Available
Required Test Equipment

Table 8-2 Recommended Test Equipment (Continued)

Instrument Critical Specifications for Equipment Recommended Model Use

Substitution

Power sensor Frequency range: 50 MHz to 50 GHz Agilent 8487A P,V

(for Agilent 8564E and Agilent Maximum SWR:
8565E)
1.15 (50 to 100 MHz)
1.10 (100 MHz to 2 GHz)
1.15 (2.0 to 12.4 GHz)
1.20 (12.4 to 18 GHz)
1.25 (18 to 26.5 GHz)
1.30 (26.5 to 40 GHz)
1.50 (40 to 50 GHz)

Other Equipment

Digital voltmeter Range: −15 Vdc to +120 Vdc Agilent 3458A* A,T
Accuracy: <±1 mV on 10 V range
Input impedance: ≥1 M Ω

Probes

DVM test leads ≥36 inches, alligator clips, probe tips Agilent 34118A A,T

Accessories

Directional bridge Frequency range: 1 to 80 MHz Agilent 8721A P

Coupling: 6 dB (nominal)
Maximum coupling deviation: <1 dB
(nominal)
Directivity: 40 dB minimum
Impedance: 50 Ω (nominal)

Directional coupler Frequency range: 2.0 to 6.5 GHz 0955-0098 P

Coupling: 16.0 dB (nominal)
(forAgilent 8561E) Maximum coupling deviation: ±1 dB
(nominal)
(two required)
Directivity: 14 dB minimum
Flatness: 0.75 dB maximum
VSWR: <1.45
Insertion loss: <1.3 dB

Chapter 8 303
Using Performance Tests: 3335A Source not Available
Required Test Equipment

Table 8-2 Recommended Test Equipment (Continued)

Instrument Critical Specifications for Equipment Recommended Model Use

Substitution

Directional coupler Frequency range: 2.0 to 8.1 GHz 0955-0098 P

Coupling: 16.0 dB (nominal)
(for Agilent 8562E, Agilent 8563E, Maximum coupling deviation: ±1 dB
Agilent 8564E, and Agilent (nominal)
8565E)
Directivity: 14 dB minimum
(two required)
Flatness: 0.75 dB maximum
VSWR: <1.45
Insertion loss: <1.3 dB

10 dB step attenuator Attenuation range: 30 dB Agilent 8496G P,V

Option 001
Frequency range: dc to 80 MHz
Connectors: Type N (f)

1 dB step attenuator Attenuation range: 12 dB Agilent 8494G P,V

Option 001
Frequency range: dc to 80 MHz
Connectors: Type N (f)

Attenuator Driver Compatible with the Agilent 8496G and Agilent 11713A P,V
Agilent 8494G step attenuators.

Attenuator Interconnector Kit Type-N Agilent 11716A or P,V

For Agilent 8496G and Agilent 8494G Agilent 11716C
attenuators.

20 dB fixed attenuator Frequency range: dc to 18 GHz Agilent 8491B P,V

Attenuation accuracy: <±1 dB Option 020
Maximum SWR: 1.2 (dc to 2.9 GHz)

10 dB fixed attenuator Frequency range: dc to 18 GHz Agilent 8491B P,V

Attenuation accuracy: <±0.6 dB Option 010
Maximum SWR: 1.2 (dc to 2.9 GHz)

Termination (for 8560E) Frequency range: dc to 2.9 GHz Agilent 908A P,M,V
Impedance: 50 Ω
Maximum SWR: <1.10
Connector: Type N (m)

Low-pass filter Cutoff frequency: 50 MHz 0955-0306 P,M,V

Rejection at 65 MHz: >40 dB
Rejection at 75 MHz: >60 dB

304 Chapter 8
Using Performance Tests: 3335A Source not Available
Required Test Equipment

Table 8-2 Recommended Test Equipment (Continued)

Instrument Critical Specifications for Equipment Recommended Model Use

Substitution

Low-pass filter Cutoff frequency: 4.4 GHz Agilent 11689A P

RLC F-2634
(two required for Agilent 8561E, Rejection at 5.5 GHz: >40 dB
9135-0005
Agilent 8562E, Agilent 8563E,
Agilent 8564E, and Agilent 8565E)

Power splitter Frequency range: 1 kHz to 12 GHz Agilent 11667A P,A,M,

V
(for 8560E or Agilent 8561E) Insertion loss: 6 dB (nominal)
Output tracking: <0.25 dB
Equivalent output SWR: <1.22

Power splitter Frequency range: dc to 26.5 GHz Agilent 11667B

(forAgilent 8562E and Agilent Output tracking: <0.25 dB
8563E)
Insertion loss: 6 dB (nominal)
Equivalent output SWR: <1.22

Power splitter Frequency range: dc to 50 GHz Agilent 11667C

(for Agilent 8564E and Agilent Output tracking: <0.25 dB
8565E)
Insertion loss: 6 dB (nominal)
Equivalent output SWR: <1.22

Cables

Cable Connectors: SMA (m) 8120-1578 P

Length: 24 to 36 inches

Cable, 50 Ω coaxial Connectors: BNC (m) Agilent 10503A P,A,V

(four required) Length: ≥ 122 cm (48 in.)

Cable Frequency range: 30 Hz to 26.5 GHz 8120-4921 P,A,M,

V
(two required) Maximum SWR: <1.4 at 26.5 GHz
Maximum insertion loss: 3 dB
Connectors: APC 3.5 (m), both ends
Length: ≥ 61 cm (24 in.)

Adapters

Adapter Type N (m)-to-BNC (f) 1250-1476 P,A,V

(four required)

Adapter Type N (m)-to-N (m) 1250-1475 P

Chapter 8 305
Using Performance Tests: 3335A Source not Available
Required Test Equipment

306 Chapter 8
Using Performance Tests: 3335A Source not Available
Required Test Equipment

Using Agilent 11713A, Agilent 8494G, and Agilent 8496G

When using the programmable version of the 1 dB and 10 dB step
attenuator—Agilent 8494G and Agilent 8496G, respectively—the Agilent 11713A
attenuator/Switch Driver must be used to control the attenuators. The
Agilent 8594G 1 dB step attenuator should be connected as Attenuator X and the
Agilent 8496G 10 dB step attenuator should be connected as Attenuator Y.
Use Table 8-3 to determine the settings for Attenuator X and Attenuator Y to
achieve the desired attenuation value. In the Attenuator X and Attenuator Y
columns, a “1” indicates that the selection is on—the LED in the button will be lit.
An “0” in these columns indicates that the selection is off and the LED will be off.
For example, if the 1 dB step attenuator is to be set 2 dB and the 10 dB step
attenuator is to be set to 60 dB for a total of 62 db, then sections 2,6, and 7 should
be on (lit) and all other sections should be off.
Table 8-3 Agilent 11713A Settings for Agilent 8494G and Agilent 8496G

1 dB Step Attenuator X 10 dB Step Attenuator Y

Attenuator Attenuator
(dB) 1 2 3 4 (dB) 5 6 7 8

0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0

1 1 0 0 0 10 1 0 0 0

2 0 1 0 0 20 0 1 0 0

3 1 1 0 0 30 1 1 0 0

4 0 0 1 0 40 0 0 1 0

5 1 0 1 0 50 1 0 1 0

6 0 1 1 0 60 0 1 1 0

7 1 1 1 0 70 1 1 1 0

8 0 0 1 1 80 0 0 1 1

9 1 0 1 1 90 1 0 1 1

10 0 1 1 1 100 0 1 1 1

11 1 1 1 1 110 1 1 1 1

Chapter 8 307
Using Performance Tests: 3335A Source not Available
11a. Resolution Bandwidth Switching and IF Alignment Uncertainty

11a. Resolution Bandwidth Switching and IF Alignment

Uncertainty

Instrument Under Test

All 8560 E-Series and EC-Series except Option EMI

Related Specifications
Resolution Bandwidth Switching Uncertainty
IF Alignment Uncertainty

Related Adjustment
There is no related adjustment procedure for this performance test.

Description
A signal source is applied to the input of the spectrum analyzer, and an amplitude
reference is set with the RES BW at 300 kHz. At each of the analyzer resolution
bandwidth settings, the amplitude of the source is adjusted to place the signal at the
analyzer reference level. The source amplitude is compared with the amplitude at
the analyzer 300 kHz RES BW setting. The difference between the settings equals
the RES BW switching uncertainty. For the 300 Hz resolution bandwidth setting,
the difference between settings equals the sum of the resolution bandwidth
switching uncertainty and IF alignment uncertainty.

Figure 8-1 Resolution BW Switching and IF Alignment Uncertainty Test Setup

BNC Cable

10 MHz Ref 10 MHz Ref

Input In/Out SPECTRUM
SIGNAL ANALYZER
GENERATOR

Output 50 Input 50
ADAPTER ADAPTER

BNC Cable

wj11c

308 Chapter 8
Using Performance Tests: 3335A Source not Available
11a. Resolution Bandwidth Switching and IF Alignment Uncertainty

Equipment
Signal Generator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E4421B

Adapters
Type N (m) to BNC (f) (2 required) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1250-1476
Type N (f) to 2.4 mm (f) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11903B
(for Agilent 8564E and 8565E)

Cable
BNC, 122 cm (48 in.) (2 required) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10503A

Procedure
1. Connect the equipment as shown in Figure 8-1. The spectrum analyzer
provides the frequency reference for the Agilent E4421B.
2. Set the E4421B controls as follows:
Frequency . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50 MHz
Amplitude . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .−5 dBm
Amplitude increment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .0.02 dB
3. Press PRESET, CAL, and FULL IF ADJ on the spectrum analyzer. Wait for the
IF ADJUST STATUS: message to disappear, then set the controls as follows:
Center frequency . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50 MHz
Span . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 MHz
Log dB/division . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 dB
Resolution BW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 300 kHz
4. On the spectrum analyzer, press CAL and IF ADJ OFF. Press PEAK SEARCH,
MKR →, and MARKER → REF LVL. Wait for the completion of a new sweep.

5. Press PEAK SEARCH and MARKER DELTA.

6. Set the spectrum analyzer controls as follows:
Span . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 MHz
Resolution BW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 MHz
Video BW/Resolution BW ratio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .0.100
7. On the spectrum analyzer, press CAL and ADJ CURR IF STATE. Wait for the
IF ADJUST STATUS message to disappear.

Chapter 8 309
Using Performance Tests: 3335A Source not Available
11a. Resolution Bandwidth Switching and IF Alignment Uncertainty

8. On the spectrum analyzer, press PEAK SEARCH.

9. On the Agilent E4421B, press Amplitude and use the increment ⇓ and ⇑ keys to
adjust the amplitude until the marker amplitude displayed on the spectrum
analyzer reads 0 dB ±0.05 dB.
10. If the peak is still off the screen, repeat step 8 and step 9.
11. Record the E4421B amplitude setting in Table 8-4.
12. Calculate the amplitude difference by subtracting the E4421B Amplitude
setting from −5 dBm. Record the result as the amplitude difference in
Table 8-4.
Amplitude difference = E4421B Amplitude setting − (−5 dBm)
13. On the spectrum analyzer, set the span and resolution bandwidth to the next
settings listed in Table 8-4.
14. Repeat step 7 through step 13 for the remaining spectrum analyzer SPAN and
RES BW settings in Table 8-4. The 3 Hz and 1 Hz RES BW settings are not
available in analyzers with Option 103.

310 Chapter 8
Using Performance Tests: 3335A Source not Available
11a. Resolution Bandwidth Switching and IF Alignment Uncertainty

Table 8-4 Resolution Bandwidth Switching and IF Alignment Uncertainty

Spectrum Analyzer Settings Signal Amplitude Measurement

Generator Difference Uncertainty
Span Res BW Amplitude
(dBm) (dB) (dB)
E4421B

1 MHz 300 kHz −5 (Ref.) 0 (Ref.) ±0.10

10 MHz 2 MHz ±0.10

5 MHz 1 MHz ±0.10

500 kHz 100 kHz ±0.10

100 kHz 30 kHz ±0.10

50 kHz 10 kHz ±0.10

10 kHz 3 kHz ±0.10

5 kHz 1 kHz ±0.10

1 kHz 300 Hz ±0.10

500 Hz 100 Hz ±0.10

100 Hz 30 Hz ±0.10

100 Hz 10 Hz ±0.10

100 Hz 3 Hz* ±0.10

100 Hz 1 Hz* ±0.10

*
These bandwidths are not available in spectrum analyzers with Option 103.

Chapter 8 311
Using Performance Tests: 3335A Source not Available
12a. Resolution Bandwidth Accuracy and Selectivity

12a. Resolution Bandwidth Accuracy and Selectivity

Instrument Under Test

All 8560 E-Series and EC-Series, except Option EMI

Related Specifications
Resolution Bandwidth Accuracy
Resolution Bandwidth Selectivity

Related Adjustment
There is no related adjustment procedure for this performance test.

Description
The output of a signal source is connected to the input of the spectrum analyzer
through a precision step attenuator set. The spectrum analyzer is set to a span
approximately twice the resolution bandwidth setting (for measuring the −3 dB
bandwidth). The actual span error is determined by moving the source frequency
and comparing the measured frequency difference to the actual difference between
the two source frequencies.
The signal to the analyzer is then reduced in amplitude by 3 dB to determine the
actual −3 dB point. A marker reference is set and the signal amplitude is increased
by 3 dB to its previous level. A sweep is then taken and the markers are used to
measure the 3 dB bandwidth. The measured bandwidth is then corrected for the
span error and a percent error between the ideal bandwidth and the corrected
bandwidth is calculated and recorded.
The span error is not measured in the narrower spans. To measure the span error
accurately, the span-to-resolution bandwidth ratio should be approximately 100:1
with a resolution bandwidth ≥300 Hz. This criteria cannot be met in the narrower
spans.
The −60 dB bandwidths are measured in a similar manner, with the span set to
about 15 to 20 times the resolution bandwidth setting. The ratio between the
−60 dB and −3 dB bandwidths is calculated and recorded.
RES BW settings ≤100 Hz are not measured. These bandwidths are
digitally-derived; therefore, their accuracy and shape are guaranteed by design.

312 Chapter 8
Using Performance Tests: 3335A Source not Available
12a. Resolution Bandwidth Accuracy and Selectivity

Figure 8-2 Resolution Bandwidth Accuracy and Selectivity Test Setup

Equipment
Signal Generator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E4421B
Attenuator/Switch Driver . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11713A
1 dB Precision Step Attenuator. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8494G, Option 001
10 dB Precision Step Attenuator. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8496G, Option 001
Attenuator Interconnector Kit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11716A

Adapter
BNC (f) to type N (m) (3 required). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1250-1476
Type N (f) to 2.4 mm (f) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11903B
(for Agilent 8564E/EC and 8565E/EC)

Cable
BNC, 122 cm (48 in.) (3 required) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10503A

Procedure
1. Connect the equipment as shown in Figure 8-2. The spectrum analyzer
provides the frequency reference for the signal generator.

Chapter 8 313
Using Performance Tests: 3335A Source not Available
12a. Resolution Bandwidth Accuracy and Selectivity

NOTE The 11713A Attenuator/Switch Driver enables all attenuators upon powering up
the device. In order to view the signal, the Switch Driver Attenuator X and
Attenuator Y buttons must be off.

2. Set the Agilent E4421B controls as follows:

Frequency . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50 MHz
Amplitude . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . −5 dBm

3. Set the 1 dB and 10 dB step attenuators as follows:

Step Attenuators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .0 dB

4. On the spectrum analyzer, press PRESET, SAVE, SAVELOCK OFF, CAL, and
FULL IF ADJ. Wait for the IF ADJUST STATUS: message to disappear. Press
IF ADJ OFF. Set the controls as follows:

Center frequency. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50 MHz

Span . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 MHz
Log dB/division . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1 dB
Resolution BW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 MHz
Video BW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .300 Hz

Resolution Bandwidth Accuracy

5. Adjust the Agilent E4421B output amplitude to place the signal two to three
divisions (2 dB to 3 dB) below the reference level.
6. On the spectrum analyzer, press CAL and ADJ CURR IF STATE. Wait for the
IF ADJUST STATUS: message to disappear before continuing.
7. If the RES BW setting is 3 kHz or less, proceed directly to step 14.
8. Set the Agilent E4421B frequency to F1 as indicated in Table 8-5 for the
current RES BW setting of the analyzer.
9. On the spectrum analyzer, press SAVE, SAVE STATE, and STATE 0, then press
AUTO COUPLE, ALL, PEAK SEARCH, and MARKER DELTA.

10. Set the Agilent E4421B frequency to F2 as indicated in Table 8-5 for the
current RES BW setting of the analyzer.

314 Chapter 8
Using Performance Tests: 3335A Source not Available
12a. Resolution Bandwidth Accuracy and Selectivity

11. On the spectrum analyzer, press PEAK SEARCH. Record the Δ MKR
frequency reading as the actual SPAN measurement in Table 8-6 for the RES
BW setting to be measured.
12. On the spectrum analyzer, press RECALL, RECALL STATE, and STATE 0.
13. Set the Agilent E4421B frequency to 50 MHz.
14. Increase the 1 dB step attenuation to 3 dB. Note the 3 dB attenuator error by
subtracting the ideal attenuation from the attenuator calibration value (actual
attenuation):
dB error = Actual attenuation − Ideal attenuation
Example: −0.041 dB error = 2.959 dB − 3 dB
dB error = ________
15. On the spectrum analyzer, press PEAK SEARCH and MARKER DELTA.
16. Decrease the 1 dB step attenuation 3 dB.
17. On the spectrum analyzer, press SGL SWP and wait for the completion of a
new sweep.
18. Press MKR on the spectrum analyzer. Rotate the RPG knob counterclockwise
until the Δ MKR amplitude reads 0 dB plus the attenuation error calculated in
step 14 ±0.02 dB.
The marker should be on the left-hand skirt of the signal.
If the marker cannot be set exactly to 0 dB plus the attenuator error calculated
in step 13, note whether the marker is just above or just below the actual −3 dB
point.
19. Press MARKER DELTA, then rotate the RPG knob clockwise until the Δ MKR
amplitude reads 0 dB plus the attenuator error in step 13 ±0.02 dB.
The active marker should be on the right-hand skirt of the signal.
If the marker was set just above −3 dB in the previous step, set the marker just
below the −3 dB point.
If the marker was set just below the −3 dB point in the previous step, set the
marker just above the −3 dB point.
20. If the RES BW setting is 3 kHz or less, record the Δ MKR frequency reading as
the corrected −3 dB bandwidth in Table 8-6 and continue with step 23. There is
no need to correct for span accuracy.
21. Record the Δ MKR frequency reading as the measured −3 dB bandwidth in
Table 8-6 for the current RES BW setting.

Chapter 8 315
Using Performance Tests: 3335A Source not Available
12a. Resolution Bandwidth Accuracy and Selectivity

22. Calculate the corrected −3 dB bandwidth as shown below and record the result
in Table 8-6.
Corr −3 dB BW = (actual span / ideal span) × measured −3 dB BW
Example:
Resolution BW Setting = 1 MHz
Ideal Span = 1.0 MHz
Actual Span = 1.05 MHz
Measured −3 dB BW = 913 kHz

Corr −3 dB BW = (1.05/1.00) × 913 kHz = 958.65 kHz

23. Record the corrected −3 dB bandwidth in Table 8-6 for the current RES BW
setting.
24. Calculate the 3 dB BW error shown below and record the result in Table 8-6 for
the current RES BW setting.
3 dB BW error = 100 × (corr'd −3 dB BW − RES BW setting)/RES BW setting
Following the example above:
3 dB BW error = 100 × (0.95865 MHz − 1.0 MHz RES BW setting)/1.0 MHz
RES BW setting = −4.135%
25. On the spectrum analyzer, press MKR, MARKERS OFF, TRIG, and
SWEEP CONT.

26. Repeat step 6 through step 25 for the remaining RES BW and SPAN settings
listed in Table 8-5 and Table 8-6.

Resolution Bandwidth Selectivity

27. Set the spectrum analyzer controls as follows:

Span . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20 MHz
Resolution BW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 MHz
Video BW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .300 Hz
Log dB/division . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10 dB
28. Set the Agilent E4421B as follows:
Amplitude . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . −3 dBm
Amplitude increment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1 dB

316 Chapter 8
Using Performance Tests: 3335A Source not Available
12a. Resolution Bandwidth Accuracy and Selectivity

29. On the spectrum analyzer, press CAL and ADJ CURR IF STATE. Wait for the
IF ADJUST STATUS: message to disappear before continuing. Press
PEAK SEARCH.

30. Adjust the E4421B Amplitude until the spectrum analyzer MKR amplitude
reads 0 dBm ±1.00 dB.
31. Set the E4421B frequency to F1 as indicated in Table 8-7 for the current
spectrum analyzer RES BW setting.
32. On the spectrum analyzer, press MKR, MARKERS OFF, SAVE, SAVE STATE,
STATE 0, AUTO COUPLE, and ALL. If the RES BW setting is now less than
300 Hz, press BW, 300, and Hz.
33. Press PEAK SEARCH and MARKER DELTA.
34. Set the E4421B frequency to F2 as indicated in Table 8-7 for the current
spectrum analyzer RES BW setting.

35. Press PEAK SEARCH on the spectrum analyzer. Record the Δ MKR frequency
as the Actual SPAN Measurement in Table 8-8 for the current RES BW setting.
36. On the spectrum analyzer, press RECALL, RECALL STATE, STATE 0.
37. Set the E4421B frequency to 50 MHz.
38. Increase the 10 dB step attenuation to 60 dB. Note the 60 dB attenuator error
by subtracting the ideal attenuation from the attenuator calibration value (actual
attenuation):
dB error = Actual attenuation − Ideal attenuation
Example: −0.175 dB error = 60.175 dB − 60 dB
39. On the spectrum analyzer, press PEAK SEARCH and MARKER DELTA.
40. Decrease the 10 dB step attenuation to 0 dB.
41. On the spectrum analyzer, press SGL SWP and wait for the completion of a
new sweep.
42. Press MKR on the spectrum analyzer. Rotate the RPG knob counterclockwise
until the Δ MKR amplitude reads 0 dB plus the error calculated in step 37
±0.8 dB. The marker should be on the left-hand skirt of the signal. If the marker
cannot be set to exactly 0 dB, note whether the marker is just above or just
below the actual −60 dB point.

Chapter 8 317
Using Performance Tests: 3335A Source not Available
12a. Resolution Bandwidth Accuracy and Selectivity

43. Press MARKER DELTA on the spectrum analyzer. Rotate the RPG knob
clockwise until the Δ MKR amplitude reads 0 dB plus the attenuation error
calculated in step 38 ±0.8 dB. The active marker should be on the right-hand
skirt of the signal. If the marker was set just above the −60 dB point in the
previous step, set the marker just below the −60 dB point. If the marker was set
just below the −60 dB point in the preceding step, set the marker above the
−60 dB point.
44. Record the Δ MKR reading as the Measured −60 dB bandwidth in Table 8-8 for
the current RES BW setting.
45. Calculate the corrected −60 dB bandwidth as shown below, then record the
result in Table 8-8.
Corr −60 dB BW = (actual span/ideal span) × measured −60 dB BW
Example:
RES BW setting = 1 MHz
Ideal span = 16 MHz
Actual span = 17 MHz
Measured -60 dB BW = 9.82 MHz

Corr-60 dB BW = (17/16) x 9.82 MHz = 10.43

46. Record the corrected −60 dB BW in Table 8-8 for the current RES BW setting.
47. Calculate the selectivity by dividing the corrected −60 dB BW by the corrected
−3 dB BW from Table 8-6, then record the result in Table 8-8.
Selectivity = corr −60 dB BW / corr −3 dB BW
Example:
Selectivity = 10.43 MHz / 0.9415 MHz = 11.08
48. On the spectrum analyzer, press MKR, MARKERS OFF, TRIG, and
SWEEP CONT.

49. Repeat step 29 through step 48 for the remaining RES BW and SPAN settings
listed in Table 8-7 and Table 8-8.

318 Chapter 8
Using Performance Tests: 3335A Source not Available
12a. Resolution Bandwidth Accuracy and Selectivity

Table 8-5 −3 dB Bandwidth Instrument Settings

Spectrum Analyzer Settings Signal Generator Frequencies Measurement

Uncertainty
RES BW SPAN F1 (MHz) F2 (MHz) (%)

2 MHz 4 MHz 49.0 51.0 ±1.33

1 MHz 2 MHz 49.5 50.5 ±1.33

300 kHz 500 kHz 49.85 50.15 ±1.33

100 kHz 200 kHz 49.95 50.05 ±1.33

30 kHz 50 kHz 49.985 50.015 ±1.33

10 kHz 20 kHz 49.995 50.005 ±1.33

3 kHz 5 kHz N/A N/A ±1.33

1 kHz 2 kHz N/A N/A ±1.33

300 Hz 600 Hz N/A N/A ±1.33

Table 8-6 −3 dB Bandwidth Measurement Data

RES BW Span Measurement −3 dB BW Measurement 3 dB BW

Setting Error
Ideal Actual Measured Corrected (%)

2 MHz 2 MHz MHz MHz MHz

1 MHz 1.0 MHz MHz Hz MHz

300 kHz 300 kHz kHz KHz kHz

100 kHz 100 kHz kHz KHz kHz

30 kHz 30 kHz kHz KHz kHz

10 kHz 10 kHz kHz KHz kHz

3 kHz* N/A N/A KHz N/A

1 kHz* N/A N/A Hz N/A

300 Hz* N/A N/A Hz N/A

*Span Error Measurement not required for RES BW settings of 3 kHz and less.

Chapter 8 319
Using Performance Tests: 3335A Source not Available
12a. Resolution Bandwidth Accuracy and Selectivity

Table 8-7 −60 dB Bandwidth Instrument Settings

Spectrum Analyzer Settings Signal Generator Frequencies Measurement

Uncertainty
RES BW SPAN F1 (MHz) F2 (MHz) (%)

2 MHz 20 MHz 45.0 55.0 ±2.8

1 MHz 20 MHz 42.0 58.0 ±2.8

300 kHz 5 MHz 48.0 52.0 ±2.8

100 kHz 2 MHz 49.2 50.8 ±2.8

30 kHz 500 kHz 49.8 50.2 ±2.8

10 kHz 200 kHz 49.92 50.08 ±2.8

3 kHz 50 kHz 49.98 50.02 ±2.8

1 kHz 20 kHz 49.992 50.008 ±2.8

300 Hz 5 kHz 49.998 50.002 ±2.8

Table 8-8 −60 dB Bandwidth Measurement Data

RES BW Span Measurement −60 dB Bandwidth Selectivity

Setting
Ideal Actual Measured Corrected

2 MHz 10 MHz MHz MHz MHz

1 MHz 16 MHz MHz MHz MHz

300 kHz 4 MHz MHz MHz MHz

100 kHz 1.6 MHz MHz Hz Hz

30 kHz 400 kHz kHz kHz kHz

10 kHz 160 kHz kHz kHz kHz

3 kHz 40 kHz kHz kHz kHz

1 kHz 16 kHz kHz kHz kHz

300 Hz 4 kHz kHz kHz kHz

320 Chapter 8
Using Performance Tests: 3335A Source not Available
13a. Input Attenuator Switching Uncertainty: 8560E/EC, 8561E/EC, 8562E/EC, and
8563E/EC

13a. Input Attenuator Switching Uncertainty:

8560E/EC, 8561E/EC, 8562E/EC, and 8563E/EC

Instrument Under Test

8560E/EC
8561E/EC
8562E/EC
8563E/EC

Related Specification
Input Attenuator Switching Uncertainty

Related Adjustment
There is no related adjustment procedure for this performance test.

Description
This test measures the input attenuator switching uncertainty over the full 70 dB
range at 50 MHz. The signal generator is phase-locked to the spectrum analyzer
10 MHz reference. Switching uncertainty is referenced to the 10 dB attenuator
setting. The calibrated precision step attenuators are the measurement standard.
The input attenuator switching uncertainty at 2.9 GHz is measured using IF
substitution. The IF gains are characterized at 50 MHz.

Chapter 8 321
Using Performance Tests: 3335A Source not Available
13a. Input Attenuator Switching Uncertainty: 8560E/EC, 8561E/EC, 8562E/EC, and
8563E/EC
Figure 8-3 Input Attenuator Test Setup, 50 MHz

Figure 8-4 Input Attenuator Test Setup, >50 MHz

BNC Cable

SYNTHESIZED Frequency 10 MHz Ref SPECTRUM

Standard Ext In/Out
SWEEPER ANALYZER

RF Output Input 50
FIXED ATTENUATOR
ADAPTER ADAPTER

APC 3.5 Cable

wj113c

Equipment
Synthesized sweeper . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .83640B
Signal Generator. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E4421B
Attenuator/Switch Driver . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .11713A
1 dB Precision Step Attenuator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8494G, Option 001
10 dB Precision Step Attenuator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8496G, Option 001

322 Chapter 8
Using Performance Tests: 3335A Source not Available
13a. Input Attenuator Switching Uncertainty: 8560E/EC, 8561E/EC, 8562E/EC, and
8563E/EC
Attenuator Interconnector Kit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11716A
20 dB coaxial fixed attenuator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8491B (Option 020)
10 dB coaxial fixed attenuator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8491B (Option 010)

Adapters
Type N (m) to BNC (f) (4 required) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1250-1476
Type N (m) to APC 3.5 (f) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1250-1744
APC 3.5 (f) to APC 2.4 (f) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11901B

Cables
BNC, 122 cm (48 in.) (3 required) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10503A
APC 3.5 mm (36 in.). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8120-4921

Procedure

Attenuator Switching Uncertainty (50 MHz)

1. Connect the equipment as shown in Figure 8-3 using the Agilent 8491B Option
020. The spectrum analyzer provides the frequency reference for the E4421B.
2. Set the E4421B controls as follows:
Frequency . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50 MHz
Amplitude . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 dBm
3. Set the step attenuators to 60 dB.
4. On the spectrum analyzer, press PRESET, CAL and REALIGN LO &IF. Wait
for adjustments to complete. Then, set the controls as follows:
Center frequency . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50 MHz
Span . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0 Hz
Reference level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .−70 dBm
Log dB/division . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 dB
Resolution BW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 kHz
Video BW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 Hz

Chapter 8 323
Using Performance Tests: 3335A Source not Available
13a. Input Attenuator Switching Uncertainty: 8560E/EC, 8561E/EC, 8562E/EC, and
8563E/EC

5. Set the 1 dB step attenuator to 0 dB.

6. Adjust the source amplitude to place the signal 2 to 3 dB (two to three
divisions) below the spectrum analyzer reference level.
7. Enter the actual attenuation for the 10 dB attenuator setting (calibration data)
into Table 8-9.
For the 40 dB attenuator setting, use the attenuator calibration data section 4
setting and data.
8. To determine the values to be entered for each ideal Δ MKR reading in
Table 8-9, subtract the actual attenuation value from the attenuation value of
the 10 dB step attenuator recorded for the 60 dB step.
9. On the spectrum analyzer, press SGL SWP and SGL SWP.
10. Wait for a new sweep to finish. Press MKR and MARKER DELTA.
11. Set the 10 dB step attenuator to the next setting, as indicated under 10 dB step
attenuator setting in Table 8-9.
12. On the spectrum analyzer, set the reference level and the input attenuation to
the next settings as indicated in Table 8-9 as follows:
a. Press AMPLITUDE and REF LVL, then enter the indicated value and press
−dBm.

b. Press ATTEN, then enter the indicated value and press dB.
13. On the spectrum analyzer, press SGL SWP.
14. Wait for a sweep to finish. Record the Δ MKR amplitude in Table 8-9 as the
actual Δ MKR reading.
15. Repeat step 11 through step 14 for each 10 dB step attenuator setting in
Table 8-9.
16. For each analyzer attenuator setting in Table 8-9, other than 10 dB, subtract the
actual Δ MKR reading from the ideal Δ MKR reading and record the result as
the cumulative switching uncertainty (CSU).
CSU = ideal Δ MKR reading − corrected Δ MKR reading
17. For each analyzer attenuator setting from 20 dB through 70 dB in Table 8-9,
subtract the CSU value of the preceding setting from the current CSU value and
record the result in incremental switching uncertainty (ISU) column.
ISU = current CSU − previous CSU

324 Chapter 8
Using Performance Tests: 3335A Source not Available
13a. Input Attenuator Switching Uncertainty: 8560E/EC, 8561E/EC, 8562E/EC, and
8563E/EC
18. Set the step attenuator to 0 dB.
19. Set the E4421B controls as follows:
Frequency ................................................................................... 50 MHz
Amplitude ....................................................................................+5 dBm
RF Output ............................................................................................On
20. On the spectrum analyzer, press PRESET, CAL, REALIGN LO AND IF. Wait
for adjustments to complete. Then, set the controls as follows:
Center frequency . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50 MHz
Span . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0 Hz
Reference level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .−10 dBm
Attenuation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0 dB
Log dB/division . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 dB
Resolution BW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 kHz
Video BW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 Hz
21. Set the 1 dB step attenuator to 5 dB and replace the 8491B Option 020 with the
8491B Option 010 10 dB attenuator.
22. Adjust the source amplitude to place the signal 2 to 3 dB (two to three
divisions) below the reference level.
23. On the spectrum analyzer, press MKR and MARKER DELTA.
24. Enter the actual 10 dB step attenuator values in Table 8-10 using the attenuator
calibration data.
For the 40 dB attenuator step, use the attenuator calibration data section 4
setting and data.
25. Set the 10 dB step attenuator and the spectrum analyzer REF LVL according to
Table 8-10. Record the spectrum analyzer Δ MKR reading for each setting as
the actual Δ MKR reading.
26. For each 10 dB step attenuator setting in Table 8-10, add the Δ MKR reading to
the actual 10 dB step attenuator value. Record the result as the IF gain
deviation.

Chapter 8 325
Using Performance Tests: 3335A Source not Available
13a. Input Attenuator Switching Uncertainty: 8560E/EC, 8561E/EC, 8562E/EC, and
8563E/EC

Calculating IF Gain Correction

27. Calculate and record the IF gain correction factors in Table 8-11 as described in
the following steps:
28. For each IF gain correction entry, there is a pair of numbers in parentheses.
These numbers represent spectrum analyzer REF LVL settings from
Table 8-10.
29. Look up the IF gain deviation values in Table 8-10 that correspond to these
REF LVL settings.
a. Substitute test values for the numbers in parentheses in the IF gain
correction entry and calculate the correction value.
30. As an example, when calculating the IF gain correction for the 20 dB ATTEN
setting, look up the IF gain deviation values listed in Table 8-10 for the
−30 dBm and −20 dBm REF LVL settings.
If the IF gain deviation for the −30 dBm REF LVL is +0.2 dB and the IF
gain deviation for the −20 dBm REF LVL is −0.3 dB, then the IF gain
correction for the 20 dB ATTEN setting is:
(+0.2) − (−0.3) = +0.5 dB

Input Attenuator Switching Uncertainty, 2.9 GHz

31. Connect the equipment as shown in Figure 8-4 using the 8491B Option 010
10 dB attenuator. The spectrum analyzer provides the frequency reference for
the 83640B.
32. On the spectrum analyzer, press FREQUENCY, 2.9, and GHz.
33. On the spectrum analyzer, press AMPLITUDE, 10, −dBm, ATTEN, 10, +dBm,
MKR, and MARKERS OFF.

34. On the Agilent 83640B, press INSTR PRESET and set the controls as follows:
CW frequency . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2.9 GHz
Power level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0 dBm
35. On the spectrum analyzer, press MKR.
36. Adjust the 83640B POWER LEVEL for a spectrum analyzer MKR amplitude
reading of −13 dBm ±0.05 dB.
37. On the spectrum analyzer, press MKR, MARKER DELTA, AMPLITUDE,
ATTEN, 20, dB.

38. After a new sweep has finished, record the spectrum analyzer Δ MKR

326 Chapter 8
Using Performance Tests: 3335A Source not Available
13a. Input Attenuator Switching Uncertainty: 8560E/EC, 8561E/EC, 8562E/EC, and
8563E/EC
amplitude reading in Table 8-11 as the Δ MKR Reading.
39. Set the spectrum analyzer ATTEN to the settings indicated in Table 8-11.
Repeat step 38 for each ATTEN setting.
40. For each ATTEN setting in Table 8-11, subtract the IF gain correction from the
Δ MKR reading and record the result as the CSU.
41. For each analyzer attenuator setting from 20 dB through 70 dB, subtract the
CSU value of the preceding setting from the current CSU value and record the
result in Table 8-11 as the ISU.
ISU = current CSU − previous CSU
Table 8-9 Input Attenuator Switching Accuracy, 50 MHz

10 dB Step Spectrum Analyzer 10 dB Step Δ MKR Reading Results Uncertainty

Attenuator Attenuator
Setting REF LVL Atten Actual Ideal Actual CSU ISU Measurement
Attenuation

(dB) (dBm) (dB) (dB) (dB) (dB) (dB) (dB) (dB)

60 −70 10 0 0 0 0 0
(Ref.) (Ref.) (Ref.) (Ref.) (Ref.)

50 −60 20 ±0.14

40 −50 30 ±0.14

30 −40 40 ±0.12

20 −30 50 ±0.12

10 −20 60 ±0.12

0 −10 70 ±0.12

Chapter 8 327
Using Performance Tests: 3335A Source not Available
13a. Input Attenuator Switching Uncertainty: 8560E/EC, 8561E/EC, 8562E/EC, and
8563E/EC

Table 8-10 IF Gain Deviation

Spectrum 10 dB Step 10 dB Step Δ MKR Reading IF Gain Deviation

Analyzer Ref Lvl Attenuator Setting Attenuator Actual

(dBm) (dB) (dB) (dB) (dB)

−10 0 0 (Ref.) 0 (Ref.) 0 (Ref.)

−20 10

−30 20

−40 30

−50 40

−60 50

−70 60

−80 70

Table 8-11 Input Attenuator Switching Uncertainty, 2.9 GHz

Spectrum Δ MKR IF Gain Correction Uncertainty

Analyzer Reading
ATTEN CSU ISU Measurement

(dB) (dB) (dB) (dB) (dB) (dB)

10 0 (Ref.) 0 (Ref.) 0 (Ref.) 0 (Ref.) 0 (Ref.)

20 [(−30)− (−20)] ±0.23

30 [(−40)− (−20)] ±0.23

40 [(−50)− (−20)] ±0.23

50 [(−60)− (−20)] ±0.23

60 [(−70)− (−20)] ±0.24

70 [(−80)− (−20)] ±0.24

328 Chapter 8
Using Performance Tests: 3335A Source not Available
14a. Input Attenuator Switching Uncertainty: 8564E/EC and 8565E/EC

14a. Input Attenuator Switching Uncertainty: 8564E/EC

and 8565E/EC

Instrument Under Test

8564E/EC
8565E/EC

Related Specification
Input Attenuator Switching Uncertainty

Related Adjustment
There is no related adjustment procedure for this performance test.

Chapter 8 329
Using Performance Tests: 3335A Source not Available
14a. Input Attenuator Switching Uncertainty: 8564E/EC and 8565E/EC

Figure 8-5 Input Attenuator Test Setup, 50 MHz

Figure 8-6 Input Attenuator Test Setup, >50 MHz

BNC Cable

SYNTHESIZED Frequency 10 MHz Ref SPECTRUM

SWEEPER Standard Ext In/Out ANALYZER

RF Output Input 50
ADAPTER ADAPTER
APC 3.5 Cable

ADAPTER FIXED ATTENUATOR

wj110c

330 Chapter 8
Using Performance Tests: 3335A Source not Available
14a. Input Attenuator Switching Uncertainty: 8564E/EC and 8565E/EC

Attenuator Interconnector Kit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11716A

20 dB coaxial fixed attenuator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8491B (Option 020)
10 dB coaxial fixed attenuator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8491B (Option 010)

Adapters
Type N (m) to BNC (f) (4 required) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1250-1476
Type N (m) to APC 3.5 (f) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1250-1744
APC 2.4 (f) to APC 3.5 (f) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11901B
Type N (f) to 2.4 mm (f) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11903B

Cables
BNC, 122 cm (48 in.) (3 required) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10503A
APC 3.5 mm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8120-4921

Procedure

Attenuator Switching Uncertainty (50 MHz)

1. Connect the equipment as shown in Figure 8-5 using the 8491B Option 020.
The spectrum analyzer provides the frequency reference for the E4421B.
2. Set the E4421B controls as follows:
Frequency . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50 MHz
Amplitude . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10 dBm
RF Output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .On
3. Set the step attenuators as follows:
Step Attenuators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50 dB

Chapter 8 331
Using Performance Tests: 3335A Source not Available
14a. Input Attenuator Switching Uncertainty: 8564E/EC and 8565E/EC

4. On the spectrum analyzer, press PRESET, CAL, and REALIGN LO &IF. Wait
for adjustments to complete. Then, set the controls as follows:
Center frequency. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50 MHz
Span . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .0 Hz
Reference level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . −60 dBm
Log dB/division . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1 dB
Resolution BW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3 kHz
Video BW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1 Hz
5. Set the 1 dB step attenuator to 0 dB.
6. Adjust the source amplitude to place the signal 2 to 3 dB (two to three
divisions) below the spectrum analyzer reference level.
7. Enter the actual attenuation for the 10 dB attenuator setting (calibration data)
into Table 8-12.
For the 40 dB attenuator setting, use the attenuator calibration data section 4
setting and data.
8. To determine the values to be entered for each ideal Δ MKR reading in
Table 8-12, subtract the 10dB attenuation actual value from the 10dB step
attenuator actual value recorded for the 50 dB step.
9. On the spectrum analyzer, press SWP, and SGL SWP.
10. Wait for a new sweep to finish. Press MKR and MARKER DELTA.
11. Set the 10 dB step attenuator to the next setting, as indicated under 10 dB step
attenuator setting in Table 8-9.
12. On the spectrum analyzer, set the reference level and the input attenuation to
the next settings as indicated in Table 8-12 as follows:
a. Press AMPLITUDE and REF LVL, then enter the indicated value and press
−dBm.

b. Press ATTEN, then enter the indicated value and press dB.
13. On the spectrum analyzer, press SGL SWP.
14. Wait for a sweep to finish. Record the Δ MKR amplitude in Table 8-12 as the
actual Δ MKR reading.
15. Subtract the 10dB step attenuation actual attenuator value from the 10 dB step
attenuator setting and add the difference to the actual Δ MKR reading, then
record the sum as the corrected Δ MKR reading in Table 8-12.
16. Repeat step 11 through step 14 for each row of instrument settings in
Table 8-12.
17. For each analyzer attenuator setting in Table 8-12, other than 10 dB, subtract

332 Chapter 8
Using Performance Tests: 3335A Source not Available
14a. Input Attenuator Switching Uncertainty: 8564E/EC and 8565E/EC

the corrected Δ MKR reading from the ideal Δ MKR reading and record the
result as the cumulative switching uncertainty (CSU).
CSU = ideal Δ MKR reading − corrected Δ MKR reading
18. For each analyzer attenuator setting from 20 dB through 70 dB in Table 8-12,
subtract the CSU value of the preceding setting from the current CSU value and
record the result in incremental switching uncertainty (ISU) column.
ISU = current CSU − previous CSU

19. Set the E4421B controls as follows:

Frequency . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50 MHz
Amplitude . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .+5 dBm
Step Attenuators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0 dB
RF Output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .On
20. On the spectrum analyzer, press PRESET, CAL, and REALIGN LO AND IF.
When adjustments are complete, set the controls as follows:
Center frequency . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50 MHz
Span . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0 Hz
Reference level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .−10 dBm
Attenuation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0 dB
Log dB/division . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 dB
Resolution BW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 kHz
Video BW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 Hz
21. Set the 1 dB attenuator to 5 dB and replace the 8491B Option 020 with
the 8491B Option 010 10 dB attenuator.
22. Adjust the source amplitude to place the signal 2 to 3 dB (two to three
divisions) below the reference level.
23. On the spectrum analyzer, press MKR and MARKER DELTA.
24. Enter the actual 10 dB step attenuator values in Table 8-13 using the attenuator
calibration data.
For the 40 dB attenuator step, use the attenuator calibration data section 4
setting and data.

Chapter 8 333
Using Performance Tests: 3335A Source not Available
14a. Input Attenuator Switching Uncertainty: 8564E/EC and 8565E/EC

25. Set the 10 dB step attenuator and the spectrum analyzer REF LVL according to
Table 8-13. Record the spectrum analyzer Δ MKR reading for each setting as
the actual Δ MKR reading.
26. For each 10 dB step attenuator setting in Table 8-13, add the Δ MKR reading to
the actual 10 dB step attenuator value. Record the result as the IF gain
deviation.
a. Repeat Step 23-25 for each row of instrument settings in table 2a-12.

Calculating IF Gain Correction

27. Calculate and record the IF gain correction factors in Table 8-14 as described in
the following steps:

a. For each IF gain correction entry, there is a pair of numbers in parentheses.

These numbers represent spectrum analyzer REF LVL settings from
Table 8-13.
b. Look up the IF gain deviation values in Table 8-13 that correspond to these
REF LVL settings.
c. Substitute test values for the numbers in parentheses in the IF gain
correction entry and calculate the correction value.
As an example, when calculating Table 8-14 IF gain correction for the
20 dB ATTEN setting, look up the IF gain deviation values listed in
Table 8-13 for the −30 and −20 dBm REF LVL settings.
If the IF gain deviation for the −30 dBm REF LVL is +0.2 dB and the IF
gain deviation for the −20 dBm REF LVL is −0.3 dB, then the IF gain
correction for the 20 dB ATTEN setting is:
(+0.2) − (−0.3) = +0.5 dB

334 Chapter 8
Using Performance Tests: 3335A Source not Available
14a. Input Attenuator Switching Uncertainty: 8564E/EC and 8565E/EC

Input Attenuator Switching Uncertainty, 2.9 GHz

28. Connect the equipment as shown in Figure 8-6 using the 8491B Option 010
10 dB attenuator. The spectrum analyzer provides the frequency reference for
the 83640B.
29. On the spectrum analyzer press, MKR and MARKERS OFF.
30. On the spectrum analyzer press:
Frequency . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.9 GHz
Amplitude . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .−10 dBm
Attenuation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10 dBm
31. On the 83640B, press INSTR PRESET and set the controls as follows:
CW frequency . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.9 GHz
Power level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .0 dBm
32. On the spectrum analyzer, press MKR.
33. Adjust the Agilent 83640B POWER LEVEL for a spectrum analyzer MKR
amplitude reading of −13 dBm ±0.05 dB.
34. On the spectrum analyzer, press MKR, MARKER DELTA, AMPLITUDE,
ATTEN, 20, and dB.

35. After a new sweep has finished, record the spectrum analyzer Δ MKR
amplitude reading in Table 8-14 as the Δ MKR Reading (column 2).
36. Set the spectrum analyzer ATTEN to the settings indicated in Table 8-14.
Repeat step 30 for each ATTEN setting.
37. For each ATTEN setting in Table 8-14, subtract the IF gain correction from the
actual Δ MKR reading and record the result as the CSU.
38. For each attenuator setting from 20 through 60 dB, subtract the CSU value of
the preceding setting from the current CSU value and record the result in
Table 8-14 as the incremental switching uncertainty (ISU).
ISU = current CSU − previous CSU

Chapter 8 335
Using Performance Tests: 3335A Source not Available
14a. Input Attenuator Switching Uncertainty: 8564E/EC and 8565E/EC

Table 8-12 Input Attenuator Switching Accuracy, 50 MHz

10 dB Step Spectrum 10 dB Step Δ MKR Reading Uncertainty

Attenuator Attenuator
Setting REF Atten Actual Ideal Actual Corrected CSU ISU Measurement
LVL Attenuation

(dB) (dBm) (dB) (dB) (dB) (dB) (dB) (dB) (dB) (dB)

60 −70 10 0 0 0 0 0 0
(Ref.) (Ref.) (Ref.) (Ref.) (Ref.) (Ref.)

50 −60 10 0 0 0 0 0 0
(Ref.) (Ref.) (Ref.) (Ref.) (Ref.) (Ref.)

40 −50 20 ±0.14

30 −40 30 ±0.12

20 −30 40 ±0.12

10 −20 50 ±0.12

0 −10 60 ±0.12

336 Chapter 8
Using Performance Tests: 3335A Source not Available
14a. Input Attenuator Switching Uncertainty: 8564E/EC and 8565E/EC

Table 8-13 IF Gain Deviation

Spectrum Analyzer 10 dB Step 10 dB Step Δ MKR Reading IF Gain Deviation

Ref Lvl Attenuator Setting Attenuator
Actual

(dBm) (dB) (dB) (dB) (dB)

−10 0 0 (Ref.) 0 (Ref.) 0 (Ref.)

−20 10

−30 20

−40 30

−50 40

−60 50

−70 60

Table 8-14 Input Attenuator Switching Uncertainty, 2.9 GHz

Spectrum Δ MKR IF Gain Correction Uncertainty

Analyzer Reading (dB)
ATTEN (dB) (dB) CSU ISU Measurement

10 0 (Ref.) 0 (Ref.) 0 (Ref.) 0 (Ref.) 0 (Ref.)

20 [(−30)− (−20)] ±0.23

30 [(−40)− (−20)] ±0.23

40 [(−50)− (−20)] ±0.23

50 [(−60)− (−20)] ±0.23

60 [(−70)− (−20)] ±0.24

Chapter 8 337
Using Performance Tests: 3335A Source not Available
15a. IF Gain Uncertainty

15a. IF Gain Uncertainty

Instrument Under Test

All 8560 E-Series and EC-Series

Related Specification
IF Gain Uncertainty

Related Adjustment
IF Amplitude Adjustment

Description
This test measures the log (10 dB and 1 dB) and linear IF gain uncertainties. A
0 dBm signal is displayed near the reference level for each test. The input signal
level is decreased as the spectrum analyzer reference level is decreased (IF gain
increased). Since the signal level decreases in accurate steps, any error between the
reference level and the signal level is caused by the analyzer IF gain. The signal
generator is phase-locked to the spectrum analyzer 10 MHz reference.

Figure 8-7 IF Gain Uncertainty Test Setup

338 Chapter 8
Using Performance Tests: 3335A Source not Available
15a. IF Gain Uncertainty

Equipment
Signal generator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Agilent E4421B
10 dB coaxial fixed attenuator . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Agilent 8491B, Option 010
Attenuator/Switch Driver . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Agilent 11713A
1 dB Precision Step Attenuator. . . . . . . . . . . . . . Agilent 8494G, Option 001
10 dB Precision Step Attenuator. . . . . . . . . . . . . Agilent 8496G, Option 001
Attenuator Interconnector Kit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Agilent 11716A

Adapter
Type N (m) to BNC (f) (4 required) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1250-1476
Type N (f) to 2.4 mm (f) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Agilent 11903B
(for Agilent 8564E/EC and Agilent 8565E/EC)

Cable
BNC, 122 cm (48 in.) (3 required) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Agilent 10503A

Procedure
1. Connect the equipment as shown in Figure 8-7. The spectrum analyzer under
test provides the frequency reference for the Agilent E4421B.

Log Gain Uncertainty (10 dB Steps)

2. Set the Agilent E4421B controls as follows:

Frequency . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50 MHz
Amplitude . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . +10 dB
RF Output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .On
3. On the spectrum analyzer, press PRESET, CAL, and REALIGN LO &IF. Wait
for the adjustments to finish.

Chapter 8 339
Using Performance Tests: 3335A Source not Available
15a. IF Gain Uncertainty

4. Set the controls as follows:

Center frequency. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50 MHz
Span . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .0 Hz
Log dB/division . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1 dB
Resolution BW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1 kHz
Video BW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1 Hz
5. Set the step attenuators to 0 dB attenuation.
6. On the spectrum analyzer, press MKR.
7. Adjust the source amplitude to place the peak of the signal 2 to 3 dB (two to
three divisions) below the spectrum analyzer reference level.
8. On the spectrum analyzer, press SGL SWP, SGL SWP, MKR, and
MARKER DELTA.

9. Increase the 10 dB step attenuator setting by 10 dB.

10. Set spectrum analyzer reference level: AMPLITUDE, REF LVL, 10, −dBm, and
SGL SWP. Wait for the sweep to finish.

11. Record the spectrum analyzer Δ MKR amplitude reading in Table 8-15 as the
actual Δ MKR reading.
12. Repeat step 9 through step 11 for the remaining spectrum analyzer REF LVL
settings listed in Table 8-15.
13. Enter the calibrated attenuation values as the actual 10 dB attenuation in
Table 8-15 using the appropriate calibration data for the 10 dB step attenuator.
For the 40 dB attenuator step, use the attenuator calibration data section 4
setting and data.
14. Calculate the values for the corrected delta marker entries in Table 8-15 as
follows:
a. Calculate the attenuation error by subtracting the delta marker reading from
the step attenuator setting.
Atten Error = 10 dB step atten setting − Actual atten
b. Calculate the corrected delta marker by subtracting the attenuation error
from the actual delta marker reading.
Corrected Δ marker = Actual Δ marker reading − Atten error
c. Record this value as the corrected Δ marker value in Table 8-15

340 Chapter 8
Using Performance Tests: 3335A Source not Available
15a. IF Gain Uncertainty

Log Gain Uncertainty (1 dB Steps)

15. On the Agilent E4421B, set the amplitude to 10 dB.

16. Set the step attenuators to 0 dB.
17. Set the spectrum analyzer controls as follows:
Marker . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . normal
Reference level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .0 dBm
Log dB/division . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 dB
Trigger . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Continuous

18. Adjust the Agilent E4421B in 1 dB steps to place the signal 2 dB to 3 dB (two
to three divisions) below the spectrum analyzer reference level.
19. On the spectrum analyzer, press SGL SWP, SGL SWP, MKR, and
MARKER DELTA.

20. Increase the step attenuator setting by 1 dB.

21. On the spectrum analyzer, press AMPLITUDE, ⇓, and SGL SWP. Wait for the
sweep to finish.
22. Record the spectrum analyzer Δ MKR amplitude reading in Table 8-16 as the
actual Δ MKR reading.
23. Repeat step 20 through step 22 for the remaining spectrum analyzer REF LVL
settings listed in Table 8-16.
24. Enter the calibrated attenuation values as the actual 1 dB attenuation in
Table 8-16 using the appropriate calibration data for the 1 dB step attenuator.
For the 40 dB attenuator step, use the attenuator calibration data section 4
setting and data.
25. Calculate the values for the corrected delta marker entries in Table 8-16 as
follows:
a. Calculate the attenuation error by subtracting the delta marker reading from
the step attenuator setting.
Atten Error = 1 dB step atten setting − Actual atten
b. Calculate the corrected delta marker by subtracting the attenuation error
from the actual delta marker reading.
Corrected Δ marker = Actual Δ marker reading − Atten error
c. Record this value as the corrected Δ marker value in Table 8-16

Chapter 8 341
Using Performance Tests: 3335A Source not Available
15a. IF Gain Uncertainty

Linear Gain Uncertainty

26. On the Agilent E4421B, set the amplitude to 10 dB

27. Set the step attenuators to 0 dB.
28. Set the controls on the spectrum analyzer under test to the following:
Marker. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . normal
Reference level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0 dBm
Amplitude scale . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . linear
Amplitude . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . dBm
Trigger. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Continuous

29. Adjust the Agilent E4421B amplitude in 1 dB steps to place the signal two to
three divisions below the spectrum analyzer reference level. The marker should
read between −2 dBm and −3 dBm.
30. On the spectrum analyzer, press SGL SWP, SGL SWP, MKR, and
MARKER DELTA.

31. Increase the 10 dB step attenuator setting by 10 dB.

32. Set the spectrum analyzer REF LVL to −10 dBm.
33. On the spectrum analyzer, press SGL SWP.
34. Record the spectrum analyzer Δ MKR amplitude reading in Table 8-17 as the
actual Δ MKR reading.
35. Repeat step 31 through step 34 for the remaining spectrum analyzer REF LVL
settings listed in Table 8-17.
36. Enter the calibrated attenuation values as the actual 10 dB attenuation in
Table 8-17 using the appropriate calibration data for the 10 dB step attenuator.
For the 40 dB attenuator step, use the attenuator calibration data section 4
setting and data.

342 Chapter 8
Using Performance Tests: 3335A Source not Available
15a. IF Gain Uncertainty

37. Calculate the values for the corrected delta marker entries in Table 8-17 as
follows:
a. Calculate the attenuation error by subtracting the delta marker reading from
the step attenuator setting.
Atten Error = 10 dB step atten setting − Actual atten
b. Calculate the corrected delta marker by subtraction the attenuation error
from the actual delta marker reading.
Corrected Δ marker = Actual Δ marker reading − Atten Error
c. Record this value as the corrected Δ marker value in Table 8-17

Chapter 8 343
Using Performance Tests: 3335A Source not Available
15a. IF Gain Uncertainty

Table 8-15 Log IF Gain Uncertainty (10 dB Steps)

Spectrum 10 dB Step Attenuator Δ MKR Reading Measurement

Analyzer Uncertainty
REF LVL Setting Actual Actual Corrected
Attenuation

(dBm) (dB) (dB) (dB) (dB) (dB)

0 0 0 (Ref.) 0 (Ref.) 0 (Ref.) 0 (Ref.)

−10 10 ±0.11

−20 20 ±0.11

−30 30 ±0.11

−40 40 ±0.11

−50 50 ±0.12

−60 60 ±0.12

−70 70 ±0.12

−80 80 ±0.12

Table 8-16 Log IF Gain Uncertainty (1 dB Steps)

Spectrum 1 dB Step Attenuator Δ MKR Reading Measurement

Analyzer Uncertainty
REF LVL Setting Actual Actual Corrected
Attenuation

(dBm) (dB) (dB) (dB) (dB) (dB)

0 0 0 (Ref.) 0 (Ref.) 0 (Ref.) 0 (Ref.)

−1 1 ±0.11
−2 2 ±0.11
−3 3 ±0.11
−4 4 ±0.11
−5 5 ±0.12
−6 6 ±0.12
−7 7 ±0.12
−8 8 ±0.12
−9 9 ±0.12
−10 10 ±0.12
−11 11 ±0.12
−12 12 ±0.12

344 Chapter 8
Using Performance Tests: 3335A Source not Available
15a. IF Gain Uncertainty

Table 8-17 Linear IF Gain Uncertainty

Spectrum 10 dB Step Attenuator Δ MKR Reading Measurement

Analyzer Uncertainty
REF LVL Setting Actual Actual Corrected
Attenuation

(dBm) (dB) (dB) (dB) (dB) (dB)

0 0 0 (Ref.) 0 (Ref.) 0 (Ref.) 0 (Ref.)

−10 10 ±0.11

−20 20 ±0.11

−30 30 ±0.11

−40 40 ±0.11

−50 50 ±0.12

−60 60 ±0.12

−70 70 ±0.12

−80 80 ±0.12

Chapter 8 345
Using Performance Tests: 3335A Source not Available
16a. Scale Fidelity

16a. Scale Fidelity

Instrument Under Test

All 8560 E-Series and EC-Series

Related Specification
Log Fidelity
Linear Fidelity

Related Adjustment
IF Amplitude Adjustments
Log Amplifier Adjustments

Description
The 10 dB/div, 2 dB/div, and linear scales are tested for fidelity. The 10 dB/div
scale is tested in RES BW settings of 10 Hz and 300 Hz. A signal is set to the
reference level for each scale. As the signal amplitude is decreased, the displayed
signal amplitude is compared to the reference level.
Incremental log fidelity is calculated from the cumulative log fidelity data. The
nominal difference between the cumulative log fidelity data points selected is
12 dB for the 10 dB/div scale and 2 dB for the 2 dB/div scale. These differences
ensure that the uncertainty due to the marker amplitude resolution is less than
one-fourth of the specification.
The spectrum analyzer provides the 10 MHz reference to the signal generator.

346 Chapter 8
Using Performance Tests: 3335A Source not Available
16a. Scale Fidelity

Figure 8-8 Scale Fidelity Test Setup

Equipment
Signal generator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E4421B
10 dB coaxial fixed attenuator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8491B, Option 010
Attenuator/Switch Driver . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11713A
1 dB Precision Step Attenuator. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8494G, Option 001
10 dB Precision Step Attenuator. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8496G, Option 001
Attenuator Interconnector Kit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11716A

Adapter
Type N (m) to BNC (f) (4 required) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1250-1476
Type N (f) to 2.4 mm (f) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11903B
(for 8564E/EC and 8565E/EC)

Cable
BNC, 122 cm (48 in.) (3 required) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10503A

Chapter 8 347
Using Performance Tests: 3335A Source not Available
16a. Scale Fidelity

Procedure
1. Connect the equipment as shown in Figure 8-8. The spectrum analyzer
provides the frequency reference for the Agilent E4421B.
2. Set the Agilent E4421B controls as follows:
Frequency . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50 MHz
Amplitude . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . +10 dBm
Amplitude increment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0.04 dB
RF Output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . On
3. On the spectrum analyzer, press PRESET, CAL, REALIGN LO & IF. Wait for
the adjustments to finish. Set the controls as follows:
Center frequency. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50 MHz
Span . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .0 Hz
Resolution BW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .300 Hz
Video BW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .100 Hz
Sweep time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 s
4. Set the step attenuators to 0 dB.
5. On the spectrum analyzer, press MKR.

10 dB/Div Log Scale, RES BW ≥ 300 Hz

6. On the Agilent E4421B, press Amplitude and use the increment ⇓ and ⇑ keys to
adjust the amplitude until the spectrum analyzer marker reads exactly 0 dBm
±0.17 dB.
7. Enter the calibrated attenuation values as the actual attenuation in Table 8-18
using the appropriate step attenuator calibration data.
For the 40 dB and 4 dB attenuator step, use the attenuator calibration data
section 4 setting and data.
8. On the spectrum analyzer, press SGL SWP, MKR, MKRNOISE ON, and
MARKER DELTA. Press AMPLITUDE, MORE 1 OF 3, REF LVL OFFSET,
22.8, dB, and SGL SWP. The reference level offset effectively removes the
noise marker corrections for the envelope detector, log amplifiers, and noise
bandwidth correction.
9. Increase the step attenuator setting by 6 dB to the next value listed in
Table 8-18.

348 Chapter 8
Using Performance Tests: 3335A Source not Available
16a. Scale Fidelity

10. On the spectrum analyzer, press SGL SWP and wait for the completion of a
new sweep. Subtract 0.02 dB from the ΔMKR amplitude reading and record the
result as the actual ΔMKR reading in Table 8-18.

NOTE The noise marker subtracts 22.78 dB from the 32 data point average. The reference
level offset can only correct for 22.8 dB of this difference due to its 0.1 dB
resolution. Subtracting 0.02 dB from the ΔMKR reading corrects for the 0.02 dB
residual error.

11. Repeat step 9 and step 10 for each step attenuator setting in Table 8-18.
12. Calculate the correct values for the corrected delta marker entries in Table 8-18
as follows:
a. Calculate the attenuation error by subtracting the actual attenuation from the
total step attenuator setting.
Atten error = Total step attenuator setting − Actual attenuation
b. Calculate the corrected delta marker by subtracting the attenuation error
from the actual delta marker reading.
Corrected Δ marker = Δ marker reading − Atten error
c. Record this value as the corrected Δ marker value in Table 8-18

NOTE The log fidelity incremental error in the 10 dB/div scale is calculated only for
readings from −12 dB to −90dB from the reference level.

Chapter 8 349
Using Performance Tests: 3335A Source not Available
16a. Scale Fidelity

13. Calculate the incremental error for a given dB from REF LVL as follows:
a. Set current actual ΔMKR equal to the actual ΔMKR reading for the
current total step attenuator setting.
b. Set previous actual ΔMKR equal to the actual ΔMKR reading for the total
step attenuator setting listed in parenthesis in the incremental error column
for the current total step attenuator setting.
c. Calculate the incremental error as follows:
Incremental error (dB/dB) = (current ΔMKR − previous ΔMKR + 12 dB) /
12
For example, given:
Actual ΔMKR reading at −18 dB from REF LVL = −17.83 dB
Actual ΔMKR reading at −24 dB from REF LVL = −24.17 dB
Actual ΔMKR reading at −30 dB from REF LVL = −30.33 dB
The incremental error for the 30 dB total step attenuator setting
(−30.33 dB) is calculated as follows:
Incremental error = (−30.33 − (−17.83) + 12) / 12
= −0.50 / 12
= −0.042 dB/dB

d. Enter the result of the incremental error calculation in the Incremental

Error column of Table 8-18

350 Chapter 8
Using Performance Tests: 3335A Source not Available
16a. Scale Fidelity

10 dB/Div Log Scale, RES BW ≤ 100 Hz

14. Set the spectrum analyzer controls as follows:

Trigger . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Continuous
Reference level offset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0 dB
Markers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . off
Span . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100 Hz
Resolution BW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 Hz
Sweep time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Automatic
15. Set the Agilent E4421B controls as follows:
Amplitude . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .+10 dBm
Amplitude increment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .0.04 dB
16. Set the step attenuators to 0 dB.
17. On the spectrum analyzer, press PEAK SEARCH.
18. On the Agilent E4421B, press Amplitude and use the increment ⇓ and ⇑ keys to
adjust the amplitude until the spectrum analyzer marker reads exactly 0 dBm
±0.17 dB.
19. Enter the calibrated attenuation values as the actual attenuation in Table 8-19
using the appropriate step attenuator calibration data.
For the 40 dB and 4 dB attenuator step, use the attenuator calibration data
section 4 setting and data.
20. On the spectrum analyzer, press SGL SWP, PEAK SEARCH, and
MARKER DELTA.

21. Increase the step attenuator setting by 6 dB to the next value listed in
Table 8-19.

NOTE Increase the attenuator setting 4 dB for last two entries in Table 8-19

22. If the total step attenuator setting is ≥ 80 dB (40 dB, for example), press
SGL SWP and wait until a new sweep is completed. Press PEAK SEARCH and
record the ΔMKR amplitude as the actual ΔMKR reading in Table 8-19.
23. If the total step attenuator is >80 dB (+84 dB, for example), press TRIG,
CONT, BW, VID AVG ON, 1, 0, HZ, and wait for VAVG 10 to be displayed
above the graticule. Press SGL SWP and wait until a new sweep is completed.
Press PEAK SEARCH and record the ΔMKR as the actual ΔMKR reading in
Table 8-19.
24. Repeat step 21, step 22, and step 23 for each (nominal) step attenuator setting

Chapter 8 351
Using Performance Tests: 3335A Source not Available
16a. Scale Fidelity

in Table 8-19.
25. Calculate the correct values for the corrected delta marker entries in Table 8-19
as follows:
a. Calculate the attenuation error by subtract the actual attenuation from the
total step attenuator setting.
Error = Total step attenuator setting − Actual attenuation
b. Calculate the corrected delta marker by subtracting the attenuation error
from the actual delta marker reading.
Corrected Δ marker = Δ marker reading − Atten error
c. Record this value as the corrected Δ marker value in Table 8-19
26. Calculate the incremental error for a given dB from REF LVL as follows:
a. Set current actual ΔMKR equal to the actual ΔMKR reading for the
current total step attenuator setting.
b. Set previous ΔMKR equal to the ΔMKR reading for the total step attenuator
setting listed in parenthesis as the incremental error column for the
current total step attenuator setting.
c. Calculate the incremental error as follows:
Incremental error (dB/dB) = (current ΔMKR − previous ΔMKR + 12 dB) / 6
For example, given:
Actual ΔMKR reading at −18 dB from REF LVL = −17.83 dB
Actual ΔMKR reading at −24 dB from REF LVL = −24.17 dB
Actual ΔMKR reading at −30 dB from REF LVL = −30.33 dB
The incremental error for the −30 dB from REF LVL setting is
calculated as follows:
Incremental error = (−30.33 − (−17.83) + 12) / 6
= −0.50 / 6
= −0.083 dB/2 dB

d. Place the result of the incremental error calculation in the Incremental

Error column of Table 8-19.

352 Chapter 8
Using Performance Tests: 3335A Source not Available
16a. Scale Fidelity

2 dB/Div Log Scale

27. Set the spectrum analyzer controls as follows:

Trigger . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Continuous
Markers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . off
Log dB/division . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 dB
Span . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0 Hz
Resolution BW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 kHz
Video BW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 300 Hz
Sweep time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 s
Video average . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . off
28. Set the Agilent E4421B controls as follows:
Amplitude . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .+10 dBm
Amplitude increment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .0.02 dB
29. Set the step attenuators to 0 dB.
30. On the spectrum analyzer, press MKR.
31. On the Agilent E4421B, press Amplitude and use the increment ⇓ and ⇑ keys to
adjust the amplitude until the spectrum analyzer marker reads exactly 0 dBm
±0.03 dB.
32. Enter the calibrated attenuation values as the actual attenuation in Table 8-20
using the appropriate step attenuator calibration data.
For the 4 dB attenuator step, use the attenuator calibration data section 4 setting
and data.
33. On the spectrum analyzer, press SGL SWP, MKR, and MARKER DELTA.
34. Increase the step attenuator setting by 2 dB to the next value listed in
Table 8-20.
35. On the spectrum analyzer, press SGL SWP and wait for the completion of a
new sweep. Record the ΔMKR amplitude reading as the actual ΔMKR reading
in Table 8-20.
36. Repeat step 34 and step 35 for each step attenuator setting in Table 8-20.

Chapter 8 353
Using Performance Tests: 3335A Source not Available
16a. Scale Fidelity

37. Calculate the correct values for the corrected delta marker entries in Table 8-20
as follows:
a. Calculate the attenuation error by subtracting the actual attenuation from the
total step attenuator setting.
Atten error = Total step attenuator setting − Actual attenuation
b. Calculate the corrected delta marker by subtracting the attenuation error
from the actual delta marker reading.
Corrected Δ marker = Δ marker reading − Atten error
c. Record this value as the corrected Δ marker value in Table 8-20
38. From each ΔMKR reading in Table 8-20, subtract the previous ΔMKR reading.
Add 2 dB to this number. Divide this result by 2 dB and record the result as the
incremental error in Table 8-20.
Incremental error = (current ΔMKR − previous ΔMKR + 2) / 2

354 Chapter 8
Using Performance Tests: 3335A Source not Available
16a. Scale Fidelity

Linear Scale

39. Set the spectrum analyzer controls as follows:

Trigger . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Continuous
Amplitude scale . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . linear
Amplitude units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . dBm
40. Set the Agilent E4421B controls as follows:
Amplitude . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .+10 dBm
Amplitude increment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .0.02 dB
41. Set the step attenuators to 0 dB.
42. On the spectrum analyzer, press MKR, and MARKER NORMAL.
43. On the Agilent E4421B, press Amplitude and use the increment ⇓ and ⇑ keys to
adjust the amplitude until the spectrum analyzer marker reads exactly 0 dBm ±
0.02 dB.
44. Enter the calibrated attenuation values as the actual attenuation in Table 8-21
using the appropriate step attenuator calibration data.
For the 4 dB attenuator step, use the attenuator calibration data section 4 setting
and data.
45. On the spectrum analyzer, press SGL SWP, MKR, and MARKER DELTA.
46. Increase the attenuation setting of the step attenuators 2 dB or to the next value
listed in Table 8-21.
47. On the spectrum analyzer, press SGL SWP and wait for the completion of a
new sweep. Record the ΔMKR amplitude as the actual ΔMKR amplitude
reading in Table 8-21.
48. Repeat step 46 and step 47 for each step attenuator setting in Table 8-21.
49. Calculate the correct values for the corrected delta marker entries in Table 8-21
as follows:
a. Calculate the attenuation error by subtracting the actual attenuation from the
total step attenuator setting.
Atten error = Total step attenuator setting − Actual attenuation
b. Calculate the corrected delta marker by subtracting the attenuation error
from the actual delta marker reading.
Corrected Δ marker = Δ marker reading − Atten error
c. Record this value as the corrected Δ marker value in Table 8-21

Chapter 8 355
Using Performance Tests: 3335A Source not Available
16a. Scale Fidelity

Table 8-18 10 dB/Div Log Scale Fidelity (RES BW ≥300 Hz)

Step Attenuator Setting Actual Δ MKR Reading Incremental Measurement

Attenuation Error Uncertainty
1 dB 10 dB Total Actual Corrected
Step Step

(dB) (dB) (dB) (dB) (dB) (dB) (dB) (dB)

0 0 0 0 (Ref.) 0 (Ref.) 0 (Ref.) 0 (Ref.) 0 (Ref.)

6 0 6 N/A ±0.03
2 10 12 (0) ±0.04
8 10 18 (6) ±0.04

4a 20 24 (12) ±0.04

0 30 30 (18) ±0.04
6 30 36 (24) ±0.04
2 40a 42 (30) ±0.04

8 40a 48 (36) ±0.04

4 50 54 (42) ±0.04
0 60 60 (48) ±0.04
6 60 66 (54) ±0.04
2 70 72 (60) ±0.05
8 70 78 (66) ±0.05

4a 80 84 (72) ±0.05

0 90 90 (78) ±0.11
a. Use the attenuator calibration data section 4 setting and data.

356 Chapter 8
Using Performance Tests: 3335A Source not Available
16a. Scale Fidelity

Table 8-19 10 dB/Div Log Scale Fidelity (RES BW ≤100 Hz)

Step Attenuator Setting Actual Δ MKR Reading Incremental Measurement

Attenuation Error Uncertainty
1 dB 10 dB Total Actual Corrected
Step Step

(dB) (dB) (dB) (dB) (dB) (dB) (dB) (dB)

0 0 0 0 (Ref.) 0 (Ref.) 0 (Ref.) 0 (Ref.) 0 (Ref.)

6 0 6 N/A ±0.03
2 10 12 (0) ±0.04
8 10 18 (6) ±0.04

4a 20 24 (12) ±0.04

0 30 30 (18) ±0.04
6 30 36 (24) ±0.04
2 40a 42 (30) ±0.04

8 40a 48 (36) ±0.04

4 50 54 (42) ±0.04
0 60 60 (48) ±0.04
6 60 66 (54) ±0.04
2 70 72 (60) ±0.05
8 70 78 (66) ±0.05

4a 80 84 (72) ±0.05

0 90 90 (78) ±0.05

4a 90 94 N/A ±0.05

8 90 98 N/A ±0.05
a. Use the attenuator calibration data section 4 setting and data.

Chapter 8 357
Using Performance Tests: 3335A Source not Available
16a. Scale Fidelity

Table 8-20 2 dB/Div Log Scale Fidelity

Step Attenuator Setting Actual Δ MKR Reading Incremental Measurement

Attenuation Error Uncertainty
1 dB 10 dB Total Actual Corrected
Step Step

(dB) (dB) (dB) (dB) (dB) (dB) (dB) (dB)

0 0 0 0 (Ref.) 0 (Ref.) 0 (Ref.) 0 (Ref.) 0 (Ref.)

2 0 2 N/A ±0.03

4a 0 4 ±0.03

6 0 6 ±0.03
8 0 8 ±0.03
0 10 10 ±0.03
2 10 12 ±0.03

4a 10 14 ±0.03

6 10 16 ±0.03
8 10 18 ±0.03
a. Use the attenuator calibration data section 4 setting and data.

Table 8-21 Linear Scale Fidelity

Step Attenuator Setting Actual Attenuation Δ MKR Reading Measurement

Uncertainty
1 dB 10 dB Total Actual Corrected
Step Step

(dB) (dB) (dB) (dB) (dB) (dB) (dB)

0 0 0 0 (Ref.) 0 (Ref.) 0 (Ref.) 0 (Ref.)

2 0 2 ±0.03

4a 0 4 ±0.03

6 0 6 ±0.03
8 0 8 ±0.03
0 10 10 ±0.03
2 10 12 ±0.04

4a 10 14 ±0.04

6 10 16 ±0.04
8 10 18 ±0.04
a. Use the attenuator calibration data section 4 setting and data.

358 Chapter 8
Using Performance Tests: 3335A Source not Available
33a. Second Harmonic Distortion: 8560E/EC

33a. Second Harmonic Distortion: 8560E/EC

Instrument Under Test

8560E/EC

Related Specification
Second Harmonic Distortion

Related Adjustment
There is no related adjustment procedure for this performance test.

Description
A synthesized sweep generator and low-pass filter provide the signal for
measuring second harmonic distortion. The low-pass filter eliminates any
harmonic distortion originating at the signal source. The synthesized sweeper is
phase-locked to the spectrum analyzer 10 MHz reference. This test is performed at
an input frequency of 40 MHz.

Figure 8-9 Second Harmonic Distortion Test Setup

BNC Cable

SYNTHESIZED 10 MHz Ref 10 MHz Ref SPECTRUM

Input In/Out
SWEEPER ANALYZER

Output 50 Input 50

ADAPTER
ADAPTERS

BNC Cable
50 MHz LOW
PASS FILTER

wj17c

Equipment
Synthesized sweep generator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83640B
50 MHz low-pass filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0955-0306

Chapter 8 359
Using Performance Tests: 3335A Source not Available
33a. Second Harmonic Distortion: 8560E/EC

Adapter
Type N (m) to BNC (f)1250-1476
SMA (m) to BNC (f) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1250-1200
APC-3.5 (f) to 2.4 mm (f) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11901B

Cable
BNC, 122 cm (48 in) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10503A

Procedure
1. Connect the equipment as shown in Figure 8-9. The spectrum analyzer
provides the frequency reference for the synthesized sweeper.
2. Set the 83640B controls as follows:
Frequency . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40 MHz
Amplitude . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . −20 dBm
Amplitude increment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0.04 dB
RF Output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . On
3. On the spectrum analyzer, press PRESET. Set the controls as follows:
Center frequency. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40 MHz
Span . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 kHz
Reference level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . −30 dBm
4. On the spectrum analyzer, press PEAK SEARCH.
5. On the 83640B, adjust the output power level for a spectrum analyzer marker
amplitude reading of −30 dBm ±0.17 dB.
6. On the spectrum analyzer, press SGL SWP. Wait for the completion of the
sweep, then press PEAK SEARCH, MKR→, and MARKER → CF STEP.
7. Press MKR, MARKER DELTA, FREQUENCY, ⇑, and SGL SWP.
8. After the spectrum analyzer completes a new sweep, press PEAK SEARCH.
Record the Δ MKR amplitude reading as the Second Harmonic Distortion.

Second harmonic distortion: _______________________ dBc

(Measurement uncertainty: +1.87/−2.28 dB)

360 Chapter 8
Using Performance Tests: 3335A Source not Available
34a. Second Harmonic Distortion: Agilent 8561E/EC

34a. Second Harmonic Distortion: Agilent 8561E/EC

Instrument Under Test

8561E/EC

Related Specification
Second Harmonic Distortion

Related Adjustment
There is no related adjustment procedure for this performance test.

Description
A synthesized sweep generator and low-pass filter provide the signal for
measuring second harmonic distortion. The low-pass filter eliminates any
harmonic distortion originating at the signal source. The spectrum analyzer
frequency response is calibrated out for the >1.45 GHz test. The synthesized
sweeper is phase-locked to the spectrum analyzer 10 MHz reference.

Figure 8-10 Second Harmonic Distortion Test Setup, Band 0

BNC Cable

SYNTHESIZED 10 MHz Ref 10 MHz Ref SPECTRUM

Input In/Out
SWEEPER ANALYZER

Output 50 Input 50

ADAPTER
ADAPTERS

BNC Cable
50 MHz LOW
PASS FILTER

wj17c

Chapter 8 361
Using Performance Tests: 3335A Source not Available
34a. Second Harmonic Distortion: Agilent 8561E/EC

Figure 8-11 Second Harmonic Distortion Test Setup, Band 1

BNC Cable

SYNTHESIZED 10 MHz Ref SPECTRUM 10 MHz Ref

Input In/Out
SWEEPER ANALYZER

RF Output Input 50
ADAPTER

APC 3.5 Cable

ADAPTER
ADAPTER 4.4 GHz
LOW PASS FILTER
POWER
SPLITTER
MEASURING
RECEIVER

POWER
SENSOR
Sensor

wj112c

Equipment
Synthesized sweeper . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83640B
Measuring receiver. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8902A
Power sensor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8485A
50 MHz low-pass filter. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0955-0306
4.4 GHz low-pass filter (2 required) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11689A
Power splitter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11667B

Adapters
Type N (m) to BNC (f) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1250-1476
APC-3.5 (m) to Type N (m) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1250-1743
APC-3.5 (f) to Type N (m) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1250-1744
APC-3.5 (m) to BNC (f). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1250-1200
APC-3.5 (f) to 2.4 mm (f) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11901B

362 Chapter 8
Using Performance Tests: 3335A Source not Available
34a. Second Harmonic Distortion: Agilent 8561E/EC

Cables
BNC, 122 cm (48 in.) (2 required) Agilent 10503A
APC 3.5, 91 cm (36 in.) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8120-4921

Procedure

Second Harmonic Distortion, <1.45 GHz

1. Connect the equipment as shown in Figure 8-10, using the 50 MHz low-pass
filter. The spectrum analyzer provides the frequency reference for the
synthesized sweeper.
2. Set the Agilent 83640B controls as follows:
Frequency . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40 MHz
Amplitude . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .−20 dBm
Amplitude increment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .0.04 dB
RF Output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .On
3. On the spectrum analyzer, press PRESET. Set the controls as follows:
Center frequency . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40 MHz
Span . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 kHz
Reference level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .−30 dBm
4. On the spectrum analyzer, press PEAK SEARCH.
5. On the Agilent 83640B, adjust the output power level for a spectrum analyzer
marker amplitude reading of −30 dBm ±0.17 dB.
6. On the spectrum analyzer, press SGL SWP. Wait for the completion of the
sweep, then press PEAK SEARCH, MKR→, and MARKER → CF STEP.
7. Press MKR, MARKER DELTA, FREQUENCY, ⇑, and SGL SWP.
8. After the spectrum analyzer completes a new sweep, press PEAK SEARCH.
Record the Δ MKR amplitude reading as the second harmonic distortion
(<1.45 GHz).

Second harmonic distortion (<1.45 GHz): ____________________ dBc

Chapter 8 363
Using Performance Tests: 3335A Source not Available
34a. Second Harmonic Distortion: Agilent 8561E/EC

Second Harmonic Distortion, >1.45 GHz

9. Zero and calibrate the Agilent 8485A in LOG mode (readout in dBm). Enter
the power sensor 3 GHz calibration factor into the Agilent 8902A.
10. Connect the equipment as shown in Figure 8-11, without the filters in place.
11. On the spectrum analyzer, set the controls as follows:
Center frequency. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2.95 GHz
Center frequency step . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2.95 GHz
Reference level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0 dBm
Span . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10 kHz
Resolution BW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .300 Hz
12. On the Agilent 83640B, set the controls as follows:
CW frequency . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2.95 GHz
Power level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . −10 dBm
13. On the spectrum analyzer press TRIG, SWEEP CONT, MKR, MARKERS OFF,
and PEAK SEARCH.
14. Press AMPLITUDE, MORE 1 OF 3, MORE 2 OF 3, and PRESEL AUTO PK.

NOTE Wait for the PEAKING message to disappear before continuing to the next step.

15. On the Agilent 83640B, adjust the power level for a spectrum analyzer MKR
reading of −5 dBm.
16. On the Agilent 8902A, press RATIO. Enter the power sensor 6 GHz calibration
factor into the Agilent 8902A.
17. Set the Agilent 83640B frequency to 5.9 GHz.
18. On the spectrum analyzer press FREQUENCY, ⇑, and PEAK SEARCH.
19. Press AMPLITUDE, MORE 1 OF 3, MORE 2 OF 3, and PRESEL AUTO PK.

NOTE Wait for the PEAKING message to disappear before continuing to the next step.

364 Chapter 8
Using Performance Tests: 3335A Source not Available
34a. Second Harmonic Distortion: Agilent 8561E/EC

20. On the Agilent 83640B, adjust the power level for a spectrum analyzer MKR
reading of −5 dBm.
21. Record the Agilent 8902A reading here, as the frequency response error:

Frequency response error: __________________________ dB

22. Connect the equipment as shown in Figure 8-11, with the filter in place.
23. On the Agilent 83640B, set the controls as follows:
CW frequency . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.95 GHz
Power level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .−5 dBm
24. On the spectrum analyzer press MKR, MARKERS OFF, FREQUENCY, ⇓, and
PEAK SEARCH.

25. On the Agilent 83640B, adjust the power level for a spectrum analyzer marker
amplitude reading of 0 dBm.
26. On the spectrum analyzer press SGL SWP, SGL SWP, PEAK SEARCH,
MARKER DELTA, FREQUENCY, and ⇑.

27. Press AMPLITUDE, 30, −dBm, and SGL SWP.

NOTE In order to obtain proper readings, wait for the completion of a new sweep.

28. Press PEAK SEARCH. Record the Δ MKR amplitude reading here:

Δ MKR amplitude reading: ________________________ dBc

29. Algebraically add the frequency response error recorded in step 21 to the Δ
MKR amplitude reading in step 28. Record the result here, as the second
harmonic distortion (>1.45 GHz).

Second harmonic
distortion (>1.45 GHz): ___________________________ dBc

Chapter 8 365
Using Performance Tests: 3335A Source not Available
36a. Frequency Response: 8560E/EC

36a. Frequency Response: 8560E/EC

Instrument Under Test

8560E/EC

Related Specification
Relative Frequency Response
Absolute Frequency Response

Related Adjustment
Frequency Response Adjustment
LO Distribution Amplifier Adjustment

Description
For frequencies of 250 kHz and greater the output of a source is fed through a
power splitter. One output of the power splitter is fed to a power sensor and then to
a measuring receiver. The other output of the power splitter is fed to the spectrum
analyzer. The source power level is adjusted at 300 MHz to place the displayed
signal at the spectrum analyzer center horizontal graticule line. The measuring
receiver, used as a power meter, is placed in ratio mode. At each new source
frequency and spectrum analyzer center frequency, the source power level is
adjusted to place the signal at the center horizontal graticule line. The measuring
receiver displays the inverse of the frequency response relative to the calibrator.
For frequencies below 250 kHz the output of a function generator is fed through a
power splitter to an ac digital volt meter (ACDVM) and to the spectrum analyzer.
At each function generator frequency setting and spectrum analyzer center
frequency setting, the function generator power level is adjusted to place the
displayed signal at the spectrum analyzer center horizontal graticule line. The
ACDVM is used to measure the function generator output signal level in dBm.

366 Chapter 8
Using Performance Tests: 3335A Source not Available
36a. Frequency Response: 8560E/EC

Figure 8-12 Frequency Response Test Setup, 250 kHz to 2.9 GHz
BNC Cable

SPECTRUM 10 MHz Ref Frequency SIGNAL

MEASURING RECEIVER ANALYZER In/Out Standard Ext GENERATOR

Sensor
RF
Output

Input 50 W
POWER ADAPTER
SENSOR ADAPTER

POWER APC 3.5 Cable

SPLITTER
ADAPTER

wj15c

Figure 8-13 Frequency Response Test Setup, ≤250 kHz

Equipment
Measuring receiver . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8902A
Function Generator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3324A or 33127A
Signal generator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E4421B
AC Digital Voltmeter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3458A

Chapter 8 367
Using Performance Tests: 3335A Source not Available
36a. Frequency Response: 8560E/EC

Power sensor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8482A

Power splitter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11667A
Coaxial 50 Ω termination . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 908A

Adapters
Type N (m) to type N (m). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1250-1475
Type N (m) to BNC (f) (2 required). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1250-1476
Type N (m) to APC 3.5 (f) (2 required) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1250-1744
BNC (f) to Dual Banana Plug . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1251-2816
BNC Tee . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1250-0781

Cables
BNC, 122 cm (48 in) (2 required) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10503A
APC-3.5, 91 cm (36 in) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8120-4921
DVM test leads. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34118A

Procedure
1. Zero and calibrate the 8902A and the 8482A in log mode, as described in
the 8902A Operation Manual. Enter the power sensor 300 MHz calibration
factor into the 8902A.
2. Connect the equipment as shown in Figure 8-12.
3. On the E4421B, set the controls as follows:
CW frequency . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 300 MHz
Frequency increment. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100 MHz
Amplitude . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . −4 dBm
4. On the spectrum analyzer, press PRESET. Set the controls as follows:
Center frequency. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 300 MHz
Span . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .0 Hz
Reference level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . −5 dBm
dB/division . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1 dB
Resolution BW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .30 kHz
5. On the spectrum analyzer, press MKR.

368 Chapter 8
Using Performance Tests: 3335A Source not Available
36a. Frequency Response: 8560E/EC

6. On the Agilent E4421B, adjust the power level for a MKR amplitude of
−10 dBm ±0.05 dB.
7. Press RATIO on the Agilent 8902A.

DC Coupled Frequency Response (≥250 kHz)

8. On the spectrum analyzer, press AMPLITUDE, MORE 1 OF 3, and COUPLING

DC.

9. Set the Agilent E4421B frequency to 250 kHz.

10. On the spectrum analyzer, press FREQUENCY, CENTER FREQ, 250, and kHz.
11. On the Agilent E4421B, adjust the power level for a spectrum analyzer MKR
amplitude reading of −10 dBm ±0.05 dB.
12. Enter the 0.3 MHz power sensor calibration factor, indicated in Table 8-22, into
the Agilent 8902A.
13. Record the negative of the power ratio displayed on the Agilent 8902A as the
Agilent 8902A reading in Table 8-22. Record the power ratio here exactly as it
is displayed on the Agilent 8902A:

Agilent 8902A reading at 250 kHz: __________________ dB

14. Set the Agilent E4421B to 1.0 MHz.

15. On the spectrum analyzer, press FREQUENCY, CENTER FREQ, 1.0, and MHz.
16. On the Agilent E4421B, adjust the power level for a spectrum analyzer MKR
amplitude reading of −10 dBm ±0.05 dB.
17. Enter the 1 MHz power sensor calibration factor, indicated in Table 8-22, into
the Agilent 8902A.
18. Record the negative of the power ratio displayed on the Agilent 8902A, as the
Agilent 8902A reading in Table 8-22.
19. On the Agilent E4421B, set the frequency to the next value listed in Table 8-22.
20. On the spectrum analyzer, set the center frequency to the next value listed in
Table 8-22.
21. On the Agilent E4421B, adjust the power level for a spectrum analyzer MKR
amplitude reading of −10 dBm ±0.05 dB.
22. Enter the power sensor calibration factor, indicated in Table 8-22, into the
Agilent 8902A.
23. Record the negative of the power ratio displayed on the Agilent 8902A, as the
Agilent 8902A reading in Table 8-22.

Chapter 8 369
Using Performance Tests: 3335A Source not Available
36a. Frequency Response: 8560E/EC

24. To step through the remaining frequencies listed in Table 8-22, repeat step 19
through step 23.

AC Coupled Frequency Response (Š≥250 kHz)

25. On the spectrum analyzer, press AMPLITUDE, MORE 1 OF 3, and COUPLING

AC.

26. Set the Agilent E4421B to 250 kHz.

27. On the spectrum analyzer, press FREQUENCY, CENTER FREQ, 250, and
kHz.

28. On the Agilent E4421B, adjust the power level for a spectrum analyzer MKR
amplitude reading of −10 dBm ±0.05 dB.
29. Enter the 0.3 MHz power sensor calibration factor, indicated in Table 8-23, into
the Agilent 8902A.
30. Record the negative of the power ratio displayed on the Agilent 8902A as the
Agilent 8902A reading in Table 8-23. Record the power ratio here exactly as it
is displayed on the Agilent 8902A:

Agilent 8902A reading at 250 kHz: __________________ dB

31. Set the Agilent E4421B to 1.0 MHz.

32. On the spectrum analyzer, press FREQUENCY, CENTER FREQ, 1.0, and
MHz.

33. On the Agilent 83640B, adjust the power level for a spectrum analyzer MKR
amplitude reading of −10 dBm ±0.05 dB.
34. Enter the 0.1 MHz power sensor calibration factor, indicated in Table 8-23, into
the Agilent 8902A.
35. Record the negative of the power ratio displayed on the Agilent 8902A as the
Agilent 8902A reading in Table 8-23.
36. On the Agilent E4421B, set the frequency to the next value listed in Table 8-23.
37. On the spectrum analyzer, set the center frequency to the next value listed in
Table 8-23.
38. On the Agilent E4421B, adjust the power level for a spectrum analyzer MKR
amplitude reading of −10 dBm ±0.05 dB.
39. Enter the power sensor calibration factor, indicated in Table 8-23, into the
Agilent 8902A.
40. Record the negative of the power ratio displayed on the Agilent 8902A, as the
Agilent 8902A reading in Table 8-23.

370 Chapter 8
Using Performance Tests: 3335A Source not Available
36a. Frequency Response: 8560E/EC

41. To step through the remaining frequencies listed in Table 8-23, repeat step 36
through step 40.

DC Coupled Frequency Response (≤250 kHz)

42. On the spectrum analyzer, press AMPLITUDE, MORE 1 OF 3, and COUPLING

DC. Set the controls as follows:

Center frequency . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 250 kHz

Span . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100 Hz
Resolution BW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 Hz
Marker . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . off
Video BW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 Hz
43. On the Agilent 3324A, set the controls as follows:
Frequency . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 250 kHz
Amplitude . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .−4 dBm
Output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50 Ω
Amplitude increment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .0.01 dB
44. On the Agilent 3458A, set the controls as follows:
Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Sync AC Volts
Math. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . dBm
RES Register . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50 Ω
Front/Rear Terminal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Front
Resolution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7.5 digits
45. Connect the equipment as shown in Figure 8-13 with the Agilent 8482A power
sensor and Agilent 8902A connected to the power splitter.
46. Enter the power sensor calibration factor for 0.1 MHz into the Agilent 8902A.
47. Zero and calibrate the sensor.
48. Adjust the Agilent 3324A amplitude until the Agilent 8902A display reads the
same value as recorded in step 13.
49. Disconnect the Agilent 8482A and power sensor from the power splitter
connect the Agilent 3458A.

Chapter 8 371
Using Performance Tests: 3335A Source not Available
36a. Frequency Response: 8560E/EC

50. Record the Agilent 3458A reading here and in Table 8-24:

Agilent 3458A reading at 250 kHz: ________________ dBm

51. On the spectrum analyzer, press PEAK SEARCH and MARKER DELTA.
52. Set the spectrum analyzer CENTER FREQ and the Agilent 3324A frequency to
the next frequency listed in Table 8-24.
53. Press PEAK SEARCH on the spectrum analyzer.
54. Adjust the Agilent 3324A amplitude for a Δ MKR amplitude reading of
0.00 dBm ±0.05 dB.
55. Record the Agilent 3324A amplitude readings in Table 8-24 as the ACDMV
amplitude.
56. To step though the remaining frequencies listed in Table 8-24, repeat step 52
through step 55.
57. For each of the frequencies listed in Table 8-24, subtract the ACDVM
amplitude reading from the ACDVM reading at 250 kHz recorded in step 50.
Record the results as the response relative to 250 kHz in Table 8-24.
58. Add to each of the response relative to 250 kHz entries in Table 8-24, the
Agilent 8902A reading for 250 kHz listed in Table 8-22. Record the results as
the response relative to 300 MHz in Table 8-24.

372 Chapter 8
Using Performance Tests: 3335A Source not Available
36a. Frequency Response: 8560E/EC

Test Results

59. Record dc coupled frequency response results below:

a. Enter the most positive number from Table 8-24, column ______________ dB
4.

b. Enter the most positive number from Table 8-22, column ______________ dB
2.

c. Of (a) and (b), enter whichever number is more positive. ______________ dB

d. Enter the most negative number from Table 8-24, column ______________ dB
4.

e. Enter the most negative number from Table 8-22, column ______________ dB
2.

f. Of (d) and (e), enter whichever number is more negative. ______________ dB

g. Subtract (f) from (c). ______________ dB

60. Record ac coupled frequency response results below:

a. Enter the most positive number from Table 8-23, column _______________ dB
2.

b. Enter the most negative number from Table 8-23, column _______________ dB
2.

g. Subtract (b) from (a). _______________ dB

61. This step applies only to spectrum analyzers with serial number prefixes 3632A
and later. Record the dc coupled frequency response results over the 100 MHz
to 2.9 GHz range:

a. Enter the most positive number from Table 8-22, column _______________ dB
2, for center frequencies between 100 MHz and 2.9 GHz.

b. Enter the most negative number from Table 8-22, column _______________ dB
2, for center frequencies between 100 MHz and 2.9 GHz.

c. Subtract (b) from (a). _______________ dB

Chapter 8 373
Using Performance Tests: 3335A Source not Available
36a. Frequency Response: 8560E/EC

Table 8-22 DC Coupled Frequency Response (≥250 kHz)

Source Agilent Pwr Sensor Measurement
Frequency 8902A Cal Factor Uncertainty
Reading Frequency

(MHz) (dB) (MHz) (dB)

0.250 0.3 +0.32/−0.34
1 1 +0.32/−0.34
10 10 +0.32/−0.34
20 10 +0.32/−0.34
50 30 +0.32/−0.34
90 100 +0.32/-0.34
100 100 +0.32/−0.34
200 300 +0.32/−0.34
300 300 +0.32/−0.34
400 300 +0.32/−0.34
500 300 +0.32/−0.34
600 1000 +0.32/−0.34
700 1000 +0.32/−0.34
800 1000 +0.32/−0.34
900 1000 +0.32/−0.34
1000 1000 +0.32/−0.34
1100 1000 +0.32/−0.34
1200 1000 +0.32/−0.34
1300 1000 +0.32/−0.34
1400 1000 +0.32/−0.34
1500 1000 +0.32/−0.34
1600 2000 +0.32/−0.34
1700 2000 +0.32/−0.34
1800 2000 +0.32/−0.34
1900 2000 +0.32/−0.34
2000 2000 +0.32/−0.34
2100 2000 +0.32/−0.34
2200 2000 +0.32/−0.34
2300 2000 +0.32/−0.34
2400 2000 +0.32/−0.34
2500 2000 +0.32/−0.34
2600 3000 +0.32/−0.34
2700 3000 +0.32/−0.34
2800 3000 +0.32/−0.34
2900 3000 +0.32/−0.34

374 Chapter 8
Using Performance Tests: 3335A Source not Available
36a. Frequency Response: 8560E/EC

Table 8-23 AC Coupled Frequency Response (≥250 kHz)

Column 1 Column 2 Column 3 Cal Column 4
Frequency Agilent Factor Measurement
(MHz) 8902A Frequency Uncertainty
Reading (MHz) (dB)
(dB)
0.250 0.3 +0.32/−0.34
1 1 +0.32/−0.34
10 10 +0.32/−0.34
20 10 +0.32/−0.34
50 30 +0.32/−0.34
90 100 +0.32/-0.34
100 100 +0.32/−0.34
200 300 +0.32/−0.34
300 300 +0.32/−0.34
400 300 +0.32/−0.34
500 300 +0.32/−0.34
600 1000 +0.32/−0.34
700 1000 +0.32/−0.34
800 1000 +0.32/−0.34
900 1000 +0.32/−0.34
1000 1000 +0.32/−0.34
1100 1000 +0.32/−0.34
1200 1000 +0.32/−0.34
1300 1000 +0.32/−0.34
1400 1000 +0.32/−0.34
1500 1000 +0.32/−0.34
1600 2000 +0.32/−0.34
1700 2000 +0.32/−0.34
1800 2000 +0.32/−0.34
1900 2000 +0.32/−0.34
2000 2000 +0.32/−0.34
2100 2000 +0.32/−0.34
2200 2000 +0.32/−0.34
2300 2000 +0.32/−0.34
2400 2000 +0.32/−0.34
2500 2000 +0.32/−0.34
2600 3000 +0.32/−0.34
2700 3000 +0.32/−0.34
2800 3000 +0.32/−0.34
2900 3000 +0.32/−0.34

Chapter 8 375
Using Performance Tests: 3335A Source not Available
36a. Frequency Response: 8560E/EC

Table 8-24 DC Coupled Frequency Response (<250 kHz)

Function ACDVM Response Response Measurement

Generator Amplitude Relative to Relative to Uncertainty
Frequency (dBm) 250 kHz 300 MHz (dB)

250 kHz 0 (Ref) +0.27/−0.28

100 kHz ±0.23

10 kHz ±0.23

1 kHz ±0.23

500 Hz ±0.23

200 Hz ±0.23

376 Chapter 8
Using Performance Tests: 3335A Source not Available
37a. Frequency Response: 8561E/EC

37a. Frequency Response: 8561E/EC

Instrument Under Test

8561E/EC

Related Specification
Relative Frequency Response
Absolute Frequency Response
Band Switching Uncertainty

Related Adjustment
Frequency Response Adjustment
LO Distribution Amplifier Adjustment

Chapter 8 377
Using Performance Tests: 3335A Source not Available
37a. Frequency Response: 8561E/EC

Figure 8-14 Frequency Response Test Setup, 250 kHz to 2.9 GHz
BNC Cable

SPECTRUM 10 MHz Ref Frequency SIGNAL

MEASURING RECEIVER ANALYZER In/Out Standard Ext GENERATOR

Sensor
RF
Output

Input 50 W
POWER ADAPTER
SENSOR ADAPTER

POWER APC 3.5 Cable

SPLITTER
ADAPTER

wj15c

Figure 8-15 Frequency Response Test Setup, 2.9 MHz to 6.5 GHz

Figure 8-16 Frequency Response Test Setup, ≤250 kHz

378 Chapter 8
Using Performance Tests: 3335A Source not Available
37a. Frequency Response: 8561E/EC

Equipment
Measuring receiver . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8902A
Synthesized sweeper . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83640B
Function Generator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3324A or 33127A
Signal generator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E4421B
AC Digital Voltmeter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3458A
Power sensor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8481A
Power sensor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8482A
Power splitter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11667A
Coaxial 50 Ω termination . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 908A

Adapters
APC-3.5 (f) to 2.4 mm (f) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11901B
Type N (m) to type N (m) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1250-1475
Type N (m) to BNC (f) (2 required) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1250-1476
Type N (m) to APC 3.5 (f) (2 required) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1250-1744
BNC (f) to Dual Banana Plug . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1251-2816
BNC Tee . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1250-0781

Cables
BNC, 122 cm (48 in) (2 required). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10503A
APC-3.5, 91 cm (36 in) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8120-4921
DVM test leads . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34118A

Chapter 8 379
Using Performance Tests: 3335A Source not Available
37a. Frequency Response: 8561E/EC

4. On the spectrum analyzer, press PRESET. Set the controls as follows:

Center frequency. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 300 MHz
Center frequency step . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100 MHz
Span . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .0 Hz
Reference level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . −5 dBm
dB/division . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1 dB
Resolution BW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .30 kHz
5. On the spectrum analyzer, press MKR.
6. On the Agilent E4421B, adjust the power level for a MKR amplitude of
−10 dBm ±0.05 dB.
7. Press RATIO on the Agilent 8902A.

DC Coupled Frequency Response, Band 0 (250 kHz to 2.9 GHz)

8. On the spectrum analyzer, press AMPLITUDE, MORE 1 OF 3, and COUPLING

DC.

9. Set the Agilent E4421B frequency to 250 kHz.

10. On the spectrum analyzer, press FREQUENCY, CENTER FREQ, 250, and kHz.
11. On the Agilent E4421B, adjust the power level for a spectrum analyzer MKR
amplitude reading of −10 dBm ±0.05 dB.
12. Enter the 0.3 MHz power sensor calibration factor, indicated in Table 8-25, into
the Agilent 8902A.
13. Record the negative of the power ratio displayed on the Agilent 8902A as the
Agilent 8902A reading in Table 8-25. Record the power ratio here exactly as it
is displayed on the Agilent 8902A:

Agilent 8902A reading at 250 kHz: __________________ dB

14. Set the Agilent E4421B to 1.0 MHz.

380 Chapter 8
Using Performance Tests: 3335A Source not Available
37a. Frequency Response: 8561E/EC

19. On the Agilent E4421B, set the frequency to the next value listed in Table 8-25.
20. On the spectrum analyzer, set the center frequency to the next value listed in
Table 8-25.
21. On the Agilent E4421B, adjust the power level for a spectrum analyzer MKR
amplitude reading of −10 dBm ±0.05 dB.
22. Enter the power sensor calibration factor, indicated in Table 8-25, into the
Agilent 8902A.
23. Record the negative of the power ratio displayed on the Agilent 8902A, as the
Agilent 8902A reading in Table 8-25.
24. To step through the remaining frequencies listed in Table 8-25, repeat step 19
through step 23.

NOTE It will be necessary to enter the last source and spectrum analyzer frequency,
2.9 GHz, manually; the step functions will set the frequency to 2.95 GHz.

AC Coupled Frequency Response, Band 0 (Š250 kHz to 2.9 GHz)

25. On the spectrum analyzer, press AMPLITUDE, MORE 1 OF 3, and COUPLING

AC.

26. Set the Agilent E4421B to 250 kHz.

27. On the spectrum analyzer, press FREQUENCY, CENTER FREQ, 250, and
kHz.

28. On the Agilent E4421B, adjust the power level for a spectrum analyzer MKR
amplitude reading of −10 dBm ±0.05 dB.
29. Enter the 0.3 MHz power sensor calibration factor, indicated in Table 8-26, into
the Agilent 8902A.
30. Record the negative of the power ratio displayed on the Agilent 8902A as the
Agilent 8902A reading in Table 8-26. Record the power ratio here exactly as it
is displayed on the Agilent 8902A:

Agilent 8902A reading at 250 kHz: __________________ dB

31. Set the Agilent E4421B to 1.0 MHz.

32. On the spectrum analyzer, press FREQUENCY, CENTER FREQ, 1.0, and
MHz.

33. On the Agilent 83640B, adjust the power level for a spectrum analyzer MKR
amplitude reading of −10 dBm ±0.05 dB.

Chapter 8 381
Using Performance Tests: 3335A Source not Available
37a. Frequency Response: 8561E/EC

34. Enter the 1.0 MHz power sensor calibration factor, indicated in Table 8-26, into
the Agilent 8902A.
35. Record the negative of the power ratio displayed on the Agilent 8902A as the
Agilent 8902A reading in Table 8-26.
36. On the Agilent E4421B, set the frequency to the next value listed in Table 8-26.
37. On the spectrum analyzer, set the center frequency to the next value listed in
Table 8-26.
38. On the Agilent E4421B, adjust the power level for a spectrum analyzer MKR
amplitude reading of −10 dBm ±0.05 dB.
39. Enter the power sensor calibration factor, indicated in Table 8-26, into the
Agilent 8902A.
40. Record the negative of the power ratio displayed on the Agilent 8902A as the
Agilent 8902A reading in Table 8-26.
41. To step through the remaining frequencies listed in Table 8-26, repeat step 36
through step 40.

NOTE It is necessary to enter the last source and spectrum analyzer frequency, (2.9 GHz)
manually. The step functions will set the frequency to 2.95 GHz.

DC Coupled Frequency Response, Band 1 (2.9 GHz to 6.50 GHz)

42. If the instrument has warmed up for 30 minutes or more and is in a 20 to 30 °C

environment, Preselector Auto Peak is not necessary.
43. Connect the equipment as shown in Figure 8-15.
44. Zero and calibrate the Agilent 8902A with the Agilent 8481A.
45. On the spectrum analyzer, press FREQUENCY, 2.95, and GHz.
46. Set the Agilent 83640B frequency to 2.95 GHz.
47. On the spectrum analyzer, press AUX CTRL, INTERNAL MIXER, and
PRESEL AUTO PK. Wait for the PEAKING message to disappear.

48. On the Agilent 83640B, adjust the power level for a spectrum analyzer MKR
amplitude reading of −10 dBm ±0.05 dB.
49. Enter the 3.0 GHz power sensor calibration factor, indicated in Table 8-27, into
the Agilent 8902A.
50. Record the negative of the power ratio displayed on the Agilent 8902A as the
Agilent 8902A reading in Table 8-27.
51. On the Agilent 83640B, set the frequency to the next value listed in Table 8-27.
52. On the spectrum analyzer, set the center frequency to the next value listed in

382 Chapter 8
Using Performance Tests: 3335A Source not Available
37a. Frequency Response: 8561E/EC

Table 8-27.
53. On the Agilent 83640B, adjust the power level for a spectrum analyzer MKR
amplitude reading of −10 dBm ±0.05 dB.
54. Enter the power sensor calibration factor, indicated in Table 8-27, into the
Agilent 8902A.
55. Record the negative of the power ratio displayed on the Agilent 8902A as the
Agilent 8902A reading in Table 8-27.
56. To step through the remaining frequencies listed in Table 8-27, repeat step 51
through step 55.

NOTE It will be necessary to enter the last source and spectrum analyzer frequency,
6.5 GHz, manually; the step functions will set the frequency to 6.55 GHz.

AC Coupled Frequency Response, Band 1 (2.9 GHz to 6.50 GHz)

57. If the instrument has warmed up for 30 minutes or more and is in a 20 to 30 °C

environment, Preselector Auto Peak is not necessary.
58. On the spectrum analyzer, press FREQUENCY, 2.95, and GHz.
59. Set the Agilent 83640B frequency to 2.95 GHz.
60. On the spectrum analyzer, press AUX CTRL, INTERNAL MIXER, and
PRESEL AUTO PK. Wait for the PEAKING message to disappear.

61. On the Agilent 83640B, adjust the power level for a spectrum analyzer MKR
amplitude reading of −10 dBm ±0.05 dB.
62. Enter the 3.0 GHz power sensor calibration factor, indicated in Table 8-28, into
the Agilent 8902A.
63. Record the negative of the power ratio displayed on the Agilent 8902A as the
Agilent 8902A reading in Table 8-28.
64. On the Agilent 83640B, set the frequency to the next value listed in Table 8-28.
65. On the spectrum analyzer, set the center frequency to the next value listed in
Table 8-28.
66. On the Agilent 83640B, adjust the power level for a spectrum analyzer MKR
amplitude reading of −10 dBm ±0.05 dB.
67. Enter the power sensor calibration factor, indicated in Table 8-28, into the
Agilent 8902A.
68. Record the negative of the power ratio displayed on the Agilent 8902A as the
Agilent 8902A reading in Table 8-28.
69. To step through the remaining frequencies listed in Table 8-28, repeat step 64

Chapter 8 383
Using Performance Tests: 3335A Source not Available
37a. Frequency Response: 8561E/EC

through step 68.

NOTE It will be necessary to enter the last source and spectrum analyzer frequency,
6.5 GHz, manually; the step functions will set the frequency to 6.55 GHz.

DC Coupled Frequency Response (≤250 kHz)

70. On the spectrum analyzer, press AMPLITUDE, MORE 1 OF 3, and COUPLING

DC. Set the controls as follows:

Center frequency. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .250 kHz

Span . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .100 Hz
Resolution BW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10 Hz
Marker. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . off
Video BW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1 Hz
71. On the Agilent 3324A, set the controls as follows:
Frequency . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .250 kHz
Amplitude . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . −4 dBm
Amplitude increment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0.01 dB
72. On the Agilent 3458A, set the controls as follows:
Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Sync AC Volts
Math . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . dBm
RES Register. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50 Ω
Front/Rear Terminal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Front
Resolution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.5 digits
73. Connect the equipment as shown in Figure 8-12 with the Agilent 8482A power
sensor and Agilent 8902A connected to the power splitter.
74. Enter the power sensor calibration factor for 0.3 MHz into the Agilent 8902A.
75. Zero and calibrate the sensor.
76. Adjust the Agilent 3324A amplitude until the Agilent 8902A display reads the
same value as recorded in step 13.
77. Disconnect the Agilent 8482A power sensor from the power splitter and
connect the Agilent 3458A.

384 Chapter 8
Using Performance Tests: 3335A Source not Available
37a. Frequency Response: 8561E/EC

78. Record the Agilent 3458A reading here and in Table 8-29:

Agilent 3458A reading at 250 kHz: _______________ dBm

79. On the spectrum analyzer, press PEAK SEARCH and MARKER DELTA.
80. Set the spectrum analyzer CENTER FREQ and the Agilent 3324A frequency to
the next frequency listed in Table 8-29.
81. Press PEAK SEARCH on the spectrum analyzer.
82. Adjust the Agilent 3324A amplitude for a Δ MKR amplitude reading of
0.00 dBm ±0.05 dB.
83. Record the Agilent 3458A amplitude readings in Table 8-29 as the ACDMV
amplitude.
84. To step through the remaining frequencies listed in Table 8-29, repeat step 80
through step 83
85. For each of the frequencies listed in Table 8-29, subtract the ACDVM
amplitude reading from the ACDVM reading at 250 kHz recorded in step 78.
Record the results as the response relative to 250 kHz in Table 8-29.
86. Add to each of the response relative to 250 kHz entries in Table 8-29 the
Agilent 8902A reading for 250 kHz listed in Table 8-25. Use the value from
Table 8-29 for the ac coupled frequency. Record the results as the response
relative to 300 MHz in Table 8-29.

Test Results

87. Enter the results of the dc coupled frequency response, Band 0, below:

88. a. Enter the most positive number from Table 8-29, _______________ dB
column 4.

89. b. Enter the most positive number from Table 8-25, _______________ dB
column 2.

c. Of (a) and (b), enter whichever number is more positive. _______________ dB

90. d. Enter the most negative number from Table 8-29, _______________ dB
column 4.

91. e. Enter the most negative number from Table 8-25, _______________ dB
column 2.

f. Of (c) and (d), enter whichever number is more negative. _______________ dB

g. Subtract (f) from (c). _______________ dB

Chapter 8 385
Using Performance Tests: 3335A Source not Available
37a. Frequency Response: 8561E/EC

92. Enter the results of the ac coupled frequency response, Band 0, below:

a. Enter the most positive number from Table 8-26, column _______________ dB
2.

b. Enter the most negative number from Table 8-26, column _______________ dB
2.

c. Subtract (b) from (a). _______________ dB

93. Enter the results of the dc coupled frequency response, Band 1, below:

a. Enter the most positive number from Table 8-27, column ______________ dB
2.

b. Enter the most negative number from Table 8-27, column ______________ dB
2.

c. Subtract (b) from (a). ______________ dB

94. Enter the results of the ac coupled frequency response, Band 1, below:

b. Enter the most positive number from Table 8-28, column _______________ dB
2.

c. Enter the most negative number from Table 8-28, column _______________ dB
2.

d. Subtract (b) from (a). _______________ dB

386 Chapter 8
Using Performance Tests: 3335A Source not Available
37a. Frequency Response: 8561E/EC

Band Switching Uncertainty

95. Band 0 to Band 1 results (dc coupled):

a. Enter the value recorded in step 87 (c): _______ dB
b. Enter the value recorded in step 93 (b): ______ dB
c. Compute the absolute value of the difference
between these two entries. ______ dB
96. Band 1 to Band 0 results (dc coupled):
a. Enter the value recorded in step 87 66 (f): ______ dB
b. Enter the value recorded in step 93 67 (a): ______ dB
c. Compute the absolute value of the difference
between these two entries. ______ dB
97. Band 0 to Band 1 results (ac coupled):
a. Enter the value recorded in step 92 (c): ______ dB
b. Enter the value recorded in step 94 (b): ______ dB
c. Compute the absolute value of the difference
between these two entries. ______ dB
98. Band 1 to Band 0 results (ac coupled):
a. Enter the value recorded in step 92 (f): ______ dB
b. Enter the value recorded in step 94 (a): ______ dB
c. Compute the absolute value of the difference
between these two entries. ______ dB

Chapter 8 387
Using Performance Tests: 3335A Source not Available
37a. Frequency Response: 8561E/EC

Table 8-25 DC Coupled Frequency Response (250 kHz to 2.9 GHz)

Source Agilent Pwr Sensor Measurement
Frequency 8902A Cal Factor Uncertainty
Reading Frequency

(MHz) (dB) (MHz) (dB)

388 Chapter 8
Using Performance Tests: 3335A Source not Available
37a. Frequency Response: 8561E/EC

Table 8-26 AC Coupled Frequency Response(250 kHz to 2.9 GHz)

Source Agilent Pwr Sensor Measurement
Frequency 8902A Cal Factor Uncertainty
Reading Frequency

(MHz) (dB) (MHz) (dB)

Chapter 8 389
Using Performance Tests: 3335A Source not Available
37a. Frequency Response: 8561E/EC

Table 8-27 DC Coupled Frequency Response (2.9 GHz to 6.5 GHz)

Source Agilent Pwr Sensor Measurement
Frequency 8902A Cal Factor Uncertainty
Reading Frequency
(GHz) (dB) (GHz) (dB)
2.95 3.0 +0.44/−0.49
3.05 3.0 +0.44/−0.49
3.15 3.0 +0.44/−0.49
3.25 3.0 +0.44/−0.49
3.35 3.0 +0.44/−0.49
3.45 3.0 +0.44/−0.49
3.55 4.0 +0.44/−0.49
3.65 4.0 +0.44/−0.49
3.75 4.0 +0.44/−0.49
3.85 4.0 +0.44/−0.49
3.95 4.0 +0.44/−0.49
4.05 4.0 +0.44/−0.49
4.15 4.0 +0.44/−0.49
4.25 4.0 +0.44/−0.49
4.35 4.0 +0.44/−0.49
4.45 4.0 +0.44/−0.49
4.55 5.0 +0.44/−0.49
4.65 5.0 +0.44/−0.49
4.75 5.0 +0.44/−0.49
4.85 5.0 +0.44/−0.49
4.95 5.0 +0.44/−0.49
5.05 5.0 +0.44/−0.49
5.15 5.0 +0.44/−0.49
5.25 5.0 +0.44/−0.49
5.35 5.0 +0.44/−0.49
5.45 5.0 +0.44/−0.49
5.55 6.0 +0.44/−0.49
5.65 6.0 +0.44/−0.49
5.75 6.0 +0.44/−0.49
5.85 6.0 +0.44/−0.49
5.95 6.0 +0.44/−0.49
6.05 6.0 +0.44/−0.49
6.15 6.0 +0.44/−0.49
6.25 6.0 +0.44/−0.49
6.35 6.0 +0.44/−0.49
6.45 6.0 +0.44/−0.49
6.50 6.0 +0.44/−0.49

390 Chapter 8
Using Performance Tests: 3335A Source not Available
37a. Frequency Response: 8561E/EC

Table 8-28 AC Coupled Frequency Response (2.9 GHz to 6.5 GHz)

Chapter 8 391
Using Performance Tests: 3335A Source not Available
37a. Frequency Response: 8561E/EC

Table 8-29 DC Coupled Frequency Response (<250 kHz)

Function ACDVM Response Response Measurement

Generator Amplitude Relative to Relative to Uncertainty
Frequency (dBm) 250 kHz 300 MHz (dB)

250 kHz 0 (Ref) ±0.23

100 kHz ±0.23

10 kHz ±0.23

1 kHz ±0.23

500 Hz ±0.23

200 Hz ±0.23

392 Chapter 8
Using Performance Tests: 3335A Source not Available
38a. Frequency Response: 8562E/EC

38a. Frequency Response: 8562E/EC

Instrument Under Test

8562E/EC

Related Specification
Relative Frequency Response
Absolute Frequency Response
Band Switching Uncertainty

Related Adjustment
Frequency Response Adjustment
LO Distribution Amplifier Adjustment

Chapter 8 393
Using Performance Tests: 3335A Source not Available
38a. Frequency Response: 8562E/EC

Figure 8-17 Frequency Response Test Setup, 250 kHz to 2.9 GHz
BNC Cable

SPECTRUM 10 MHz Ref Frequency SIGNAL

MEASURING RECEIVER ANALYZER In/Out Standard Ext GENERATOR

Sensor
RF
Output

Input 50 W
POWER ADAPTER
SENSOR ADAPTER

POWER APC 3.5 Cable

SPLITTER
ADAPTER

wj15c

Figure 8-18 Frequency Response Test Setup, 2.9 MHz to 13.2 GHz

Figure 8-19 Frequency Response Test Setup, ≤250 kHz

394 Chapter 8
Using Performance Tests: 3335A Source not Available
38a. Frequency Response: 8562E/EC

Chapter 8 395
Using Performance Tests: 3335A Source not Available
38a. Frequency Response: 8562E/EC

Procedure
1. Zero and calibrate the Agilent 8902A and the Agilent 8482A in log mode, as
described in the Agilent 8902A Operation Manual. Enter the power sensor
300 MHz calibration factor into the Agilent 8902A.
2. Connect the equipment as shown in Figure 8-17.
3. On the Agilent E4421B, press INSTR PRESET. Set the controls as follows:
CW frequency . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 300 MHz
Frequency increment. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100 MHz
Amplitude . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . −4 dBm
4. On the spectrum analyzer, press PRESET. Set the controls as follows:
Center frequency. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .300 MHz
Center frequency step . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .100 MHz
Span . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0 Hz
Reference level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .−5 dBm
dB/division . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 dB
Resolution BW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30 kHz
5. On the spectrum analyzer, press MKR.
6. On the Agilent E4421B, adjust the power level for a MKR amplitude of
−10 dBm ±0.05 dB.
7. Press RATIO on the Agilent 8902A.

DC Coupled Frequency Response, Band 0 (250 kHz to 2.9 GHz)

8. On the spectrum analyzer, press AMPLITUDE, MORE 1 OF 3, and COUPLING

DC.

9. Set the Agilent E4421B frequency to 250 kHz.

396 Chapter 8
Using Performance Tests: 3335A Source not Available
38a. Frequency Response: 8562E/EC

13. Record the negative of the power ratio displayed on the 8902A as the
Agilent 8902A reading in Table 8-30. Record the power ratio here exactly as it
is displayed on the Agilent 8902A:

Agilent 8902A reading at 250 kHz (dc coupled): _____________ dB

14. Set the Agilent E4421B to 1.0 MHz.

19. On the Agilent E4421B, set the frequency to the next value listed in Table 8-30.
20. On the spectrum analyzer, set the center frequency to the next value listed in
Table 8-30.
21. On the Agilent E4421B, adjust the power level for a spectrum analyzer MKR
amplitude reading of −10 dBm ±0.05 dB.
22. Enter the power sensor calibration factor, indicated in Table 8-30, into the
Agilent 8902A.
23. Record the negative of the power ratio displayed on the Agilent 8902A, as the
Agilent 8902A reading in Table 8-30.
24. To step through the remaining frequencies listed in Table 8-30, repeat step 19
through step 23.

NOTE It will be necessary to enter the last source and spectrum analyzer frequency,
2.9 GHz, manually; the step functions will set the frequency to 2.95 GHz.

AC Coupled Frequency Response, Band 0 (Š250 kHz to 2.9 GHz)

25. On the spectrum analyzer, press AMPLITUDE, MORE 1 OF 3, and COUPLING

AC.

26. Set the Agilent E4421B to 300 MHz.

27. On the spectrum analyzer, press FREQUENCY, CENTER FREQ, 300, and
MHz.

28. On the Agilent E4421B, adjust the power level for a spectrum analyzer MKR

Chapter 8 397
Using Performance Tests: 3335A Source not Available
38a. Frequency Response: 8562E/EC

amplitude reading of −10 dBm ±0.05 dB.

29. Enter the 300 MHz power sensor calibration factor, indicated in Table 8-31,
into the Agilent 8902A.
30. On the Agilent 8902A, press RATIO.
31. Set the Agilent E4421B to 250 kHz.
32. Enter the 0.3 MHz power sensor calibration factor, indicated in Table 8-31, into
the Agilent 8902A.
33. On the Agilent E4421B, adjust the power level for a spectrum analyzer MKR
amplitude reading of −10 dBm ±0.05 dB.
34. Record the negative of the power ratio displayed on the Agilent 8902A as the
Agilent 8902A reading in Table 8-31. Record the power ratio here exactly as it
is displayed on the Agilent 8902A:

Agilent 8902A reading at 250 kHz (ac coupled): _____________ dB

35. Set the Agilent E4421B to 1.0 MHz.

36. On the spectrum analyzer, press FREQUENCY, CENTER FREQ, 1.0, and
MHz.

37. On the Agilent E4421B, adjust the power level for a spectrum analyzer MKR
amplitude reading of −10 dBm ±0.05 dB.
38. Enter the 1 MHz power sensor calibration factor, indicated in Table 8-31, into
the Agilent 8902A.
39. Record the negative of the power ratio displayed on the Agilent 8902A as the
Agilent 8902A reading in Table 8-31.
40. On the Agilent E4421B, set the frequency to the next value listed in Table 8-31.
41. On the spectrum analyzer, set the center frequency to the next value listed in
Table 8-31.
42. On the Agilent E4421B, adjust the power level for a spectrum analyzer MKR
amplitude reading of −10 dBm ±0.05 dB.
43. Enter the power sensor calibration factor, indicated in Table 8-31, into the
Agilent 8902A.
44. Record the negative of the power ratio displayed on the Agilent 8902A as the
Agilent 8902A reading in Table 8-31.
45. To step through the remaining frequencies listed in Table 8-31, repeat step 40
through step 44.

NOTE It is necessary to enter the last source and spectrum analyzer frequency, (2.9 GHz)
manually. The step functions will set the frequency to 2.95 GHz.

DC Coupled Frequency Response, Band 1 (2.9 GHz to 6.5 GHz)

398 Chapter 8
Using Performance Tests: 3335A Source not Available
38a. Frequency Response: 8562E/EC

46. If the instrument has warmed up for 30 minutes or more and is in a 20 to 30 °C

environment, Preselector Auto Peak is not necessary.
47. Connect the equipment as shown in Figure 8-18.
48. Zero and calibrate the Agilent 8902A with the Agilent 8481A.
49. On the spectrum analyzer, press AMPLITUDE, MORE 1 OF 3, and COUPLING
DC.

50. On the spectrum analyzer, press FREQUENCY, 2.95, and GHz.

51. Set the Agilent 83640B frequency to 2.95 GHz.
52. On the spectrum analyzer, press AUX CTRL, INTERNAL MIXER, and
PRESEL AUTO PK. Wait for the PEAKING message to disappear.

53. On the Agilent 83640B, adjust the power level for a spectrum analyzer MKR
amplitude reading of −10 dBm ±0.05 dB.
54. Enter the 3.0 GHz power sensor calibration factor, indicated in Table 8-32, into
the Agilent 8902A.
55. Record the negative of the power ratio displayed on the Agilent 8902A as the
Agilent 8902A reading in Table 8-32.
56. On the Agilent 83640B, set the frequency to the next value listed in Table 8-32.
57. On the spectrum analyzer, set the center frequency to the next value listed in
Table 8-32.
58. On the Agilent 83640B, adjust the power level for a spectrum analyzer MKR
amplitude reading of −10 dBm ±0.05 dB.
59. Enter the power sensor calibration factor, indicated in Table 8-32, into the
Agilent 8902A.
60. Record the negative of the power ratio displayed on the Agilent 8902A as the
Agilent 8902A reading in Table 8-32.

Chapter 8 399
Using Performance Tests: 3335A Source not Available
38a. Frequency Response: 8562E/EC

61. To step through the remaining frequencies listed in Table 8-32, repeat step 56
through step 60.

NOTE It will be necessary to enter the last source and spectrum analyzer frequency,
6.5 GHz, manually; the step functions will set the frequency to 6.55 GHz.

DC Coupled Frequency Response, Band 2 (6.5 GHz to 13.2 GHz)

62. On the spectrum analyzer, press FREQUENCY, 6.5, GHz, CF STEP, 200, and
MHz.

63. Set the Agilent 83640B frequency to 6.5 GHz and the FREQ STEP to
200 MHZ.
64. On the spectrum analyzer, press AUX CTRL, INTERNAL MIXER, and
PRESEL AUTO PK. Wait for the PEAKING message to disappear.

65. On the Agilent 83640B, adjust the power level for a spectrum analyzer MKR
amplitude reading of −10 dBm ±0.05 dB.
66. Enter the 3.0 GHz power sensor calibration factor, indicated in Table 8-33, into
the Agilent 8902A.
67. Record the negative of the power ratio displayed on the Agilent 8902A as the
Agilent 8902A reading in Table 8-33.
68. On the Agilent 83640B, set the frequency to the next value listed in Table 8-33.
69. On the spectrum analyzer, set the center frequency to the next value listed in
Table 8-33.
70. On the Agilent 83640B, adjust the power level for a spectrum analyzer MKR
amplitude reading of −10 dBm ±0.05 dB.
71. Enter the power sensor calibration factor, indicated in Table 8-33, into the
Agilent 8902A.
72. Record the negative of the power ratio displayed on the Agilent 8902A as the
Agilent 8902A reading in Table 8-33.
73. To step through the remaining frequencies listed in Table 8-33, repeat step 68
through step 72.

400 Chapter 8
Using Performance Tests: 3335A Source not Available
38a. Frequency Response: 8562E/EC

AC Coupled Frequency Response, Band 1 (2.9 GHz to 6.5 GHz)

74. If the instrument has warmed up for 30 minutes or more and is in a 20 to 30 °C

environment, Preselector Auto Peak is not necessary.
75. On the spectrum analyzer, press AMPLITUDE, MORE 1 OF 3, and COUPLING
AC.

76. On the spectrum analyzer, press FREQUENCY, 2.95, GHz.

77. Set the Agilent 83640B frequency to 2.95 GHz and the frequency step to 100
MHz.
78. On the spectrum analyzer, press AUX CTRL, INTERNAL MIXER, and
PRESEL AUTO PK. Wait for the PEAKING message to disappear.

79. On the Agilent 83640B, adjust the power level for a spectrum analyzer MKR
amplitude reading of −10 dBm ±0.05 dB.
80. Enter the 3.0 GHz power sensor calibration factor, indicated in Table 8-34, into
the Agilent 8902A.
81. Record the negative of the power ratio displayed on the Agilent 8902A as the
Agilent 8902A reading in Table 8-34.
82. On the Agilent 83640B, set the frequency to the next value listed in Table 8-34.
83. On the spectrum analyzer, set the center frequency to the next value listed in
Table 8-34.
84. On the Agilent 83640B, adjust the power level for a spectrum analyzer MKR
amplitude reading of −10 dBm ±0.05 dB.
85. Enter the power sensor calibration factor, indicated in Table 8-34, into the
Agilent 8902A.
86. Record the negative of the power ratio displayed on the Agilent 8902A as the
Agilent 8902A reading in Table 8-34.
87. To step through the remaining frequencies listed in Table 8-34, repeat step 82
through step 86.

NOTE It will be necessary to enter the last source and spectrum analyzer frequency,
6.5 GHz, manually; the step functions will set the frequency to 6.55 GHz.

AC Coupled Frequency Response, Band 2 (6.5 GHz to 13.2 GHz)

88. On the spectrum analyzer, press FREQUENCY, 6.5, GHz.

89. Set the Agilent 83640B frequency to 6.5 GHz and the FREQ STEP to

Chapter 8 401
Using Performance Tests: 3335A Source not Available
38a. Frequency Response: 8562E/EC

200 MHZ.
90. On the spectrum analyzer, press AUX CTRL, INTERNAL MIXER, and
PRESEL AUTO PK. Wait for the PEAKING message to disappear.

91. On the Agilent 83640B, adjust the power level for a spectrum analyzer MKR
amplitude reading of −10 dBm ±0.05 dB.
92. Enter the 6.0 GHz power sensor calibration factor, indicated in Table 8-35, into
the Agilent 8902A.
93. Record the negative of the power ratio displayed on the Agilent 8902A as the
Agilent 8902A reading in Table 8-35.
94. On the Agilent 83640B, set the frequency to the next value listed in Table 8-35.
95. On the spectrum analyzer, set the center frequency to the next value listed in
Table 8-35.
96. On the Agilent 83640B, adjust the power level for a spectrum analyzer MKR
amplitude reading of −10 dBm ±0.05 dB.
97. Enter the power sensor calibration factor, indicated in Table 8-35, into the
Agilent 8902A.
98. Record the negative of the power ratio displayed on the Agilent 8902A as the
Agilent 8902A reading in Table 8-35.
99. To step through the remaining frequencies listed in Table 8-35, repeat step 94
through step 98.

NOTE It will be necessary to enter the last source and spectrum analyzer frequency,
6.5 GHz, manually; the step functions will set the frequency to 6.55 GHz.

402 Chapter 8
Using Performance Tests: 3335A Source not Available
38a. Frequency Response: 8562E/EC

DC Coupled Frequency Response (≤250 kHz)

100.On the spectrum analyzer, press AMPLITUDE, MORE 1 OF 3, COUPLING

DC. Set the controls as follows:

Center frequency . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 250 kHz

102.On the Agilent 3458A, set the controls as follows:

Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Sync AC Volts
Math. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . dBm
RES Register . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50 Ω
Front/Rear Terminal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Front
Resolution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7.5 digits
103.Connect the equipment as shown in Figure 8-19 with the Agilent 8482A
power sensor and Agilent 8902A connected to the power splitter.
104.Enter the power sensor calibration factor for 0.1 MHz into the Agilent 8902A.
105.Zero and calibrate the sensor.
106.Adjust the Agilent 3324A amplitude until the Agilent 8902A display reads the
same value as recorded in step 13.
107.Disconnect the Agilent 8482A power sensor from the power splitter and
connect the Agilent 3458A.
108.Record the Agilent 3458A reading here and in Table 8-36:

Agilent 3458A reading at 250 kHz: _______________ dBm

109.On the spectrum analyzer, press PEAK SEARCH and MARKER DELTA.
110.Set the spectrum analyzer CENTER FREQ and the Agilent 3324A frequency
to the next frequency listed in Table 8-36.

Chapter 8 403
Using Performance Tests: 3335A Source not Available
38a. Frequency Response: 8562E/EC

111.Press PEAK SEARCH on the spectrum analyzer

112.Adjust the Agilent 3324A amplitude for a Δ MKR amplitude reading of
0.00 dBm ±0.05 dB.
113.Record the Agilent 3458A amplitude readings in Table 8-36 as the ACDMV
amplitude.
114.To step through the remaining frequencies listed in Table 8-36, repeat step 110
through step 113.

115.For each of the frequencies listed in Table 8-36, subtract the ACDVM
amplitude reading from the ACDVM amplitude reading at 250 kHz recorded in
step 108. Record the results as the response relative to 250 kHz in Table 8-36.
116.Add to each of the response relative to 250 kHz entries in Table 8-36 the
Agilent 8902A reading for 250 kHz listed in Table 8-30. Use the value from
Table 8-36 for the ac coupled frequency. Record the results as the response
relative to 300 MHz in Table 8-36.

404 Chapter 8
Using Performance Tests: 3335A Source not Available
38a. Frequency Response: 8562E/EC

Test Results

117.Enter the results of the dc coupled frequency response, Band 0, below:

a. Enter the most positive number from Table 8-36, column _______________ dB
4.

b. Enter the most positive number from Table 8-30, column _______________ dB
2.

c. Of (a) and (b), enter whichever number is more positive. _______________ dB

d. Enter the most negative number from Table 8-36, column _______________ dB
4.

e. Enter the most negative number from Table 8-30, column _______________ dB
2.

f. Of (c) and (d), enter whichever number is more negative. _______________ dB

g. Subtract (f) from (c). _______________ dB

118.Enter the results of the ac coupled frequency response, Band 0, below:

a. Enter the most positive number from Table 8-31, column _______________ dB
2.

b. Enter the most negative number from Table 8-31, column _______________ dB
2.

c. Subtract (a) from (b). _______________ dB

119.Enter the results of the dc coupled frequency response, Band 1, below:

a. Enter the most positive number from Table 8-32, column _______________ dB
2.

b. Enter the most negative number from Table 8-32, column _______________ dB
2.

c. Subtract (b) from (a). _______________ dB

120.Enter the results of the dc coupled frequency response, Band 2, below:

a. Enter the most positive number from Table 8-33, column _______________ dB
2.

b. Enter the most negative number from Table 8-33, column _______________ dB
2.

c. Subtract (b) from (a). _______________ dB

Chapter 8 405
Using Performance Tests: 3335A Source not Available
38a. Frequency Response: 8562E/EC

121.Enter the results of the ac coupled frequency response, Band 1, below:

b. Enter the most positive number from Table 8-34, column _______________ dB
2.

c. Enter the most negative number from Table 8-34, column _______________ dB
2.

d. Subtract (b) from (a). _______________ dB

122.Enter the results of the ac coupled frequency response, Band 2, below:

a. Enter the most positive number from Table 8-35, column _______________ dB
2.

b. Enter the most negative number from Table 8-35, column _______________ dB
2.

c. Subtract (b) from (a). _______________ dB

Frequency Response, Band 0, 100 MHz to 2.3 GHz

123.Enter the results of the dc coupled frequency response, Band 0, for the
frequency range 100 MHz to 2.3 GHz:

124.a. Enter the most positive number from Table 8-30, _______________ dB
column 2, for center frequencies between 100 MHz and
2.3 GHz.

125.b. Enter the most negative number from Table 8-30, _______________ dB
column 2, for center frequencies between 100 MHz and
2.3 GHz.

c. Subtract (b) from (a). _______________ dB

406 Chapter 8
Using Performance Tests: 3335A Source not Available
38a. Frequency Response: 8562E/EC

Band Switching Uncertainty DC Coupled

126.In the top row of Table 8-37, enter the values recorded in the indicated steps.
For example, if step 120 (a) has a value of 1.22 dB, enter “1.22 dB” in the top
row of the Band 2 column.
127.In the left column of Table 8-37, enter the values recorded in the indicated
steps. For example, if step 120 (b) has a value of −0.95 dB, enter “−0.95 dB” in
the left column of the Band 2 row.
128.Compute the other entries in Table 8-37 by taking the absolute value of the
difference between the values in the left column and the top row.

Band Switching Uncertainty AC Coupled

129.In the top row of Table 8-38, enter the values recorded in the indicated steps.
For example, if step 122 (a) has a value of 1.22 dB, enter “1.22 dB” in the top
row of the Band 2 column.
130.In the left column of Table 8-38, enter the values recorded in the indicated
steps. For example, if step 122 (b) has a value of −0.95 dB, enter “−0.95 dB” in
the left column of the Band 2 row.
131.Compute the other entries in Table 8-38 by taking the absolute value of the
difference between the values in the left column and the top row.

Chapter 8 407
Using Performance Tests: 3335A Source not Available
38a. Frequency Response: 8562E/EC

Table 8-30 DC Coupled Frequency Response, Band 0 (250 kHz to 2.9 GHz)
Source Agilent Pwr Sensor Measurement
Frequency 8902A Cal Factor Uncertainty
Reading Frequency

(MHz) (dB) (MHz) (dB)

0.250 0.01 +0.32/−0.34
1 1 +0.32/−0.34
10 10 +0.32/−0.34
20 10 +0.32/−0.34
50 30 +0.32/−0.34
90 100 +0.32/-0.34
100 100 +0.32/−0.34
200 300 +0.32/−0.34
300 300 +0.32/−0.34
400 300 +0.32/−0.34
500 300 +0.32/−0.34
600 1000 +0.32/−0.34
700 1000 +0.32/−0.34
800 1000 +0.32/−0.34
900 1000 +0.32/−0.34
1000 1000 +0.32/−0.34
1100 1000 +0.32/−0.34
1200 1000 +0.32/−0.34
1300 1000 +0.32/−0.34
1400 1000 +0.32/−0.34
1500 1000 +0.32/−0.34
1600 2000 +0.32/−0.34
1700 2000 +0.32/−0.34
1800 2000 +0.32/−0.34
1900 2000 +0.32/−0.34
2000 2000 +0.32/−0.34
2100 2000 +0.32/−0.34
2200 2000 +0.32/−0.34
2300 2000 +0.32/−0.34
2400 2000 +0.32/−0.34
2500 2000 +0.32/−0.34
2600 3000 +0.32/−0.34
2700 3000 +0.32/−0.34
2800 3000 +0.32/−0.34
2900 3000 +0.32/−0.34

408 Chapter 8
Using Performance Tests: 3335A Source not Available
38a. Frequency Response: 8562E/EC

Table 8-31 AC Coupled Frequency Response, Band0 (250 kHz to 2.9 GHz)
Source Agilent Pwr Sensor Measurement
Frequency 8902A Cal Factor Uncertainty
Reading Frequency

(MHz) (dB) (MHz) (dB)

Chapter 8 409
Using Performance Tests: 3335A Source not Available
38a. Frequency Response: 8562E/EC

Table 8-32 DC Coupled Frequency Response, Band 1 (2.9 GHz to 6.5 GHz)
Source Agilent Pwr Sensor Measurement
Frequency 8902A Cal Factor Uncertainty
Reading Frequency
(GHz) (dB) (GHz) (dB)
2.95 3.0 +0.44/−0.49
3.05 3.0 +0.44/−0.49
3.15 3.0 +0.44/−0.49
3.25 3.0 +0.44/−0.49
3.35 3.0 +0.44/−0.49
3.45 3.0 +0.44/−0.49
3.55 4.0 +0.44/−0.49
3.65 4.0 +0.44/−0.49
3.75 4.0 +0.44/−0.49
3.85 4.0 +0.44/−0.49
3.95 4.0 +0.44/−0.49
4.05 4.0 +0.44/−0.49
4.15 4.0 +0.44/−0.49
4.25 4.0 +0.44/−0.49
4.35 4.0 +0.44/−0.49
4.45 4.0 +0.44/−0.49
4.55 5.0 +0.44/−0.49
4.65 5.0 +0.44/−0.49
4.75 5.0 +0.44/−0.49
4.85 5.0 +0.44/−0.49
4.95 5.0 +0.44/−0.49
5.05 5.0 +0.44/−0.49
5.15 5.0 +0.44/−0.49
5.25 5.0 +0.44/−0.49
5.35 5.0 +0.44/−0.49
5.45 5.0 +0.44/−0.49
5.55 6.0 +0.44/−0.49
5.65 6.0 +0.44/−0.49
5.75 6.0 +0.44/−0.49
5.85 6.0 +0.44/−0.49
5.95 6.0 +0.44/−0.49
6.05 6.0 +0.44/−0.49
6.15 6.0 +0.44/−0.49
6.25 6.0 +0.44/−0.49
6.35 6.0 +0.44/−0.49
6.45 6.0 +0.44/−0.49
6.50 6.0 +0.44/−0.49

410 Chapter 8
Using Performance Tests: 3335A Source not Available
38a. Frequency Response: 8562E/EC

Table 8-33 DC Coupled Frequency Response, Band 2 (6.5 GHz to 13.2 GHz)
Source Agilent Pwr Sensor Measurement
Frequency 8902A Cal Factor Uncertainty
Reading Frequency
(GHz) (dB) (GHz) (dB)
6.5 6.0 +0.45/−0.50 dB
6.7 7.0 +0.45/−0.50 dB
6.9 7.0 +0.45/−0.50 dB
7.1 7.0 +0.45/−0.50 dB
7.3 7.0 +0.45/−0.50 dB
7.5 7.0 +0.45/−0.50 dB
7.7 8.0 +0.45/−0.50 dB
7.9 8.0 +0.45/−0.50 dB
8.1 8.0 +0.45/−0.50 dB
8.3 8.0 +0.45/−0.50 dB
8.5 8.0 +0.45/−0.50 dB
8.7 9.0 +0.45/−0.50 dB
8.9 9.0 +0.45/−0.50 dB
9.1 9.0 +0.45/−0.50 dB
9.3 9.0 +0.45/−0.50 dB
9.5 9.0 +0.45/−0.50 dB
9.7 10.0 +0.45/−0.50 dB
9.9 10.0 +0.45/−0.50 dB
10.1 10.0 +0.45/−0.50 dB
10.3 10.0 +0.45/−0.50 dB
10.5 10.0 +0.45/−0.50 dB
10.7 11.0 +0.45/−0.50 dB
10.9 11.0 +0.45/−0.50 dB
11.1 11.0 +0.45/−0.50 dB
11.3 11.0 +0.45/−0.50 dB
11.5 11.0 +0.45/−0.50 dB
11.7 12.0 +0.45/−0.50 dB
11.9 12.0 +0.45/−0.50 dB
12.1 12.0 +0.45/−0.50 dB
12.3 12.0 +0.45/−0.50 dB
12.5 12.0 +0.45/−0.50 dB
12.7 13.0 +0.45/−0.50 dB
12.9 13.0 +0.45/−0.50 dB
13.1 13.0 +0.45/−0.50 dB
13.2 13.0 +0.45/−0.50 dB

Chapter 8 411
Using Performance Tests: 3335A Source not Available
38a. Frequency Response: 8562E/EC

Table 8-34 AC Coupled Frequency Response, Band 1 (2.9 GHz to 6.5 GHz)
Source Agilent Pwr Sensor Measurement
Frequency 8902A Cal Factor Uncertainty
Reading Frequency
(GHz) (dB) (GHz) (dB)
2.95 3.0 +0.44/−0.49
3.05 3.0 +0.44/−0.49
3.15 3.0 +0.44/−0.49
3.25 3.0 +0.44/−0.49
3.35 3.0 +0.44/−0.49
3.45 3.0 +0.44/−0.49
3.55 4.0 +0.44/−0.49
3.65 4.0 +0.44/−0.49
3.75 4.0 +0.44/−0.49
3.85 4.0 +0.44/−0.49
3.95 4.0 +0.44/−0.49
4.05 4.0 +0.44/−0.49
4.15 4.0 +0.44/−0.49
4.25 4.0 +0.44/−0.49
4.35 4.0 +0.44/−0.49
4.45 4.0 +0.44/−0.49
4.55 5.0 +0.44/−0.49
4.65 5.0 +0.44/−0.49
4.75 5.0 +0.44/−0.49
4.85 5.0 +0.44/−0.49
4.95 5.0 +0.44/−0.49
5.05 5.0 +0.44/−0.49
5.15 5.0 +0.44/−0.49
5.25 5.0 +0.44/−0.49
5.35 5.0 +0.44/−0.49
5.45 5.0 +0.44/−0.49
5.55 6.0 +0.44/−0.49
5.65 6.0 +0.44/−0.49
5.75 6.0 +0.44/−0.49
5.85 6.0 +0.44/−0.49
5.95 6.0 +0.44/−0.49
6.05 6.0 +0.44/−0.49
6.15 6.0 +0.44/−0.49
6.25 6.0 +0.44/−0.49
6.35 6.0 +0.44/−0.49
6.45 6.0 +0.44/−0.49
6.50 6.0 +0.44/−0.49

412 Chapter 8
Using Performance Tests: 3335A Source not Available
38a. Frequency Response: 8562E/EC

Table 8-35 AC Coupled Frequency Response, Band 2 (6.5 GHz to 13.2 GHz)
Source Agilent Pwr Sensor Measurement
Frequency 8902A Cal Factor Uncertainty
Reading Frequency
(GHz) (dB) (GHz) (dB)
6.5 6.0 +0.45/−0.50
6.7 7.0 +0.45/−0.50
6.9 7.0 +0.45/−0.50
7.1 7.0 +0.45/−0.50
7.3 7.0 +0.45/−0.50
7.5 7.0 +0.45/−0.50
7.7 8.0 +0.45/−0.50
7.9 8.0 +0.45/−0.50
8.1 8.0 +0.45/−0.50
8.3 8.0 +0.45/−0.50
8.5 8.0 +0.45/−0.50
8.7 9.0 +0.45/−0.50
8.9 9.0 +0.45/−0.50
9.1 9.0 +0.45/−0.50
9.3 9.0 +0.45/−0.50
9.5 9.0 +0.45/−0.50
9.7 10.0 +0.45/−0.50
9.9 10.0 +0.45/−0.50
10.1 10.0 +0.45/−0.50
10.3 10.0 +0.45/−0.50
10.5 10.0 +0.45/−0.50
10.7 11.0 +0.45/−0.50
10.9 11.0 +0.45/−0.50
11.1 11.0 +0.45/−0.50
11.3 11.0 +0.45/−0.50
11.5 11.0 +0.45/−0.50
11.7 12.0 +0.45/−0.50
11.9 12.0 +0.45/−0.50
12.1 12.0 +0.45/−0.50
12.3 12.0 +0.45/−0.50
12.5 12.0 +0.45/−0.50
12.7 13.0 +0.45/−0.50
12.9 13.0 +0.45/−0.50
13.1 13.0 +0.45/−0.50
13.2 13.0 +0.45/−0.50

Chapter 8 413
Using Performance Tests: 3335A Source not Available
38a. Frequency Response: 8562E/EC

Table 8-36 DC Coupled Frequency Response (<250 kHz)

Function ACDVM Response Response Measurement

Generator Amplitude Relative to Relative to Uncertainty
Frequency (dBm) 250 kHz 300 MHz (dB)

250 kHz 0 (Ref) ±0.23

100 kHz ±0.23

10 kHz ±0.23

1 kHz ±0.23

500 Hz ±0.23

200 Hz ±0.23

414 Chapter 8
Using Performance Tests: 3335A Source not Available
38a. Frequency Response: 8562E/EC

Table 8-37 Band Switching Uncertainty DC Coupled

Band 0 Band 1 Band 2

Step 117c Step 119a Step 120a
____________ ____________ ____________

Band 0
Step 117f N/A ____________ ___________
____________

Band 1
Step 119b ____________ N/A ____________
____________

Band 2
Step 120b _________ _________ N/A
_________

Table 8-38 Band Switching Uncertainty AC Coupled

Band 0 Band 1 Band 2

Step 118c Step 121a Step 121a
____________ ____________ ____________

Band 0
Step 118f N/A ____________ ____________
____________

Band 1
Step 121b ____________ N/A ____________
____________

Band 2
Step 122b ____________ ____________ N/A
____________

Chapter 8 415
Using Performance Tests: 3335A Source not Available
39a. Frequency Response: Agilent 8563E/EC

39a. Frequency Response: Agilent 8563E/EC

Instrument Under Test

Agilent 8563E/EC

Related Specification
Relative Frequency Response
Absolute Frequency Response
Band Switching Uncertainty

Related Adjustment
RYTHM Adjustment
Frequency Response Adjustment
LO Distribution Amplifier Adjustment

416 Chapter 8
Using Performance Tests: 3335A Source not Available
39a. Frequency Response: Agilent 8563E/EC

Figure 8-20 Frequency Response Test Setup, 250 kHz to 2.9 GHz
BNC Cable

SPECTRUM 10 MHz Ref Frequency SIGNAL

MEASURING RECEIVER ANALYZER In/Out Standard Ext GENERATOR

Sensor
RF
Output

Input 50 W
POWER ADAPTER
SENSOR ADAPTER

POWER APC 3.5 Cable

SPLITTER
ADAPTER

wj15c

Figure 8-21 Frequency Response Test Setup, 2.9 MHz to 26.5 GHz

Figure 8-22 Frequency Response Test Setup, ≤250 kHz (Option 006, only)

Chapter 8 417
Using Performance Tests: 3335A Source not Available
39a. Frequency Response: Agilent 8563E/EC

Equipment
Measuring receiver. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Agilent 8902A
Synthesized sweeper . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Agilent 83640B
Function Generator. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Agilent 3324A or Agilent 33127A
Signal generator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Agilent E4421B
AC Digital Voltmeter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Agilent 3458A
Power sensor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Agilent 8482A
Power sensor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Agilent 8485A
Power splitter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Agilent 11667A
Power splitter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Agilent 11667B
Coaxial 50 Ω termination . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Agilent 908A

Adapters
APC-3.5 (f) to 2.4 mm (f) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Agilent 11901B
Type [N (m) to type N (m) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1250-1475
Type N (m) to BNC (f) (2 required). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1250-1476
Type N (m) to APC 3.5 (f) (2 required) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1250-1744
Type N (m) to APC 3.5 (m) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1250-1743
BNC (f) to Dual Banana Plug 1251-2816
BNC Tee . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1250-0781

Cables
BNC, 122 cm (48 in) (2 required) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Agilent 10503A
APC-3.5, 91 cm (36 in) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8120-4921
DVM test leads. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Agilent 34118A

418 Chapter 8
Using Performance Tests: 3335A Source not Available
39a. Frequency Response: Agilent 8563E/EC

3. On the Agilent E4421B, press INSTR PRESET. Set the controls as follows:
CW frequency . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 300 MHz
Frequency increment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100 MHz
Amplitude . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .−4 dBm
4. On the spectrum analyzer, press PRESET. Press RECALL, MORE 1 OF 2, and
FACTORY PRSEL PK. Set the controls as follows:

Center frequency . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 300 MHz

Center frequency step . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100 MHz
Span . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0 Hz
Reference level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .−5 dBm
dB/division . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 dB
Resolution BW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30 kHz
5. On the spectrum analyzer, press MKR.
6. On the Agilent E4421B, adjust the power level for a MKR amplitude of
−10 dBm ±0.05 dB.
7. Press RATIO on the Agilent 8902A.

Frequency Response, Band 0 (250 kHz to 2.9 GHz)

8. Set the Agilent E4421B frequency to 250 kHz.

9. On the spectrum analyzer, press FREQUENCY, CENTER FREQ, 250, and kHz.
10. On the Agilent E4421B, adjust the power level for a spectrum analyzer MKR
amplitude reading of −10 dBm ±0.05 dB.
11. Enter the 0.3 MHz power sensor calibration factor, indicated in Table 8-39, into
the Agilent 8902A.
12. Record the negative of the power ratio displayed on the Agilent 8902A as the
Agilent 8902A reading in Table 8-39. Record the power ratio here exactly as it
is displayed on the Agilent 8902A:

Agilent 8902A reading at 250 kHz: __________________ dB

Chapter 8 419
Using Performance Tests: 3335A Source not Available
39a. Frequency Response: Agilent 8563E/EC

13. Set the Agilent E4421B to 1.0 MHz.

14. On the spectrum analyzer, press FREQUENCY, CENTER FREQ, 1.0, and MHz.
15. On the Agilent E4421B, adjust the power level for a spectrum analyzer MKR
amplitude reading of −10 dBm ±0.05 dB.
16. Enter the 1.0 MHz power sensor calibration factor, indicated in Table 8-39, into
the Agilent 8902A.
17. Record the negative of the power ratio displayed on the Agilent 8902A, as the
Agilent 8902A reading in Table 8-39.
18. On the Agilent E4421B, set the frequency to the next value listed in Table 8-39.
19. On the spectrum analyzer, set the center frequency to the next value listed in
Table 8-39.
20. On the Agilent E4421B, adjust the power level for a spectrum analyzer MKR
amplitude reading of −10 dBm ±0.05 dB.
21. Enter the 0.3 MHz power sensor calibration factor, indicated in Table 8-39, into
the Agilent 8902A.
22. Record the negative of the power ratio displayed on the Agilent 8902A, as the
Agilent 8902A reading in Table 8-39.
23. To step through the remaining frequencies listed in Table 8-39, repeat step 18
through step 22.

NOTE It will be necessary to enter the last source and spectrum analyzer frequency,
2.9 GHz, manually; the step functions will set the frequency to 2.95 GHz.

420 Chapter 8
Using Performance Tests: 3335A Source not Available
39a. Frequency Response: Agilent 8563E/EC

Frequency Response, Band 1 (2.9 GHz to 6.5 GHz)

24. If the instrument has warmed up for 30 minutes or more and is in a 20 to 30 °C

environment, Preselector Auto Peak is not necessary.
25. Connect the equipment as shown in Figure 8-21.
26. Zero and calibrate the Agilent 8902A with the Agilent 8481A.
27. On the spectrum analyzer, press FREQUENCY, 2.95, and GHz.
28. Set the Agilent 83640B frequency to 2.95 GHz.
29. On the spectrum analyzer, press AUX CTRL, INTERNAL MIXER, and
PRESEL AUTO PK. Wait for the PEAKING message to disappear.

30. On the Agilent 83640B, adjust the power level for a spectrum analyzer MKR
amplitude reading of −10 dBm ±0.05 dB.
31. Enter the 3.0 GHz power sensor calibration factor, indicated in Table 8-40, into
the Agilent 8902A.
32. Record the negative of the power ratio displayed on the Agilent 8902A as the
Agilent 8902A reading in Table 8-40.
33. On the Agilent 83640B, set the frequency to the next value listed in Table 8-40.
34. On the spectrum analyzer, set the center frequency to the next value listed in
Table 8-40.
35. On the Agilent 83640B, adjust the power level for a spectrum analyzer MKR
amplitude reading of −10 dBm ±0.05 dB.
36. Enter the power sensor calibration factor, indicated in Table 8-40, into the
Agilent 8902A.
37. Record the negative of the power ratio displayed on the Agilent 8902A as the
Agilent 8902A reading in Table 8-40.
38. To step through the remaining frequencies listed in Table 8-40, repeat step 33
through step 37.

Chapter 8 421
Using Performance Tests: 3335A Source not Available
39a. Frequency Response: Agilent 8563E/EC

Frequency Response, Band 2 (6.5 GHz to 13.2 GHz)

39. On the spectrum analyzer, press FREQUENCY, 6.5, GHz, CF STEP, 200, and
MHz.

40. Set the Agilent 83640B frequency to 6.5 GHz and the FREQ STEP to
200 MHz.
41. On the spectrum analyzer, press AUX CTRL, INTERNAL MIXER, and
PRESEL AUTO PK. Wait for the PEAKING message to disappear.

42. On the Agilent 83640B, adjust the power level for a spectrum analyzer MKR
amplitude reading of −10 dBm ±0.05 dB.
43. Enter the 6.0 GHz power sensor calibration factor, indicated in Table 8-41, into
the Agilent 8902A.
44. Record the negative of the power ratio displayed on the Agilent 8902A as the
Agilent 8902A reading in Table 8-41.
45. On the Agilent 83640B, set the frequency to the next value listed in Table 8-41.
46. On the spectrum analyzer, set the center frequency to the next value listed in
Table 8-41.
47. On the Agilent 83640B, adjust the power level for a spectrum analyzer MKR
amplitude reading of −10 dBm ±0.05 dB.
48. Enter the power sensor calibration factor, indicated in Table 8-41, into the
Agilent 8902A.
49. Record the negative of the power ratio displayed on the Agilent 8902A as the
Agilent 8902A reading in Table 8-41.
50. To step through the remaining frequencies listed in Table 8-41, repeat step 45
through step 49.

NOTE It will be necessary to enter the last source and spectrum analyzer frequency,
13.2 GHz, manually; the step functions will set the frequency to 13.3 GHz.

422 Chapter 8
Using Performance Tests: 3335A Source not Available
39a. Frequency Response: Agilent 8563E/EC

Frequency Response, Band 3 (13.2 GHz to 26.5 GHz)

51. On the spectrum analyzer, press FREQUENCY, 13.25, GHz.

52. Set the Agilent 83640B frequency to 13.25 GHz.
53. On the spectrum analyzer, press AUX CTRL, INTERNAL MIXER, and
PRESEL AUTO PK. Wait for the PEAKING message to disappear.

54. On the Agilent 83640B, adjust the power level for a spectrum analyzer MKR
amplitude reading of −10 dBm ±0.05 dB.
55. Enter the 13.3 GHz power sensor calibration factor, indicated in Table 8-42,
into the Agilent 8902A.
56. Record the negative of the power ratio displayed on the Agilent 8902A as the
Agilent 8902A reading in Table 8-42.
57. On the Agilent 83640B, set the frequency to the next value listed in Table 8-42.
58. On the spectrum analyzer, set the center frequency to the next value listed in
Table 8-42.
59. On the Agilent 83640B, adjust the power level for a spectrum analyzer MKR
amplitude reading of −10 dBm ±0.05 dB.
60. Enter the power sensor calibration factor, indicated in Table 8-42, into the
Agilent 8902A.
61. Record the negative of the power ratio displayed on the Agilent 8902A as the
Agilent 8902A reading in Table 8-42.
62. To step through the remaining frequencies listed in Table 8-42, repeat step 57
through step 61.

Chapter 8 423
Using Performance Tests: 3335A Source not Available
39a. Frequency Response: Agilent 8563E/EC

Frequency Response (≤250 kHz) (Option 006 Only)

63. On the spectrum analyzer, set the controls as follows:

Center frequency. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .250 kHz
Span . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .100 Hz
Resolution BW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10 Hz
Marker. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . off
64. On the Agilent 3324A, set the controls as follows:
Frequency . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .250 kHz
Amplitude . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . −4 dBm
65. On the Agilent 3458A, set the controls as follows:
Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Sync AC Volts
Math . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . dBm
RES Register. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50 Ω
Front/Rear Terminal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Front
Resolution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.5 digits
66. Connect the equipment as shown in Figure 8-22 with the Agilent 8482A power
sensor and Agilent 8902A connected to the power splitter.
67. Enter the 0.3 MHz power sensor calibration factor, indicated in Table 8-43, into
the Agilent 8902A.
68. Zero and calibrate the sensor.
69. Adjust the Agilent 3324A amplitude until the Agilent 8902A display reads the
same value as recorded in step 12.
70. Disconnect the Agilent 8482A power sensor from the power splitter and
connect the Agilent 3458A.
71. Record the Agilent 3458A reading here and in Table 8-43:

Agilent 3458A reading at 250 kHz: ________________ dBm

72. On the spectrum analyzer, press PEAK SEARCH and MARKER DELTA.
73. Set the spectrum analyzer CENTER FREQ and the Agilent 3324A frequency to
the next frequency listed in Table 8-43.
74. Press PEAK SEARCH on the spectrum analyzer.

424 Chapter 8
Using Performance Tests: 3335A Source not Available
39a. Frequency Response: Agilent 8563E/EC

75. Adjust the Agilent 3324A amplitude for a Δ MKR amplitude reading of
0.00 dBm ±0.05 dB.
76. Record the Agilent 3458A amplitude readings in Table 8-43 as the ACDMV
amplitude.
77. To step through the remaining frequencies listed in Table 8-36, repeat step 73
through step 76.
78. For each of the frequencies listed in Table 8-43, subtract the ACDVM
amplitude reading from the ACDVM amplitude reading at 250 kHz recorded in
step 71. Record the results as the response relative to 250 kHz in Table 8-43.
79. Add to each of the response relative to 250 kHz entries in Table 8-43 the
Agilent 8902A reading for 250 kHz listed in Table 8-39. Record the results as
the response relative to 300 MHz in Table 8-43.

Test Results

80. Enter the results of the frequency response, Band 0, 250 kHz to 2.9 GHz.

a. Enter the most positive number from Table 8-42, column _______________ dB
4.

b. Enter the most positive number from Table 8-39, column _______________ dB
2.

c. Of (a) and (b), enter whichever number is more _______________ dB

positive.
d. Enter the most negative number from Table 8-42, column _______________ dB
4.

e. Enter the most negative number from Table 8-39, column _______________ dB
2.

f. Of (c) and (d), enter whichever number is more _______________ dB

negative.
g. Subtract (f) from (c). _______________ dB

Chapter 8 425
Using Performance Tests: 3335A Source not Available
39a. Frequency Response: Agilent 8563E/EC

81. Enter the results of the frequency response, Band 1, 2.9 GHz to 6.5 GHz.

a. Enter the most positive number from Table 8-40, column _______________ dB
2.

b. Enter the most negative number from Table 8-40, column _______________ dB
2.

c. Subtract (b) from (a). _______________ dB

82. Enter the results of the frequency response, Band 2, 6.5 GHz to 13.2 GHz.

a. Enter the most positive number from Table 8-41, column _______________ dB
2.

b. Enter the most negative number from Table 8-41, column _______________ dB
2.

c. Subtract (b) from (a). _______________ dB

83. Frequency Response, Band 3, 13.2 GHz to 19.7 GHz

a. Enter the most positive number from Table 8-42, column 2 _______________ dB
for center frequencies less than or equal to 22 GHz.

b. Enter the most negative number from Table 8-42, column _______________ dB
2 for center frequencies less than or equal to 22 GHz.

c. Subtract (b) from (a). _______________ dB

84. Frequency Response, Band 3, 19.9 GHz to 26.5 GHz

a. Enter the most positive number from Table 8-42, column 2 _______________ dB
for center frequencies greater than 22 GHz.

b. Enter the most negative number from Table 8-42, column _______________ dB
2 for center frequencies greater than 22 GHz.

c. Subtract (b) from (a). _______________ dB

426 Chapter 8
Using Performance Tests: 3335A Source not Available
39a. Frequency Response: Agilent 8563E/EC

Frequency Response, Band 0, 100 MHz to 2.0 GHz

85. This step applies only to spectrum analyzers with serial number prefix 3645A
or later. Enter the results of the frequency response, Band 0, for the frequency
range 100 MHz to 2.0 GHz:

a. Enter the most positive number from Table 8-39, column _______________ dB
2, for center frequencies between 100 MHz and
2.0 GHz.

b. Enter the most negative number from Table 8-39, column _______________ dB
2, for center frequencies between 100 MHz and
2.0 GHz.

c. Subtract (b) from (a). _______________ dB

86. Frequency Response, Band 3, 13.2 GHz to 26.5 GHz

a. Enter the most positive number from 53 (a) and 54 (a). _______________ dB

b. Enter the most negative number from 53 (b) and 54 _______________ dB

(b).

Band Switching Uncertainty

87. In the top row of Table 8-44, enter the values recorded in the indicated steps.
For example, if step 83 (a) has a value of 1.22 dB, enter “1.22 dB” in the top
row of the Band 3 column.
88. In the left column of Table 8-44, enter the values recorded in the indicated
steps. For example, if step 82 (b) has a value of −0.95 dB, enter “−0.95 dB” in
the left column of the Band 2 row.
89. Compute the other entries in Table 8-44 by taking the absolute value of the
difference between the values in the left column and the top row.

Chapter 8 427
Using Performance Tests: 3335A Source not Available
39a. Frequency Response: Agilent 8563E/EC

Table 8-39 Frequency Response, Band 0 (250 kHz to 2.9 GHz)

Source Agilent Pwr Sensor Measurement
Frequency 8902A Cal Factor Uncertainty
Reading Frequency

(MHz) (dB) (MHz) (dB)

0.250 0.01 +0.32/−0.34
1 1 +0.32/−0.34
10 10 +0.32/−0.34
20 10 +0.32/−0.34
50 30 +0.32/−0.34
90 100 +0.32/-0.34
150 100 +0.32/−0.34
250 300 +0.32/−0.34
350 300 +0.32/−0.34
450 300 +0.32/−0.34
550 300 +0.32/−0.34
650 1000 +0.32/−0.34
750 1000 +0.32/−0.34
850 1000 +0.32/−0.34
950 1000 +0.32/−0.34
1050 1000 +0.32/−0.34
1150 1000 +0.32/−0.34
1250 1000 +0.32/−0.34
1350 1000 +0.32/−0.34
1450 1000 +0.32/−0.34
1550 2000 +0.32/−0.34
1650 2000 +0.32/−0.34
1750 2000 +0.32/−0.34
1850 2000 +0.32/−0.34
1950 2000 +0.32/−0.34
2050 2000 +0.32/−0.34
2150 2000 +0.32/−0.34
2250 2000 +0.32/−0.34
2350 2000 +0.32/−0.34
2450 2000 +0.32/−0.34
2550 3000 +0.32/−0.34
2650 3000 +0.32/−0.34
2750 3000 +0.32/−0.34
2850 3000 +0.32/−0.34
2900 3000 +0.32/−0.34

428 Chapter 8
Using Performance Tests: 3335A Source not Available
39a. Frequency Response: Agilent 8563E/EC

Table 8-40 Frequency Response, Band 1 (2.9 GHz to 6.5 GHz)

Chapter 8 429
Using Performance Tests: 3335A Source not Available
39a. Frequency Response: Agilent 8563E/EC

Table 8-41 Frequency Response, Band 2 (6.5 GHz to 13.2 GHz)

Source Agilent Pwr Sensor Measurement
Frequency 8902A Cal Factor Uncertainty
Reading Frequency
(GHz) (dB) (GHz) (dB)
6.5 6.0 +0.45/−0.50 dB
6.7 7.0 +0.45/−0.50 dB
6.9 7.0 +0.45/−0.50 dB
7.1 7.0 +0.45/−0.50 dB
7.3 7.0 +0.45/−0.50 dB
7.5 7.0 +0.45/−0.50 dB
7.7 8.0 +0.45/−0.50 dB
7.9 8.0 +0.45/−0.50 dB
8.1 8.0 +0.45/−0.50 dB
8.3 8.0 +0.45/−0.50 dB
8.5 8.0 +0.45/−0.50 dB
8.7 9.0 +0.45/−0.50 dB
8.9 9.0 +0.45/−0.50 dB
9.1 9.0 +0.45/−0.50 dB
9.3 9.0 +0.45/−0.50 dB
9.5 9.0 +0.45/−0.50 dB
9.7 10.0 +0.45/−0.50 dB
9.9 10.0 +0.45/−0.50 dB
10.1 10.0 +0.45/−0.50 dB
10.3 10.0 +0.45/−0.50 dB
10.5 10.0 +0.45/−0.50 dB
10.7 11.0 +0.45/−0.50 dB
10.9 11.0 +0.45/−0.50 dB
11.1 11.0 +0.45/−0.50 dB
11.3 11.0 +0.45/−0.50 dB
11.5 11.0 +0.45/−0.50 dB
11.7 12.0 +0.45/−0.50 dB
11.9 12.0 +0.45/−0.50 dB
12.1 12.0 +0.45/−0.50 dB
12.3 12.0 +0.45/−0.50 dB
12.5 12.0 +0.45/−0.50 dB
12.7 13.0 +0.45/−0.50 dB
12.9 13.0 +0.45/−0.50 dB
13.1 13.0 +0.45/−0.50 dB
13.2 13.0 +0.45/−0.50 dB

430 Chapter 8
Using Performance Tests: 3335A Source not Available
39a. Frequency Response: Agilent 8563E/EC

Table 8-42 Frequency Response, Band 3 (13.2 GHz to 26.5 GHz)

Source Agilent Pwr Sensor Measurement
Frequency 8902A Cal Factor Uncertainty
Reading Frequency

(GHz) (dB) (GHz) (dB)

13.25 13.0 +0.46/−0.51 dB
13.3 13.0 +0.46/−0.51 dB
13.5 13.0 +0.46/−0.51 dB
13.7 14.0 +0.46/−0.51 dB
13.9 14.0 +0.46/−0.51 dB
14.1 14.0 +0.46/−0.51 dB
14.3 14.0 +0.46/−0.51 dB
14.5 14.0 +0.46/−0.51 dB
14.7 15.0 +0.46/−0.51 dB
14.9 15.0 +0.46/−0.51 dB
15.1 15.0 +0.46/−0.51 dB
15.3 15.0 +0.46/−0.51 dB
15.5 15.0 +0.46/−0.51 dB
15.7 16.0 +0.46/−0.51 dB
15.9 16.0 +0.46/−0.51 dB
16.1 16.0 +0.46/−0.51 dB
16.3 16.0 +0.46/−0.51 dB
16.5 16.0 +0.46/−0.51 dB
16.7 17.0 +0.46/−0.51 dB
16.9 17.0 +0.46/−0.51 dB
17.1 17.0 +0.46/−0.51 dB
17.3 17.0 +0.46/−0.51 dB
17.5 17.0 +0.46/−0.51 dB
17.7 18.0 +0.46/−0.51 dB
17.9 18.0 +0.46/−0.51 dB
18.1 18.0 +0.46/−0.51 dB
18.3 18.0 +0.46/−0.51 dB
18.5 18.0 +0.46/−0.51 dB
18.7 19.0 +0.46/−0.51 dB
18.9 19.0 +0.46/−0.51 dB
19.1 19.0 +0.46/−0.51 dB
19.3 19.0 +0.46/−0.51 dB
19.5 19.0 +0.46/−0.51 dB
19.7 20.0 +0.46/−0.51 dB

Chapter 8 431
Using Performance Tests: 3335A Source not Available
39a. Frequency Response: Agilent 8563E/EC

Table 8-42 Frequency Response, Band 3 (13.2 GHz to 26.5 GHz) (Continued)
Source Agilent Pwr Sensor Measurement
Frequency 8902A Cal Factor Uncertainty
Reading Frequency

(GHz) (dB) (GHz) (dB)

19.9 20.0 +0.51/−0.58
20.1 20.0 +0.51/−0.58
20.3 20.5 +0.51/−0.58
20.5 20.5 +0.51/−0.58
20.7 20.5 +0.51/−0.58
20.9 21.0 +0.51/−0.58
21.1 21.0 +0.51/−0.58
21.3 21.5 +0.51/−0.58
21.5 21.5 +0.51/−0.58
21.7 21.5 +0.51/−0.58
21.9 22.0 +0.51/−0.58
22.1 22.0 +0.51/−0.58
22.3 22.5 +0.51/−0.58
22.5 22.5 +0.51/−0.58
22.7 22.5 +0.51/−0.58
22.9 23.0 +0.51/−0.58
23.1 23.0 +0.51/−0.58
23.3 23.5 +0.51/−0.58
23.5 23.5 +0.51/−0.58
23.7 23.5 +0.51/−0.58
23.9 24.0 +0.51/−0.58
24.1 24.0 +0.51/−0.58
24.3 24.5 +0.51/−0.58
24.5 24.5 +0.51/−0.58
24.7 24.5 +0.51/−0.58
24.9 25.0 +0.51/−0.58
25.1 25.0 +0.51/−0.58
25.3 25.5 +0.51/−0.58
25.5 25.5 +0.51/−0.58
25.7 25.5 +0.51/−0.58
25.9 26.0 +0.51/−0.58
26.1 26.0 +0.51/−0.58
26.3 26.5 +0.51/−0.58
26.5 26.5 +0.51/−0.58

432 Chapter 8
Using Performance Tests: 3335A Source not Available
39a. Frequency Response: Agilent 8563E/EC

Table 8-43 Frequency Response (<250 kHz) (Option 006 Only)

Function ACDVM Response Response Measurement

Generator Amplitude Relative to Relative to Uncertainty
Frequency (dBm) 250 kHz 300 MHz (dB)

250 kHz 0 (Ref) ±0.23

100 kHz ±0.23

10 kHz ±0.23

1 kHz ±0.23

500 Hz ±0.23

200 Hz ±0.23

Chapter 8 433
Using Performance Tests: 3335A Source not Available
39a. Frequency Response: Agilent 8563E/EC

Table 8-44 Band Switching Uncertainty

Band 0 Band 1 Band 2 Band 3 Band 3

Step 80c Step 81a Step 82a <19.8 GHz >19.8 GHz
Step 83a Step 84a
__________ __________ __________ __________ __________

Band 0
Step 80f N/A __________ __________ __________ __________
_________

Band 1
Step 81b _________ N/A _________ _________ _________
_________

Band 2
Step 82b _________ __________ N/A __________ __________
_________

Band 3
<22 GHz __________ __________ __________ N/A __________
Step 83b
_________

Band 3
>22 GHz __________ __________ __________ __________ N/A
Step 84b
_________

434 Chapter 8
Using Performance Tests: 3335A Source not Available
40a. Frequency Response: Agilent 8564E/EC

40a. Frequency Response: Agilent 8564E/EC

Instrument Under Test

Agilent 8564E/EC

Related Specification
Relative Frequency Response
Absolute Frequency Response
Band Switching Uncertainty

Related Adjustment
RYTHM Adjustment
Frequency Response Adjustment
LO Distribution Amplifier Adjustment
SBTX Adjustment

Chapter 8 435
Using Performance Tests: 3335A Source not Available
40a. Frequency Response: Agilent 8564E/EC

Figure 8-23 Frequency Response Test Setup, 250 kHz to 2.9 GHz

Figure 8-24 Frequency Response Test Setup, 2.9 MHz to 40 GHz

Figure 8-25 Frequency Response Test Setup, ≤250 kHz (Option 006, only)

436 Chapter 8
Using Performance Tests: 3335A Source not Available
40a. Frequency Response: Agilent 8564E/EC

Equipment
Measuring receiver . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Agilent 8902A
Synthesized sweeper . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Agilent 83640B
Function Generator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Agilent 3324A or Agilent 33127A
Signal generator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Agilent E4421B
AC Digital Voltmeter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Agilent 3458A
Power sensor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Agilent 8482A
Power sensor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Agilent 8487A
Power splitter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Agilent 11667A
Power splitter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Agilent 11667C
Coaxial 50 Ω termination . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Agilent 908A

Adapters
Type N (m) to type N (m) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1250-1475
Type N (m) to BNC (f) (2 required) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1250-1476
Type N (m) to APC 3.5 (f) (2 required) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1250-1744
Type N (f) to 2.4 mm (f) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Agilent 11903B
BNC (f) to Dual Banana Plug . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1251-2816
BNC Tee . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1250-0781

Cables
BNC, 122 cm (48 in) (2 required). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Agilent 10503A
APC-3.5, 91 cm (36 in) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8120-4921
APC-2.4, 91 cm (36 in) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8120-6164
DVM test leads . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Agilent 34118A

Chapter 8 437
Using Performance Tests: 3335A Source not Available
40a. Frequency Response: Agilent 8564E/EC

3. On the Agilent E4421B, press INSTR PRESET. Set the controls as follows:
CW frequency . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 300 MHz
Frequency increment. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100 MHz
Amplitude . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . −4 dBm
4. On the spectrum analyzer, press PRESET. Press RECALL, MORE 1 OF 2, and
FACTORY PRSEL PK. Set the controls as follows:

Center frequency. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 300 MHz

Center frequency step . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100 MHz
Span . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .0 Hz
Reference level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . −5 dBm
dB/division . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1 dB
Resolution BW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .30 kHz
5. On the spectrum analyzer, press MKR.
6. On the Agilent E4421B, adjust the power level for a MKR amplitude of
−10 dBm ±0.05 dB.
7. Press RATIO on the Agilent 8902A.

Frequency Response, Band 0 (250 kHz to 2.9 GHz)

8. Set the Agilent E4421B frequency to 250 kHz.

9. On the spectrum analyzer, press FREQUENCY, CENTER FREQ, 250, and kHz.
10. On the Agilent E4421B, adjust the power level for a spectrum analyzer MKR
amplitude reading of −10 dBm ±0.05 dB.
11. Enter the 0.3 MHz power sensor calibration factor, indicated in Table 8-45, into
the Agilent 8902A.
12. Record the negative of the power ratio displayed on the Agilent 8902A as the
Agilent 8902A reading in Table 8-45. Record the power ratio here exactly as it
is displayed on the Agilent 8902A:

Agilent 8902A reading at 250 kHz: __________________ dB

438 Chapter 8
Using Performance Tests: 3335A Source not Available
40a. Frequency Response: Agilent 8564E/EC

13. Set the Agilent E4421B to 1.0 MHz.

14. On the spectrum analyzer, press FREQUENCY, CENTER FREQ, 1.0, and MHz.
15. On the Agilent E4421B, adjust the power level for a spectrum analyzer MKR
amplitude reading of −10 dBm ±0.05 dB.
16. Enter the 1.0 MHz power sensor calibration factor, indicated in Table 8-45, into
the Agilent 8902A.
17. Record the negative of the power ratio displayed on the Agilent 8902A, as the
Agilent 8902A reading in Table 8-45.
18. On the Agilent E4421B, set the frequency to the next value listed in Table 8-45.
19. On the spectrum analyzer, set the center frequency to the next value listed in
Table 8-45.
20. On the Agilent E4421B, adjust the power level for a spectrum analyzer MKR
amplitude reading of −10 dBm ±0.05 dB.
21. Enter the power sensor calibration factor, indicated in Table 8-45, into the
Agilent 8902A.
22. Record the negative of the power ratio displayed on the Agilent 8902A, as the
Agilent 8902A reading in Table 8-45.
23. To step through the remaining frequencies listed in Table 8-45, repeat step 18
through step 22.

NOTE It will be necessary to enter the last source and spectrum analyzer frequency,
2.9 GHz, manually; the step functions will set the frequency to 2.95 GHz.

Frequency Response, Band 1 (2.9 GHz to 6.5 GHz)

24. If the instrument has warmed up for 30 minutes or more and is in a 20 to 30 °C

environment, Preselector Auto Peak is not necessary.
25. Connect the equipment as shown in Figure 8-24, using the Agilent 11667C
power splitter.
26. Zero and calibrate the Agilent 8902A with the Agilent 8487A. Enter the power
sensor 0.3 MHz calibration factor into the Agilent 8902A.
27. On the spectrum analyzer, press FREQUENCY, 2.95, and GHz.
28. Set the Agilent 83640B frequency to 2.95 GHz.
29. On the spectrum analyzer, press AUX CTRL, INTERNAL MIXER, and
PRESEL AUTO PK. Wait for the PEAKING message to disappear.

Chapter 8 439
Using Performance Tests: 3335A Source not Available
40a. Frequency Response: Agilent 8564E/EC

the Agilent 8902A.

32. Record the negative of the power ratio displayed on the Agilent 8902A as the
Agilent 8902A reading in Table 8-46.
33. On the Agilent 83640B, set the frequency to the next value listed in Table 8-46.
34. On the spectrum analyzer, set the center frequency to the next value listed in
Table 8-46.
35. On the Agilent 83640B, adjust the power level for a spectrum analyzer MKR
amplitude reading of −10 dBm ±0.05 dB.
36. Enter the power sensor calibration factor, indicated in Table 8-46, into the
Agilent 8902A.
37. Record the negative of the power ratio displayed on the Agilent 8902A as the
Agilent 8902A reading in Table 8-46.
38. To step through the remaining frequencies listed in Table 8-46, repeat step 33
through step 37.

Frequency Response, Band 2 (6.5 GHz to 13.2 GHz)

39. On the spectrum analyzer, press FREQUENCY, 6.5, GHz, CF STEP, 200, and
MHz.

440 Chapter 8
Using Performance Tests: 3335A Source not Available
40a. Frequency Response: Agilent 8564E/EC

48. Enter the power sensor calibration factor, indicated in Table 8-47, into the
Agilent 8902A.
49. Record the negative of the power ratio displayed on the Agilent 8902A as the
HP 8902A reading in Table 8-47.
50. To step through the remaining frequencies listed in Table 8-47, repeat step 45
through step 49.

NOTE It will be necessary to enter the last source and spectrum analyzer frequency,
13.2 GHz, manually; the step functions will set the frequency to 13.3 GHz.

Frequency Response, Band 3 (13.2 GHz to 26.5 GHz)

51. On the spectrum analyzer, press FREQUENCY, 13.25, GHz.

52. Set the Agilent 83640B frequency to 13.25 GHz.
53. On the spectrum analyzer, press AUX CTRL, INTERNAL MIXER, and
PRESEL AUTO PK. Wait for the PEAKING message to disappear.

54. On the Agilent 83640B, adjust the power level for a spectrum analyzer MKR
amplitude reading of −10 dBm ±0.05 dB.
55. Enter the 14.0 GHz power sensor calibration factor, indicated in Table 8-48,
into the Agilent 8902A.
56. Record the negative of the power ratio displayed on the Agilent 8902A as the
Agilent 8902A reading in Table 8-48.
57. On the Agilent 83640B, set the frequency to the next value listed in Table 8-48.
58. On the spectrum analyzer, set the center frequency to the next value listed in
Table 8-48.
59. On the Agilent 83640B, adjust the power level for a spectrum analyzer MKR
amplitude reading of −10 dBm ±0.05 dB.
60. Enter the power sensor calibration factor, indicated in Table 8-48, into the
Agilent 8902A.
61. Record the negative of the power ratio displayed on the Agilent 8902A as the
Agilent 8902A reading in Table 8-48.
62. To step through the remaining frequencies listed in Table 8-48, repeat step 57
through step 61.

Chapter 8 441
Using Performance Tests: 3335A Source not Available
40a. Frequency Response: Agilent 8564E/EC

Frequency Response, Band 4 (26.9 GHz to 31.1 GHz)

63. On the spectrum analyzer, press FREQUENCY, 26.9, GHz.

64. Set the Agilent 83640B frequency to 26.9 GHz.
65. On the spectrum analyzer, press AUX CTRL, INTERNAL MIXER, and
PRESEL AUTO PK. Wait for the PEAKING message to disappear.

66. On the Agilent 83640B, adjust the power level for a spectrum analyzer MKR
amplitude reading of −10 dBm ±0.05 dB.
67. Enter the 27.0 GHz power sensor calibration factor, indicated in Table 8-49,
into the Agilent 8902A.

68. Record the negative of the power ratio displayed on the Agilent 8902A as the
Agilent 8902A reading in Table 8-49.
69. On the Agilent 83640B, set the frequency to the next value listed in Table 8-49.
70. On the spectrum analyzer, set the center frequency to the next value listed in
Table 8-49.
71. On the Agilent 83640B, adjust the power level for a spectrum analyzer MKR
amplitude reading of −10 dBm ±0.05 dB.
72. Enter the power sensor calibration factor, indicated in Table 8-49, into the
Agilent 8902A.
73. Record the negative of the power ratio displayed on the Agilent 8902A as the
Agilent 8902A reading in Table 8-49.
74. To step through the remaining frequencies listed in Table 8-49, repeat step 69
through step 73.

Frequency Response, Band 5 (31.2 GHz to 40.0 GHz)

75. On the spectrum analyzer, press FREQUENCY, 31.2, GHz.

76. Set the Agilent 83640B frequency to 31.2 GHz.
77. On the spectrum analyzer, press AUX CTRL, INTERNAL MIXER, and
PRESEL AUTO PK. Wait for the PEAKING message to disappear.

78. On the Agilent 83640B, adjust the power level for a spectrum analyzer MKR
amplitude reading of −10 dBm ±0.05 dB.
79. Enter the 31.0 GHz power sensor calibration factor, indicated in Table 8-50,
into the Agilent 8902A.

442 Chapter 8
Using Performance Tests: 3335A Source not Available
40a. Frequency Response: Agilent 8564E/EC

80. Record the negative of the power ratio displayed on the Agilent 8902A as the
Agilent 8902A reading in Table 8-50.
81. On the Agilent 83640B, set the frequency to the next value listed in Table 8-50.
82. On the spectrum analyzer, set the center frequency to the next value listed in
Table 8-50.
83. On the Agilent 83640B, adjust the power level for a spectrum analyzer MKR
amplitude reading of −10 dBm ±0.05 dB.
84. Enter the power sensor calibration factor, indicated in Table 8-50, into the
Agilent 8902A.
85. Record the negative of the power ratio displayed on the Agilent 8902A as the
Agilent 8902A reading in Table 8-50.
86. To step through the remaining frequencies listed in Table 8-50, repeat step 81
through step 85.

Frequency Response (≤250 kHz) (Option 006 Only)

87. On the spectrum analyzer, set the controls as follows:

Center frequency . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 250 kHz
Span . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100 Hz
Resolution BW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 Hz
Marker . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . off
88. On the Agilent 3324A, set the controls as follows:
Frequency . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 250 kHz
Amplitude . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .−4 dBm
Amplitude increment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .0.01 dB
89. On the Agilent 3458A, set the controls as follows:
Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Sync AC Volts
Math. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . dBm
RES Register . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50 Ω
Front/Rear Terminal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Front
Resolution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7.5 digits

Chapter 8 443
Using Performance Tests: 3335A Source not Available
40a. Frequency Response: Agilent 8564E/EC

90. Connect the equipment as shown in Figure 8-25 with the Agilent 8482A power
sensor and Agilent 8902A connected to the Agilent 11667A power splitter.
91. Enter the power sensor calibration factor for 0.1 MHz into the Agilent 8902A.
92. Zero and calibrate the sensor.
93. Adjust the Agilent 3324A amplitude until the Agilent 8902A display reads the
same value as recorded in step 12.
94. Disconnect the Agilent 8482A power sensor from the power splitter and
connect the Agilent 3458A.
95. Record the Agilent 3458A reading here and in Table 8-51:

Agilent 3458A reading at 250 kHz: ________________ dBm

96. On the spectrum analyzer, press PEAK SEARCH and MARKER DELTA.
97. Set the spectrum analyzer CENTER FREQ and the Agilent 3324A frequency to
the next frequency listed in Table 8-51.
98. Press PEAK SEARCH on the spectrum analyzer.
99. Adjust the Agilent 3324A amplitude for a Δ MKR amplitude reading of
0.00 dBm ±0.05 dB.
100.Record the Agilent 3458A amplitude readings in Table 8-51 as the ACDMV
amplitude.
101.To step through the remaining frequencies listed in Table 8-51, repeat step 97
through step 100.
102.For each of the frequencies listed in Table 8-51, subtract the “ACDVM
amplitude” reading from the ACDVM reading at 250 kHz recorded in step 95.
Record the results as the“ response relative to 250 kHz” in Table 8-51.
103.Add to each of the “response relative to 250 kHz” entries in Table 8-51 the
“Agilent 8902A reading” for 250 kHz listed in Table 8-45. Record the results
as the response relative to 300 MHz in Table 8-51.

444 Chapter 8
Using Performance Tests: 3335A Source not Available
40a. Frequency Response: Agilent 8564E/EC

Test Results

104.Frequency Response, Band 0 − 250 kHz to 2.9 GHz.

a. Enter the most positive number from Table 8-51, column _______________ dB
4.

b. Enter the most positive number from Table 8-45, column _______________ dB
2.

c. Of (a) and (b), enter whichever number is more _______________ dB

positive.

d. Enter the most negative number from Table 8-51, column _______________ dB
4.

e. Enter the most negative number from Table 8-45, column _______________ dB
2.

f. Of (d) and (e), enter whichever number is more negative. _______________ dB

g. Subtract (f) from (c). _______________ dB

105.Frequency Response, Band 1 − 2.9 GHz to 6.5 GHz.

a. Enter the most positive number from Table 8-46, column _______________ dB
2.

b. Enter the most negative number from Table 8-46, column _______________ dB
2.

c. Subtract (b) from (a). _______________ dB

106.Frequency Response, Band 2 − 6.5 GHz to 13.2 GHz.

a. Enter the most positive number from Table 8-47, column _______________ dB
2.

b. Enter the most negative number from Table 8-47, column _______________ dB
2.

c. Subtract (b) from (a). _______________ dB

Chapter 8 445
Using Performance Tests: 3335A Source not Available
40a. Frequency Response: Agilent 8564E/EC

107.Frequency Response, Band 3 − 13.2 GHz to 20.2 GHz

a. Enter the most positive number from Table 8-48, column 2 _______________ dB
for center frequencies less than or equal to 22 GHz.

b. Enter the most negative number from Table 8-48, column _______________ dB
2 for center frequencies less than or equal to 22 GHz.

c. Subtract (b) from (a). _______________ dB

108.Frequency Response, Band 3 − 22 GHz to 26.8 GHz

a. Enter the most positive number from Table 8-48, column 2 _______________ dB
for center frequencies greater than 22 GHz.

b. Enter the most negative number from Table 8-48, column _______________ dB
2 for center frequencies greater than 22 GHz.

c. Subtract (b) from (a). _______________ dB

109.Frequency Response, Band 3 − 13.2 GHz to 26.8 GHz

110.a. Enter the most positive number from step 107 (a) and _______________ dB
step 108 (a).

111.b. Enter the most negative number from step 107 (b) and _______________ dB
step 108 (b).

112.Frequency Response, Band 4 − 26.9 GHz to 31.1 GHz.

a. Enter the most positive number from Table 8-49, column _______________ dB
2.

b. Enter the most negative number from Table 8-49, column _______________ dB
2.

c. Subtract (b) from (a). _______________ dB

113.Frequency Response, Band 5 − 31.2 GHz to 40 GHz.

a. Enter the most positive number from Table 8-50, column _______________ dB
2.

b. Enter the most negative number from Table 8-50, column _______________ dB
2.

c. Subtract (b) from (a). _______________ dB

446 Chapter 8
Using Performance Tests: 3335A Source not Available
40a. Frequency Response: Agilent 8564E/EC

Frequency Response, Band 0, 100 MHz to 2.0 GHz

114.This step applies only to spectrum analyzers with serial number prefix 3641A
or later. Enter the results of the frequency response, Band 0, for the frequency
range 100 MHz to 2.0 GHz:

a. Enter the most positive number from Table 8-45, column _______________ dB
2, for center frequencies between 100 MHz and
2.0 GHz.

b. Enter the most negative number from Table 8-45, column _______________ dB
2, for center frequencies between 100 MHz and
2.0 GHz.

c. Subtract (b) from (a). _______________ dB

Band Switching Uncertainty

115.In the top row of Table 8-52, enter the values recorded in the indicated steps.
For example, if step 107 (a) has a value of 1.22 dB, enter “1.22 dB” in the top
row of the Band 3 column.
116.In the left column of Table 8-52, enter the values recorded in the indicated
steps. For example, if step 106 (b) has a value of −0.95 dB, enter “−0.95 dB” in
the left column of the Band 2 row.
117.Compute the other entries in Table 8-52 by taking the absolute value of the
difference between the values in the left column and the top row.

Chapter 8 447
Using Performance Tests: 3335A Source not Available
40a. Frequency Response: Agilent 8564E/EC

Table 8-45 Frequency Response, Band 0 (250 kHz to 2.9 GHz)

Source Agilent Pwr Sensor Measurement
Frequency 8902A Cal Factor Uncertainty
Reading Frequency

(MHz) (dB) (MHz) (dB)

448 Chapter 8
Using Performance Tests: 3335A Source not Available
40a. Frequency Response: Agilent 8564E/EC

Table 8-46 Frequency Response, Band 1 (2.9 GHz to 6.5 GHz)

Chapter 8 449
Using Performance Tests: 3335A Source not Available
40a. Frequency Response: Agilent 8564E/EC

Table 8-47 Frequency Response, Band 2 (6.5 GHz to 13.2 GHz)

450 Chapter 8
Using Performance Tests: 3335A Source not Available
40a. Frequency Response: Agilent 8564E/EC

Table 8-48 Frequency Response, Band 3(13.2 GHz to 26.8 GHz)

Source Agilent Pwr Sensor Measurement
Frequency 8902A Cal Factor Uncertainty
Reading Frequency
(GHz) (dB) (GHz) (dB)
13.25 14.0 +0.53/−0.60
13.4 14.0 +0.53/−0.60
13.6 14.0 +0.53/−0.60
13.8 14.0 +0.53/−0.60
14.0 14.0 +0.53/−0.60
14.2 14.0 +0.53/−0.60
14.4 14.0 +0.53/−0.60
14.6 14.0 +0.53/−0.60
14.8 14.0 +0.53/−0.60
15.0 14.0 +0.53/−0.60
15.2 16.0 +0.53/−0.60
15.4 16.0 +0.53/−0.60
15.6 16.0 +0.53/−0.60
15.8 16.0 +0.53/−0.60
16.0 16.0 +0.53/−0.60
16.2 16.0 +0.53/−0.60
16.4 16.0 +0.53/−0.60
16.6 16.0 +0.53/−0.60
16.8 16.0 +0.53/−0.60
17.0 16.0 +0.53/−0.60
17.2 18.0 +0.53/−0.60
17.4 18.0 +0.53/−0.60
17.6 18.0 +0.53/−0.60
17.8 18.0 +0.53/−0.60
18.0 18.0 +0.53/−0.60
18.2 18.0 +0.53/−0.60
18.4 18.0 +0.53/−0.60
18.6 18.0 +0.53/−0.60
18.8 18.0 +0.53/−0.60
19.0 18.0 +0.53/−0.60
19.2 20.0 +0.53/−0.60
19.4 20.0 +0.53/−0.60
19.6 20.0 +0.53/−0.60
19.8 20.0 +0.53/−0.60
20.0 20.0 +0.53/−0.60
20.2 20.0 +0.53/−0.60

Chapter 8 451
Using Performance Tests: 3335A Source not Available
40a. Frequency Response: Agilent 8564E/EC

Table 8-48 Frequency Response, Band 3(13.2 GHz to 26.8 GHz) (Continued)
Source Agilent Pwr Sensor Measurement
Frequency 8902A Cal Factor Uncertainty
Reading Frequency
(GHz) (dB) (GHz) (dB)
20.4 20.0 +0.53/−0.60
20.6 20.0 +0.53/−0.60
20.8 20.0 +0.53/−0.60
21.0 20.0 +0.53/−0.60
21.2 21.0 +0.53/−0.60
21.4 21.0 +0.53/−0.60
21.6 21.0 +0.53/−0.60
21.8 21.0 +0.53/−0.60
22.0 22.0 +0.53/−0.60
22.2 22.0 +0.53/−0.60
22.4 22.0 +0.53/−0.60
22.6 22.0 +0.53/−0.60
22.8 22.0 +0.53/−0.60
23.0 22.0 +0.53/−0.60
23.2 24.0 +0.53/−0.60
23.4 24.0 +0.53/−0.60
23.6 24.0 +0.53/−0.60
23.8 24.0 +0.53/−0.60
24.0 24.0 +0.53/−0.60
24.2 24.0 +0.53/−0.60
24.4 24.0 +0.53/−0.60
24.6 24.0 +0.53/−0.60
24.8 24.0 +0.53/−0.60
25.0 24.0 +0.53/−0.60
25.2 26.0 +0.53/−0.60
25.4 26.0 +0.53/−0.60
25.6 26.0 +0.53/−0.60
25.8 26.0 +0.53/−0.60
26.0 26.0 +0.53/−0.60
26.2 26.0 +0.53/−0.60
26.4 26.5 +0.53/−0.60
26.6 26.5 +0.53/−0.60
26.8 27.0 +0.53/−0.60

452 Chapter 8
Using Performance Tests: 3335A Source not Available
40a. Frequency Response: Agilent 8564E/EC

Table 8-49 Frequency Response, Band 4 (26.9 GHz to 31.1 GHz)

Source Agilent 8902 Pwr Sensor Measurement

Frequency A Reading Cal Factor Uncertainty
Frequency

(GHz) (dB) (GHz) (dB)

26.9 27.0 +0.74/−0.89

27.2 27.0 +0.74/−0.89

27.5 28.0 +0.74/−0.89

27.8 28.0 +0.74/−0.89

28.1 28.0 +0.74/−0.89

28.4 28.0 +0.74/−0.89

28.7 29.0 +0.74/−0.89

29.0 29.0 +0.74/−0.89

29.3 29.0 +0.74/−0.89

29.6 30.0 +0.74/−0.89

29.9 30.0 +0.74/−0.89

30.2 30.0 +0.74/−0.89

30.5 31.0 +0.74/−0.89

30.8 31.0 +0.74/−0.89

31.1 31.0 +0.74/−0.89

Chapter 8 453
Using Performance Tests: 3335A Source not Available
40a. Frequency Response: Agilent 8564E/EC

Table 8-50 Frequency Response, Band 5 (31.2 GHz to 40.0 GHz)

Source Agilent Pwr Sensor Measurement

Frequency 8902A Cal Factor Uncertainty
Reading Frequency

(GHz) (dB) (GHz) (dB)

31.2 31.0 +0.74/−0.89

31.6 32.0 +0.74/−0.89

32.0 32.0 +0.74/−0.89

32.4 32.0 +0.74/−0.89

32.8 33.0 +0.74/−0.89

33.2 33.0 +0.74/−0.89

33.6 34.0 +0.74/−0.89

34.0 34.0 +0.74/−0.89

34.4 34.0 +0.74/−0.89

34.8 35.0 +0.74/−0.89

35.2 35.0 +0.74/−0.89

35.6 36.0 +0.74/−0.89

36.0 36.0 +0.74/−0.89

36.4 36.0 +0.74/−0.89

36.8 37.0 +0.74/−0.89

37.2 37.0 +0.74/−0.89

37.6 38.0 +0.74/−0.89

38.0 38.0 +0.74/−0.89

38.4 38.0 +0.74/−0.89

38.8 39.0 +0.74/−0.89

39.2 39.0 +0.74/−0.89

39.6 40.0 +0.74/−0.89

40.0 40.0 +0.74/−0.89

454 Chapter 8
Using Performance Tests: 3335A Source not Available
40a. Frequency Response: Agilent 8564E/EC

Table 8-51 Frequency Response (<250 kHz) (Option 006 Only)

Function ACDVM Response Response Measurement

Generator Amplitude Relative to Relative to Uncertainty
Frequency (dBm) 250 kHz 300 MHz (dB)

250 kHz 0 (Ref) ±0.23

100 kHz ±0.23

10 kHz ±0.23

1 kHz ±0.23

500 Hz ±0.23

200 Hz ±0.23

Chapter 8 455
Using Performance Tests: 3335A Source not Available
40a. Frequency Response: Agilent 8564E/EC

Table 8-52 Band Switching Uncertainty

Band 0 Band 1 Band 2 Band 3 Band 3 Band 4 Band 5

Step 104c Step 105a Step 106a <22 GHz >22 GHz Step 112a Step 113a
Step 107a Step 108a
_________ _________ _________ _________ _________ _________ ________

Band 0
Step 104f N/A _________ _________ _________ _________ _________ _________
_________

Band 1
Step 105b _________ N/A _________ _________ _________ _________ _________
_________

Band 2
Step 106b _________ _________ N/A _________ _________ _________ _________
_________

Band 3
<22 GHz _________ _________ _________ N/A _________ _________ _________
Step 107b
_________

Band 3
>22 GHz _________ _________ _________ _________ N/A _________ _________
Step 108b
_________

Band 4
Step 112b _________ _________ _________ _________ _________ N/A _________
_________

Band 5
Step 113b _________ _________ _________ _________ _________ _________ N/A
_________

456 Chapter 8
Using Performance Tests: 3335A Source not Available
41a. Frequency Response: Agilent 8565E/EC

41a. Frequency Response: Agilent 8565E/EC

Instrument Under Test

Agilent 8565E/EC

Related Specification
Relative Frequency Response
Absolute Frequency Response
Band Switching Uncertainty

Related Adjustment
RYTHM Adjustment
Frequency Response Adjustment
LO Distribution Amplifier Adjustment
SBTX Adjustment

Chapter 8 457
Using Performance Tests: 3335A Source not Available
41a. Frequency Response: Agilent 8565E/EC

Figure 8-26 Frequency Response Test Setup, 250 kHz to 2.9 GHz

Figure 8-27 Frequency Response Test Setup, 2.9 MHz to 50 GHz

Figure 8-28 Frequency Response Test Setup, ≤250 kHz (Option 006, only)

458 Chapter 8
Using Performance Tests: 3335A Source not Available
41a. Frequency Response: Agilent 8565E/EC

Equipment
Measuring receiver . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Agilent 8902A
Synthesized sweeper . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Agilent 83650B
Function Generator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Agilent 3324A or Agilent 33127A
Signal generator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Agilent E4421B
AC Digital Voltmeter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Agilent 3458A
Power sensor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Agilent 8482A
Power sensor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Agilent 8487A
Power splitter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Agilent 11667A
Power splitter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Agilent 11667C
Coaxial 50 Ω termination . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Agilent 908A

Adapters
Type N (m) to type N (m) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1250-1475
Type N (m) to BNC (f) (2 required) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1250-1476
Type N (m) to APC 3.5 (f) (2 required) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1250-1744
Type N (f) to 2.4 mm (f) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Agilent 11903B
BNC (f) to Dual Banana Plug . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1251-2816
BNC Tee . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1250-0781

Cables
BNC, 122 cm (48 in) (2 required). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Agilent 10503A
APC-3.5, 91 cm (36 in) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8120-4921
2.4 mm, 91 cm (36 in) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8120-6164
DVM test leads . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Agilent 34118A

Chapter 8 459
Using Performance Tests: 3335A Source not Available
41a. Frequency Response: Agilent 8565E/EC

Center frequency. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 300 MHz

Frequency Response, Band 0 (250 kHz to 2.9 GHz)

8. Set the Agilent E4421B frequency to 250 kHz.

9. On the spectrum analyzer, press FREQUENCY, CENTER FREQ, 250, and kHz.
10. On the Agilent E4421B, adjust the power level for a spectrum analyzer MKR
amplitude reading of −10 dBm ±0.05 dB.
11. Enter the 0.3 MHz power sensor calibration factor, indicated in Table 8-53, into
the Agilent 8902A.
12. Record the negative of the power ratio displayed on the Agilent 8902A as the
Agilent 8902A reading in Table 8-53. Record the power ratio here exactly as it
is displayed on the Agilent 8902A:

Agilent 8902A reading at 250 kHz: __________________ dB

13. Set the Agilent E4421B to 1.0 MHz.

14. On the spectrum analyzer, press FREQUENCY, CENTER FREQ, 1.0, and MHz.
15. On the Agilent E4421B, adjust the power level for a spectrum analyzer MKR
amplitude reading of −10 dBm ±0.05 dB.

460 Chapter 8
Using Performance Tests: 3335A Source not Available
41a. Frequency Response: Agilent 8565E/EC

16. Enter the 1.0 MHz power sensor calibration factor, indicated in Table 8-53, into
the Agilent 8902A.
17. Record the negative of the power ratio displayed on the Agilent 8902A, as the
Agilent 8902A reading in Table 8-53.
18. On the Agilent E4421B, set the frequency to the next value listed in Table 8-53.
19. On the spectrum analyzer, set the center frequency to the next value listed in
Table 8-53.
20. On the Agilent E4421B, adjust the power level for a spectrum analyzer MKR
amplitude reading of −10 dBm ±0.05 dB.
21. Enter the power sensor calibration factor, indicated in Table 8-53, into the
Agilent 8902A.
22. Record the negative of the power ratio displayed on the Agilent 8902A, as the
Agilent 8902A reading in Table 8-53.
23. To step through the remaining frequencies listed in Table 8-53, repeat step 18
through step 22.

NOTE It will be necessary to enter the last source and spectrum analyzer frequency,
2.9 GHz, manually; the step functions will set the frequency to 2.95 GHz.

Frequency Response, Band 1 (2.9 GHz to 6.5 GHz)

24. If the instrument has warmed up for 30 minutes or more and is in a 20 to 30 °C

environment, Preselector Auto Peak is not necessary.
25. Connect the equipment as shown in Figure 8-27, using the Agilent 11667C
power splitter.
26. Zero and calibrate the Agilent 8902A with the Agilent 8487A.
27. On the spectrum analyzer, press FREQUENCY, 2.95, and GHz.
28. Set the Agilent 83650B frequency to 2.95 GHz.
29. On the spectrum analyzer, press AUX CTRL, INTERNAL MIXER, and
PRESEL AUTO PK. Wait for the PEAKING message to disappear.

30. On the Agilent 83650B, adjust the power level for a spectrum analyzer MKR
amplitude reading of −10 dBm ±0.05 dB.
31. Enter the 2.0 GHz power sensor calibration factor, indicated in Table 8-54, into
the Agilent 8902A.
32. Record the negative of the power ratio displayed on the Agilent 8902A as the
Agilent 8902A reading in Table 8-54.

Chapter 8 461
Using Performance Tests: 3335A Source not Available
41a. Frequency Response: Agilent 8565E/EC

33. On the Agilent 83650B, set the frequency to the next value listed in Table 8-54.
34. On the spectrum analyzer, set the center frequency to the next value listed in
Table 8-54.
35. On the Agilent 83650B, adjust the power level for a spectrum analyzer MKR
amplitude reading of −10 dBm ±0.05 dB.
36. Enter the power sensor calibration factor, indicated in Table 8-54, into the
Agilent 8902A.
37. Record the negative of the power ratio displayed on the Agilent 8902A as the
Agilent 8902A reading in Table 8-54.
38. To step through the remaining frequencies listed in Table 8-54, repeat step 33
through step 37.

Frequency Response, Band 2 (6.5 GHz to 13.2 GHz)

39. On the spectrum analyzer, press FREQUENCY, 6.5, GHz, CF STEP, 200, and
MHz.

40. Set the Agilent 83650B frequency to 6.5 GHz and the FREQ STEP to
200 MHz.
41. On the spectrum analyzer, press AUX CTRL, INTERNAL MIXER, and
PRESEL AUTO PK. Wait for the PEAKING message to disappear.

42. On the Agilent 83650B, adjust the power level for a spectrum analyzer MKR
amplitude reading of −10 dBm ±0.05 dB.
43. Enter the 6.0 GHz power sensor calibration factor, indicated in Table 8-55, into
the Agilent 8902A.
44. Record the negative of the power ratio displayed on the Agilent 8902A as the
Agilent 8902A reading in Table 8-55.
45. On the Agilent 83650B, to set the frequency to the next value listed in
Table 8-55.
46. On the spectrum analyzer, set the center frequency to the next value listed in
Table 8-55.
47. On the Agilent 83650B, adjust the power level for a spectrum analyzer MKR
amplitude reading of −10 dBm ±0.05 dB.
48. Enter the power sensor calibration factor, indicated in Table 8-55, into the
Agilent 8902A.
49. Record the negative of the power ratio displayed on the Agilent 8902A as the
Agilent 8902A reading in Table 8-55.
50. To step through the remaining frequencies listed in Table 8-55, repeat step 45
through step 49.

462 Chapter 8
Using Performance Tests: 3335A Source not Available
41a. Frequency Response: Agilent 8565E/EC

NOTE It will be necessary to enter the last source and spectrum analyzer frequency,
13.2 GHz, manually; the step functions will set the frequency to 13.3 GHz.

Frequency Response, Band 3 (13.2 GHz to 26.8 GHz)

51. On the spectrum analyzer, press FREQUENCY, 13.25, GHz.

52. Set the Agilent 83650B frequency to 13.25 GHz.
53. On the spectrum analyzer, press AUX CTRL, INTERNAL MIXER, and
PRESEL AUTO PK. Wait for the PEAKING message to disappear.

54. On the Agilent 83650B, adjust the power level for a spectrum analyzer MKR
amplitude reading of −10 dBm ±0.05 dB.
55. Enter the 13.0 GHz power sensor calibration factor, indicated in Table 8-56,
into the Agilent 8902A.
56. Record the negative of the power ratio displayed on the Agilent 8902A as the
Agilent 8902A reading in Table 8-56.
57. On the Agilent 83650B, set the frequency to the next value listed in Table 8-56.
58. On the spectrum analyzer, set the center frequency to the next value listed in
Table 8-56.
59. On the Agilent 83650B, adjust the power level for a spectrum analyzer MKR
amplitude reading of −10 dBm ±0.05 dB.
60. Enter the power sensor calibration factor, indicated in Table 8-56, into the
Agilent 8902A.
61. Record the negative of the power ratio displayed on the Agilent 8902A as the
Agilent 8902A reading in Table 8-56.
62. To step through the remaining frequencies listed in Table 8-56, repeat step 57
through step 61.

Chapter 8 463
Using Performance Tests: 3335A Source not Available
41a. Frequency Response: Agilent 8565E/EC

Frequency Response, Band 4 (26.9 GHz to 31.1 GHz)

63. On the spectrum analyzer, press FREQUENCY, 26.9, GHz.

64. Set the Agilent 83650B frequency to 26.9 GHz.
65. On the spectrum analyzer, press AUX CTRL, INTERNAL MIXER, and
PRESEL AUTO PK. Wait for the PEAKING message to disappear.

66. On the Agilent 83650B, adjust the power level for a spectrum analyzer MKR
amplitude reading of −10 dBm ±0.05 dB.

67. Enter the 27.0 GHz power sensor calibration factor, indicated in Table 8-57,
into the Agilent 8902A.
68. Record the negative of the power ratio displayed on the Agilent 8902A as the
Agilent 8902A reading in Table 8-57.
69. On the Agilent 83650B, set the frequency to the next value listed in Table 8-57.
70. On the spectrum analyzer, set the center frequency to the next value listed in
Table 8-57.
71. On the Agilent 83650B, adjust the power level for a spectrum analyzer MKR
amplitude reading of −10 dBm ±0.05 dB.
72. Enter the power sensor calibration factor, indicated in Table 8-57, into the
Agilent 8902A.
73. Record the negative of the power ratio displayed on the Agilent 8902A as the
Agilent 8902A reading in Table 8-57.
74. To step through the remaining frequencies listed in Table 8-57, repeat step 69
through step 73.

Frequency Response, Band 5 (31.2 GHz to 50.0 GHz)

75. On the spectrum analyzer, press FREQUENCY, 31.2, GHz.

76. Set the Agilent 83650B frequency to 31.2 GHz.
77. On the spectrum analyzer, press AUX CTRL, INTERNAL MIXER, and
PRESEL AUTO PK. Wait for the PEAKING message to disappear.

78. On the Agilent 83650B, adjust the power level for a spectrum analyzer MKR
amplitude reading of −10 dBm ±0.05 dB.
79. Enter the 31.0 GHz power sensor calibration factor, indicated in Table 8-57,
into the Agilent 8902A.

464 Chapter 8
Using Performance Tests: 3335A Source not Available
41a. Frequency Response: Agilent 8565E/EC

80. Record the negative of the power ratio displayed on the Agilent 8902A as the
Agilent 8902A reading in Table 8-27.
81. On the Agilent 83650B, set the frequency to the next value listed in Table 8-23.
82. On the spectrum analyzer, set the center frequency to the next value listed in
Table 8-23.
83. On the Agilent 83650B, adjust the power level for a spectrum analyzer MKR
amplitude reading of −10 dBm ±0.05 dB.
84. Enter the power sensor calibration factor, indicated in Table 8-23, into the
Agilent 8902A.
85. Record the negative of the power ratio displayed on the Agilent 8902A as the
Agilent 8902A reading in Table 8-27.
86. To step through the remaining frequencies listed in Table 8-27, repeat step 81
through step 85.

Frequency Response (≤250 kHz) (Option 006 Only)

87. On the spectrum analyzer, set the controls as follows:

Chapter 8 465
Using Performance Tests: 3335A Source not Available
41a. Frequency Response: Agilent 8565E/EC

92. Zero and calibrate the sensor.

93. Adjust the Agilent 3324A amplitude until the Agilent 8902A display reads the
same value as recorded in step 12.
94. Disconnect the Agilent 8482A power sensor from the power splitter and
connect the Agilent 3458A.
95. Record the Agilent 3458A reading here and in Table 8-59:

Agilent 3458A reading at 250 kHz: _______________ dBm

96. On the spectrum analyzer, press PEAK SEARCH and MARKER DELTA.
97. Set the spectrum analyzer CENTER FREQ and the Agilent 3324A frequency to
the next frequency listed in Table 8-59.
98. Press PEAK SEARCH on the spectrum analyzer.
99. Adjust the Agilent 3324A amplitude for a Δ MKR amplitude reading of
0.00 dBm ±0.05 dB.
100.Record the Agilent 3458A amplitude readings in Table 8-59 as the ACDMV
amplitude.
101.To step through the remaining frequencies listed in Table 8-59, repeat step 97
through step 100.
102.For each of the frequencies listed in Table 8-59, subtract the ACDVM
amplitude reading from the ACDVM amplitude reading at 250 kHz recorded in
step 95. Record the results as the response relative to 250 kHz in Table 8-59.
103.Add to each of the response relative to 250 kHz entries in Table 8-59 the
Agilent 8902A reading for 250 kHz listed in Table 8-53. Record the results as
the response relative to 300 MHz in Table 8-59.

Test Results

104.Frequency Response, Band 0 − 250 kHz to 2.9 GHz.

a. Enter the most positive number from Table 8-59, column _______________ dB
4.

b. Enter the most positive number from Table 8-53, column _______________ dB
2.

c. Of (a) and (b), enter whichever number is more positive. _______________ dB

d. Enter the most negative number from Table 8-59, column _______________ dB
4.

e. Enter the most negative number from Table 8-53, column _______________ dB
2.

466 Chapter 8
Using Performance Tests: 3335A Source not Available
41a. Frequency Response: Agilent 8565E/EC

f. Of (d) and (e), enter whichever number is more negative. _______________ dB

g. Subtract (f) from (c). _______________ dB

105.Frequency Response, Band 1 − 2.9 GHz to 6.5 GHz.

a. Enter the most positive number from Table 8-54, column _______________ dB
2.

b. Enter the most negative number from Table 8-54, column _______________ dB
2.

c. Subtract (b) from (a). _______________ dB

106.Frequency Response, Band 2 − 6.5 GHz to 13.2 GHz.

a. Enter the most positive number from Table 8-55, column _______________ dB
2.

b. Enter the most negative number from Table 8-55, column _______________ dB
2.

c. Subtract (b) from (a). _______________ dB

107.Frequency Response, Band 3 − 13.2 GHz to 20.2 GHz.

a. Enter the most positive number from Table 8-56, column 2 _______________ dB
for center frequencies less than or equal to 22 GHz.

b. Enter the most negative number from Table 8-56, column _______________ dB
2 for center frequencies less than or equal to 22 GHz.

c. Subtract (b) from (a). _______________ dB

Chapter 8 467
Using Performance Tests: 3335A Source not Available
41a. Frequency Response: Agilent 8565E/EC

108.Frequency Response, Band 3 − 20.4 GHz to 26.8 GHz.

a. Enter the most positive number from Table 8-56, column 2 _______________ dB
for center frequencies greater than 22 GHz.

b. Enter the most negative number from Table 8-56, column _______________ dB
2 for center frequencies greater than 22 GHz.

c. Subtract (b) from (a). _______________ dB

109.Frequency Response, Band 3 − 13.2 GHz to 26.8 GHz.

110.a. Enter the most positive number from step 107 69 (a) _______________ dB
and step 108 (a).

111.b. Enter the most negative number from step 107 (b) and _______________ dB
step 108 (b).

112.Frequency Response, Band 4 − 26.9 GHz to 31.1 GHz.

a. Enter the most positive number from Table 8-57, column _______________ dB
2.

b. Enter the most negative number from Table 8-57, column _______________ dB
2.

c. Subtract (b) from (a). _______________ dB

113.Frequency Response, Band 5 − 31.2 GHz to 50.0 GHz.

a. Enter the most positive number from Table 8-58, column _______________ dB
2.

b. Enter the most negative number from Table 8-58, column _______________ dB
2.

c. Subtract (b) from (a). _______________ dB

468 Chapter 8
Using Performance Tests: 3335A Source not Available
41a. Frequency Response: Agilent 8565E/EC

Frequency Response, Band 0, 100 MHz to 2.0 GHz

114.This step applies only to spectrum analyzers with serial number prefix 3641A
or later. Enter the results of the frequency response, Band 0, for the frequency
range 100 MHz to 2.0 GHz:

a. Enter the most positive number from Table 8-53, column _______________ dB
2, for center frequencies between 100 MHz and
2.0 GHz.

b. Enter the most negative number from Table 8-53, column _______________ dB
2, for center frequencies between 100 MHz and
2.0 GHz.

c. Subtract (b) from (a). _______________ dB

Band Switching Uncertainty

115.In the top row of Table 8-60, enter the values recorded in the indicated steps.
For example, if step 107 (a) has a value of 1.22 dB, enter “1.22 dB” in the top
row of the Band 3 column.
116.In the left column of Table 8-60, enter the values recorded in the indicated
steps. For example, if step 106 (b) has a value of −0.95 dB, enter “−0.95 dB” in
the left column of the Band 2 row.
Compute the other entries in Table 8-60 by taking the absolute value of the
difference between the values in the left column and the top row.

Chapter 8 469
Using Performance Tests: 3335A Source not Available
41a. Frequency Response: Agilent 8565E/EC

Table 8-53 Frequency Response, Band 0 (250 kHz to 2.9 GHz)

Source Agilent Pwr Sensor Measurement
Frequency 8902A Cal Factor Uncertainty
Reading Frequency

(MHz) (dB) (MHz) (dB)

0.250 0.01 +0.37/−0.41
1 1 +0.37/−0.41
10 10 +0.37/−0.41
20 10 +0.37/−0.41
50 30 +0.37/−0.41
90 100 +0.32/-0.34
150 100 +0.37/−0.41
250 300 +0.37/−0.41
350 300 +0.37/−0.41
450 300 +0.37/−0.41
550 300 +0.37/−0.41
650 1000 +0.37/−0.41
750 1000 +0.37/−0.41
850 1000 +0.37/−0.41
950 1000 +0.37/−0.41
1050 1000 +0.37/−0.41
1150 1000 +0.37/−0.41
1250 1000 +0.37/−0.41
1350 1000 +0.37/−0.41
1450 1000 +0.37/−0.41
1550 2000 +0.37/−0.41
1650 2000 +0.37/−0.41
1750 2000 +0.37/−0.41
1850 2000 +0.37/−0.41
1950 2000 +0.37/−0.41
2050 2000 +0.37/−0.41
2150 2000 +0.37/−0.41
2250 2000 +0.37/−0.41
2350 2000 +0.37/−0.41
2450 2000 +0.37/−0.41
2550 3000 +0.37/−0.41
2650 3000 +0.37/−0.41
2750 3000 +0.37/−0.41
2850 3000 +0.37/−0.41
2900 3000 +0.37/−0.41

470 Chapter 8
Using Performance Tests: 3335A Source not Available
41a. Frequency Response: Agilent 8565E/EC

Table 8-54 Frequency Response, Band 1 (2.9 GHz to 6.5 GHz)

Source Agilent Pwr Sensor Measurement
Frequency 8902A Cal Factor Uncertainty
Reading Frequency
(GHz) (dB) (GHz) (dB)
2.95 2.0 +0.49/−0.55
3.05 4.0 +0.49/−0.55
3.15 4.0 +0.49/−0.55
3.25 4.0 +0.49/−0.55
3.35 4.0 +0.49/−0.55
3.45 4.0 +0.49/−0.55
3.55 4.0 +0.49/−0.55
3.65 4.0 +0.49/−0.55
3.75 4.0 +0.49/−0.55
3.85 4.0 +0.49/−0.55
3.95 4.0 +0.49/−0.55
4.05 4.0 +0.49/−0.55
4.15 4.0 +0.49/−0.55
4.25 4.0 +0.49/−0.55
4.35 4.0 +0.49/−0.55
4.45 4.0 +0.49/−0.55
4.55 4.0 +0.49/−0.55
4.65 4.0 +0.49/−0.55
4.75 4.0 +0.49/−0.55
4.85 4.0 +0.49/−0.55
4.95 4.0 +0.49/−0.55
5.05 6.0 +0.49/−0.55
5.15 6.0 +0.49/−0.55
5.25 6.0 +0.49/−0.55
5.35 6.0 +0.49/−0.55
5.45 6.0 +0.49/−0.55
5.55 6.0 +0.49/−0.55
5.65 6.0 +0.49/−0.55
5.75 6.0 +0.49/−0.55
5.85 6.0 +0.49/−0.55
5.95 6.0 +0.49/−0.55
6.05 6.0 +0.49/−0.55
6.15 6.0 +0.49/−0.55
6.25 6.0 +0.49/−0.55
6.35 6.0 +0.49/−0.55
6.45 6.0 +0.49/−0.55

Chapter 8 471
Using Performance Tests: 3335A Source not Available
41a. Frequency Response: Agilent 8565E/EC

Table 8-55 Frequency Response, Band 2 (6.5 GHz to 13.2 GHz)

Source Agilent Pwr Sensor Measurement
Frequency 8902A Cal Factor Uncertainty
Reading Frequency
(GHz) (dB) (GHz) (dB)
6.5 6.0 +0.49/−0.56
6.7 6.0 +0.49/−0.56
6.9 6.0 +0.49/−0.56
7.1 8.0 +0.49/−0.56
7.3 8.0 +0.49/−0.56
7.5 8.0 +0.49/−0.56
7.7 8.0 +0.49/−0.56
7.9 8.0 +0.49/−0.56
8.1 8.0 +0.49/−0.56
8.3 8.0 +0.49/−0.56
8.5 8.0 +0.49/−0.56
8.7 8.0 +0.49/−0.56
8.9 8.0 +0.49/−0.56
9.1 10.0 +0.49/−0.56
9.3 10.0 +0.49/−0.56
9.5 10.0 +0.49/−0.56
9.7 10.0 +0.49/−0.56
9.9 10.0 +0.49/−0.56
10.1 10.0 +0.49/−0.56
10.3 10.0 +0.49/−0.56
10.5 10.0 +0.49/−0.56
10.7 10.0 +0.49/−0.56
10.9 10.0 +0.49/−0.56
11.1 12.0 +0.49/−0.56
11.3 12.0 +0.49/−0.56
11.5 12.0 +0.49/−0.56
11.7 12.0 +0.49/−0.56
11.9 12.0 +0.49/−0.56
12.1 12.0 +0.49/−0.56
12.3 12.0 +0.49/−0.56
12.5 12.0 +0.49/−0.56
12.7 12.0 +0.49/−0.56
12.9 12.0 +0.49/−0.56
13.1 14.0 +0.49/−0.56
13.2 14.0 +0.49/−0.56

472 Chapter 8
Using Performance Tests: 3335A Source not Available
41a. Frequency Response: Agilent 8565E/EC

Table 8-56 Frequency Response, Band 3 (13.2 GHz to 26.8 GHz)

Chapter 8 473
Using Performance Tests: 3335A Source not Available
41a. Frequency Response: Agilent 8565E/EC

Table 8-56 Frequency Response, Band 3 (13.2 GHz to 26.8 GHz) (Continued)
Source Agilent Pwr Sensor Measurement
Frequency 8902A Cal Factor Uncertainty
Reading Frequency
(GHz) (dB) (GHz) (dB)
20.4 20.0 +0.53/−0.60
20.6 20.0 +0.53/−0.60
20.8 20.0 +0.53/−0.60
21.0 20.0 +0.53/−0.60
21.2 21.0 +0.53/−0.60
21.4 21.0 +0.53/−0.60
21.6 21.0 +0.53/−0.60
21.8 21.0 +0.53/−0.60
22.0 22.0 +0.53/−0.60
22.2 22.0 +0.53/−0.60
22.4 22.0 +0.53/−0.60
22.6 22.0 +0.53/−0.60
22.8 22.0 +0.53/−0.60
23.0 22.0 +0.53/−0.60
23.2 24.0 +0.53/−0.60
23.4 24.0 +0.53/−0.60
23.6 24.0 +0.53/−0.60
23.8 24.0 +0.53/−0.60
24.0 24.0 +0.53/−0.60
24.2 24.0 +0.53/−0.60
24.4 24.0 +0.53/−0.60
24.6 24.0 +0.53/−0.60
24.8 24.0 +0.53/−0.60
25.0 24.0 +0.53/−0.60
25.2 26.0 +0.53/−0.60
25.4 26.0 +0.53/−0.60
25.6 26.0 +0.53/−0.60
25.8 26.0 +0.53/−0.60
26.0 26.0 +0.53/−0.60
26.2 26.0 +0.53/−0.60
26.4 26.5 +0.53/−0.60
26.6 26.5 +0.53/−0.60
26.8 27.0 +0.53/−0.60

474 Chapter 8
Using Performance Tests: 3335A Source not Available
41a. Frequency Response: Agilent 8565E/EC

Table 8-57 Frequency Response, Band 4 (26.9 GHz to 31.1 GHz)

Source Agilent Pwr Sensor Measurement
Frequency 8902A Cal Factor Uncertainty
Reading Frequency

(GHz) (dB) (GHz) (dB)

26.9 27.0 +0.74/−0.89
27.2 27.0 +0.74/−0.89
27.5 28.0 +0.74/−0.89
27.8 28.0 +0.74/−0.89
28.1 28.0 +0.74/−0.89
28.4 28.0 +0.74/−0.89
28.7 29.0 +0.74/−0.89
29.0 29.0 +0.74/−0.89
29.3 29.0 +0.74/−0.89
29.6 30.0 +0.74/−0.89
29.9 30.0 +0.74/−0.89
30.2 30.0 +0.74/−0.89
30.5 31.0 +0.74/−0.89
30.8 31.0 +0.74/−0.89
31.1 31.0 +0.74/−0.89

Chapter 8 475
Using Performance Tests: 3335A Source not Available
41a. Frequency Response: Agilent 8565E/EC

Table 8-58 Frequency Response, Band 5 (31.2 GHz to 50.0 GHz)

Source Agilent Pwr Sensor Measurement
Frequency 8902A Cal Factor Uncertainty
Reading Frequency

(GHz) (dB) (GHz) (dB)

31.2 31.0 +0.74/−0.89
31.6 32.0 +0.74/−0.89
32.0 32.0 +0.74/−0.89
32.4 32.0 +0.74/−0.89
32.8 33.0 +0.74/−0.89
33.2 33.0 +0.74/−0.89
33.6 34.0 +0.74/−0.89
34.0 34.0 +0.74/−0.89
34.4 34.0 +0.74/−0.89
34.8 35.0 +0.74/−0.89
35.2 35.0 +0.74/−0.89
35.6 36.0 +0.74/−0.89
36.0 36.0 +0.74/−0.89
36.4 36.0 +0.74/−0.89
36.8 37.0 +0.74/−0.89
37.2 37.0 +0.74/−0.89
37.6 38.0 +0.74/−0.89
38.0 38.0 +0.74/−0.89
38.4 38.0 +0.74/−0.89
38.8 39.0 +0.74/−0.89
39.2 39.0 +0.74/−0.89
39.6 40.0 +0.74/−0.89
40.0 40.0 +0.74/−0.89
40.4 40.0 +0.74/−0.89
40.8 41.0 +0.74/−0.89
41.2 41.0 +0.74/−0.89
41.6 42.0 +0.74/−0.89
42.0 42.0 +0.74/−0.89
42.4 42.0 +0.74/−0.89
42.8 43.0 +0.74/−0.89
43.2 43.0 +0.74/−0.89
43.6 44.0 +0.74/−0.89
44.0 44.0 +0.74/−0.89
44.4 44.0 +0.74/−0.89

476 Chapter 8
Using Performance Tests: 3335A Source not Available
41a. Frequency Response: Agilent 8565E/EC

Table 8-58 Frequency Response, Band 5 (31.2 GHz to 50.0 GHz) (Continued)
Source Agilent Pwr Sensor Measurement
Frequency 8902A Cal Factor Uncertainty
Reading Frequency

(GHz) (dB) (GHz) (dB)

44.8 45.0 +0.74/−0.89
45.2 45.0 +0.74/−0.89
45.6 46.0 +0.74/−0.89
46.0 46.0 +0.74/−0.89
46.4 46.0 +0.74/−0.89
46.8 47.0 +0.74/−0.89
47.2 47.0 +0.74/−0.89
47.6 48.0 +0.74/−0.89
48.0 48.0 +0.74/−0.89
48.4 48.0 +0.74/−0.89
48.8 49.0 +0.74/−0.89
49.2 49.0 +0.74/−0.89
49.6 50.0 +0.74/−0.89
50.0 50.0 +0.74/−0.89

Table 8-59 Frequency Response (<250 kHz) (Option 006 Only)

Function ACDVM Response Response Measurement

Generator Amplitude Relative to Relative to Uncertainty
Frequency (dBm) 250 kHz 300 MHz (dB)

250 kHz 0 (Ref) ±0.23

100 kHz ±0.23

10 kHz ±0.23

1 kHz ±0.23

500 Hz ±0.23

200 Hz ±0.23

Chapter 8 477
Using Performance Tests: 3335A Source not Available
41a. Frequency Response: Agilent 8565E/EC

Table 8-60 Band Switching Uncertainty